Are you sure?
This action might not be possible to undo. Are you sure you want to continue?
LATIN
GRAMMAR
BY
E.
CHARLES
BENNETT
in
Late Goldwin Smith Professor of Latin
Cornell University
Quicquid praecipies, esto brevis, ut
cito dicta *
Percipiant animi dociles teneantque fideles
Omne supemacuum plena
de pectore manat.
— Horace, Ars
Poetica.
ALLYN AND BACON
BOSTON
NEW YORK
ATLANTA
CHICAG6
SAN FRANCISCO
First edition printed February, 1895.
Jnly, 1897;
Reprinted April and September, 1895 > April, 1896; April, 1898; May and September, 1899;
April and November, 1900; October, 1901; March,
1902; April and November, 1903; July, 1904; April, 1905; April and November, 1906.
Revised edition printed March, 1908.
March, 191 1
May, 19 Oj March, 1912; March, 1913; April, 1914; March, 1915; March, 1916; March, 1917. Third edition printed June, 1918. Reprinted March and December, 1919; September,
;
Reprinted April and October, igog;
1920; June, 1921; June, 1922;
March and July, 1923;
1923; January and July, 1924; April, August and October, 1925; October, 1926; March,
October,
1927.
::OPYRIGHT, 1895; 1908; 1918.
*BY CHARLKS
E.
BENNETT.
PREFACE.
The present work is a revision of that published in 1908. No radical alterations have been introduced, although a
number
of minor changes will be noted.
I
have added an
Introduction on the origin and development of the Latin
language, which
structive to the
it is hoped will prove interesting and inmore ambitious pupil. At the end of the
book will be found an Index to the Sources tive Examples cited in the Syntax.
Ithaca,
of the IllustraC. E. B.
New
York,
May
4, 1918.
PREFACE TO THE SECOND EDITION.
The
present book
is
a revision of
my
Latin Grammar
Wherever greater accuracy or precision of statement seemed possible, I have endeavored
originally published in 1895.
to secure this.
The
rules for syllable division
have been
changed and made
of the
to
conform
-Imus,
to the
prevaiUng practice
Romans
themselves.
-is,
In the Perfect Subjunctive
-itis
Active, the endings
are
now marked
long.
The theory
Syntax
I
of vowel length before the suffixes -gnus, -gna,
-gnum, and also before
discarded. In the j, has been have recognized a special category of Ablative of Association, and have abandoned the original doctrine
as to the force of tenses in the Prohibitive.
Apart from the foregoing, only minor and unessential In its main lines the work remains unchanged.
modifications have been introduced.
Ithaca,
Nkw
York,
October i6, 1907.
FROM THE PREFACE TO THE FIRST EDITION.
The
within
object of this
book
is
to present the essential facts
of Latin
grammar
in a direct
and simple manner, and
consistent
the
smallest compass
with scholarly
While intended primarily for the secondary school, it has not neglected the needs of the college student, and aims to furnish such grammatical information as
standards.
is
ordinarily required in undergraduate courses.
of foreign educators in recent years has tended to restrict the size of school-grammars of Latin, and has demanded an incorporation of the main principles of the language in compact manuals of 250 pages. Within
The experience
grammars of this scope have appeared abroad which have amply met the most exacting demands.
the past decade, several
The
all
publication in this country of a
grammar
of similar
plan and scope seems fully justified at the present time, as
recent editions of classic texts summarize in introductions the special idioms of
grammar and
style peculiar to
This makes it feasible to dispense with the enumeration of many minutiae of usage which
individual authors.
would otherwise demand consideration in a student's grammar. In the chapter on Prosody, I have designedly omitted all special treatment of the lyric metres of Horace and Catullus, as well as of the measures of the comic poets. Our standard editions of these authors all give such thorough consideration to versification that repetition in a separate place seems superfluous.
Ithaca,
New
York,
December
15, 1894.
TABLE OF CONTENTS.
Introduction
— The Latin Language
Part L
sounds, accent, quantity, etc.
ix
The Alphabet
Oassification of Sounds
i
Accent
Sounds of the Letters
Syllables
....
...
5
Vowel Changes 3 Consonant Changes
i
6
7
. .
4 4
Peculiarities of
Orthography
7
Quantity
Part
CHAPTER \.— Declension.
A. Nouns.
II.
INFLECTIONS
C.
Pronouns.
.
Personal Pronouns
10
Reflexive Pronouns Possessive Pronouns
48
49
49 5°
51
Gender of Nouns
.
Number
Cases
n
II
Demonstrative Pronouns
The Five Declensions
First
....
12
Declension
13
The The
Intensive Pronoun
Relative Pronoun
51
Second Declension
Third Declension
Interrogative Pronouns
14
18
Indefinite
52 52 S3
Pronouns
.
Fourth Declension
Fifth Declension
28
29
Pronominal Adjectives
Defective
Nouns
B. Adjectives.
30
CHAPTER
.
II.
Conjugation.
Verb Stems The Four Conjugations
.
54
55
Adjectives of the First and Second
Conjugation of
Sum
. .
. .
56 58 62 66 70
Declensions
Adjectives of the Third Declension
.
34 First Conjugation Second Conjugation
Comparison of Adjectives Formation and Comparison of
...
36 Third Conjugation 40 Fourth Conjugation Verbs in -id of the Third Conju
. . .
.
Adverbs Numerals
43
45
gation
Deponent Verbs
.
.
.
74 76
VI
TABLE OF CONTENTS,.
PAGB
Semi-Deponents
Periphrastic Conjugation
78
List of the
Most Important Verbs
...
.
.
78
79
with Principal Parts
Irregular Verbs
...
83
9S '02
Peculiarities of Conjugation
Formation of the Verb Stems
.
80 Defective Verbs Impersonal Verbs
'04
Part
Adverbs
Prepositions
Interjections
III.
PARTICLES.
'°6
°7
108
Part IV.
WORD FORMATION.
I.
Derivatives.
Adverbs
109
iii
II.
IF4
Nouns
Verbs
...
....
Adjectives
Compounds.
. . .
113
Examples of Compounds
Part V.
SYNTAX.
CHAPTER
Form
I.
— Sentences.
.
CHAPTER
117
III.
— Syntax of
. .
.
Classification of Sentences
.117 .119
Adjectives.
of Interrogative Sentences
. . .
Agreement of Adjectives
153
Subject and Predicate
Adjectives used Substantively
.
154 156
Simple and Compound Sentences 119 Adjectives with the Force of Ad-
CHAPTER
Subject
Predicate
II.
— Syntax of A^ouns.
120
verbs
Comparatives and Superlatives
.
156 156
Other Peculiarities
Nouns
120
121
Appositives
CHAPTER
IV.
— Syntax of
«S7 "57
.
The Nominative The Accusative The Dative The Genitive The Ablative The Locative
122 122 129 134
14:2
Pronouns.
Personal Pronouns
Possessive Pronouns Reflexive Pronouns
.
158 159
Reciprocal Pronouns
152
Demonstrative Pronouns
TABLE OF CONTENTS.
Relative Pronouns
Indefinite
vu
FACE
i6i
Conditional Clauses of Comparison
Pronouns
Pronominal Adjectives
....
163
203
.
164
Concessive Clauses
Adversative
Clauses
.
.
203
vfith
CHAPTER N.— Syntax
Agreement of Verbs
Voices
Tenses
Quapivls,
of Verbs.
etc.
Quamquam,
203
165
Clauses of Wish and Proviso 205
Relative Clauses
Indirect Discourse
167
167
Indicative
.... ....
205 206
206
Of the Of tlie Of the Moods
167
. . .
Moods
in
Indirect
Dis-
Subjunctive
Infinitive
.171
174 176
course
Tenses in
course
Indirect
Dis-
208
209
211
In Independent Sentences
Volitive Subjunctive
.
.
.
Optative Subjunctive
Potential Subjunctive
.
.
.
.
.176 .176 .178 .179
180
.
Conditional Sentences in
Indirect Discourse
. .
Implied Indirect Discourse
Subjunctive by Attraction
.
.
212 212
213 217 220 223
Imperative
Noun and Adjective Forms
Verb
Infinitive
of the
In Dependent Qauses . Clauses of Purpose Qauses of Characteristic
.
.
181
.
.181
.
1
82
Participles
Clauses of Result
.
.
.
.184
185
Gerund
Supine
Causal Clauses
Temporal Clauses 187 Introduced by Posiquam,
Ut, Ubi,etc.
.... ....
.
.
CHAPTER \l.— Particles.
Coordinate Conjunctions
.
. .
187 188
C«OT-Clauses
223
Introduced by Anteqtiam
Adverbs
227
and Priusq-uam
Introduced by
nee,
.190
191
Dum, Do-
CHAPTER Vn.—
and
Word- Order
Quoad
....
. .
Sentence- Structure.
Substantive Clauses
.
192 Word-Order
Sentence-Structure
227 232
Developed from the Volitive
192
Developed from the Optative
.......
dubito,
etc.
.
.
194
19s
CHAPTER Vlll.— Hints on
Latin
Style.
01 Result
After
non
195 Nouns
Adjectives
233 235 236
Introduced by
Quod
.
.
.196
.
Indirect Questions
.
197
Pronouns
Conditional Sentences
.
Use
ot
St.,
Nisi^ Sin
•
.
.
.198 Verbs 202 The Cases
236 238
via
TABLE OF CONTENTS.
Part VI.
PROSODY.
PAGE
rAGB
Quantity of Vowels and Syllables
The 240 The
243
Dactylic Hexameter
.
.
Dactylic Pentameter
.
.
.245 .246
246
Verse-Structure
Iambic Measures
SUPPLEMENTS TO THE GRAMMAR.
I.
II.
Roman Calendar Roman Names
....
247 249
I
III.
Figures of Syntax and Rhetoric
{
249
Index to the
Illustrative
Examples Cited
in the
Syntax
251
Index to the Principal Parts of Latin Verbs
General Index
259
,,....
263
INTRODUCTION.
THE LATIN LANGUAGE.
The Indo-European Family of Languages. Latin belongs one group of a large family of languages, known as IndoEuropean}- This Indo-European family of languages embraces the following groups
I.
—
to
:
&SIATIC
a.
MEMBERS OF THE INDO-EUROPEAN FAMHiT.
Of
this there
The Sanskrit, spoken in ancient India.
is
were
several stages, the oldest of which
the Vedic, or language of
oldest literary producof the
the Vedic
tions
Hymns. These Hymns are the known to us among all the branches
Indo-European
family.
A
conservative estimate places them as far back as
1500 B.C. Some scholars have even set them more than a thousand years earlier than this, i.e. anterior to 2500 B.C. The Sanskrit, in modified form, has always continued to be
spoken in India, and is represented to-day by a large number of dialects descended from the ancient Sanskrit, and spoken by
millions of people.
The Iranian, spoken in ancient Persia, and closely related There were two main branches of the Iranian group, viz. the Old Persian and the Avestan. The Old Persian was the official language of the court, and appears in a number of so-called cuneiform ^ inscriptions, the earliest of which date The other from the time of Darius I (sixth century B.C.). branch of the Iranian, the Avestan,^ is the language of the Avesta or sacred books of the Parsees, the followers of Zorob.
to the Sanskrit.
Sometimes also called Aryan or Indo- Germanic. Cuneiform means " wedge-shaped." The name applies Btrokes of which the characters consist.
1 2
to the
form of the
*
The name Zend
is
often given to this.
X
aster,
INTRODUCTION.
founder of the religion of the fire-worshippers.
Portions
of these sacred books
may have been composed
as early as
lOOO
B.C.
is
Modern Persian
speech.
larly
a living representative of the old Iranian
been much modified by time, particumany words from the Arabic. c. The Armenian, spoken in Armenia, the district near the Black Sea and Caucasus Mountains. This is closely related to the liranian, and was formerly classified under that group. It is
It has naturally
through the introduction of
now recognized
fourth
as entitled to independent rank.
The
earliesi
literary productions of the
Armenian language date from
the
and
fifth
centuries of the Christian era.
To
this period
belong the translation of the Scriptures and the old Armenian
Chronicle. The Armenian is still a living language, though spoken in widely separated districts, owing to the scattered locations in which the Armenians are found to-day.
d.
The Tokharian.
identified as
This language, only recently discovered
,
and
Indo-European, was spoken in the districts east of the Caspian Sea (modern Turkestan). While in some
respects closely related to the three Asiatic branches of the Indo-European family already considered, in others it shows
close relationship to the
literature of the
light,
European members
of the family.
The
Tokharian, so far as it has been brought to consists mainly of translations from the Sanskrit sacred
writings,
and dates from the seventh century of our
era.
EUROPEAN MEMBERS OF THE INDO-EUROPEAN
FAMILY.
The Greek. The. Greeks had apparently long been settled e. in Greece and Asia Minor as far back as 1500 B.C. Probably
they arrived in these districts
much
earlier.
The
earliest literary
productions are the Iliad and the Odyssey of Homer, which very likely go back to the ninth century b.c. From the sixth century
B.C.
on,
Greek
its
literature is continuous.
we consider
Modern Greek, when
is
distance in time from antiquity,
remarkably
similar to the classical
Greek of the fourth and
fifth
centuries B.C.*
INTRODUCTION.
xi
Group. The Italic Group embraces the /. The Italic Umbrian, spoken in the northern part of the Italian peninsula (in ancient Umbria) the Latin, spoken in the central part (in Latium) the Oscan, spoken in the southern part (in Samnium, Campania, Lucania, etc.). Besides these, there were a number of minor dialects, such as the Marsian, Volscian, etc. Of all
;
;
these (barring the Latin), there are no remains except a few
scanty
inscriptions.
Latin
literature
begins
shortly
after
250
tus,
B.C. in
the works of Livius Andronicus, Naevius, and Plau-
although a few brief inscriptions are found belonging to a
mucii earlier period.
In the earliest historical times of which we g. The Celtic. have any record, the Celts occupied extensive portions of northern Italy, as well as certain areas in central Europe
British Isles.
;
but after
the second century e.g., they are found only in Gaul and the
Among the chief languages belonging to the group are the Gallic, spoken in ancient Gaul the Breton, still spoken in the modern French province of Brittany; the Irish, which is still extensively spoken in Ireland among the
Celtic
;
common
h.
people
;
the Welsh
;
and the Gaelic
is
of the Scotch
Highlanders.
The
Teutonic.
The Teutonic group
very extensive.
Its
earliest representative is the Gothic,
preserved for us in the
Ulfilas (about
translation of the scriptures
by the Gothic Bishop
375 A.D.). Other languages belonging to this group are the Old Norse, once spoken in Scandinavia, and from which are descended the modern Icelandic, Norwegian, Swedish, Danish;
German
i.
Dutch modern English.
;
;
Anglo-Saxon, from which
is
descended the
The Balto-Slavic.
The languages
of this
eastern Europe.
The
Baltic division of the
group belong to group embraces the
Lithuanian and Lettic, spoken to-day by the people living on
the eastern shores of the Baltic Sea.
The
earliest literary pro-
ductions of these languages date from the sixteenth century.
The Slavic division comprises a large number of languages, the most important of which are the Russian, the Bulgarian, the
XU
INTRODUCTION.
All of these were late in Serbian, the Bohemian, the Polish. developing a literature, the earliest to do so being the Old BuK garian, in which we find a translation of the Bible dating from
the ninth century.
The Albanian, spoken in Albania and parts of Greece, Italy, and Sicily. This is most nearly related to the Balto-Slavic group, and is characterized by the very large proportion of words borrowed from Latin, Turkish, Greek, and Slavic. Its literature
j.
does not begin
2.
till
the seventeenth century.
Despite the many Indo-European Family. outward differences of the various languages of the foregoing groups, a careful examination of their structure and vocabulary demonstrates their intimate relationship and proves overwhelm-
Home
'
of the
—
ingly their descent from a
therefore, that at
common
parent.
We
must
believe
one time there existed a homogeneous clan or tribe of people speaking a language from which all the above enumerated languages are descended. The precise location of
the
be determined. For a was assumed that it was in central Asia north of the Himalaya Mountains, but this view has long been rejected as untenable. It arose from the exaggerated importance attached
of this ancient tribe cannot
home
long time
it
for a long while to Sanskrit.
literary
The
great antiquity of the earliest
remains of the Sanskrit (the Vedic
Hymns)
Hence
suggested
that the inhabitants of India were geographically close to the
original seat of the
was sought
the home To-day it is thought that central or southeastern Europe is much more likely to have been the cradle of the Indo-European parent-speech,
in the elevated plateau to the north.
Indo-European Family.
•
though anything like a logical demonstration of so problem can hardly be expected.
difficult a
As to the size and extent of the original tribe whence the Indo-European languages have sprung, we can only speculate. It probably was not large, and very likely formed a compact
racial
and
linguistic unit for centuries, possibly for
thousands
of years.
The time
at
which Indo-European unity ceased and the
vari-
INTRODUCTION.
Xiii
ous individual languages began their separate existence,
likewise shrouded in obscurity.
is
When we
consider that the
may antedate 2500 B.C., it be believed that people speaking the Indo-European parent-speech belonged to a period as far back as 5000 B.C.,
separate existence of the Sanskrit
may
well
or possibly earlier.
3.
Stages in the Development of the Latin Language.
— The
earliest
remains of the Latin language are found in certain very
archaic inscriptions.
The
B.C.
oldest of these belong to the sixth
and seventh centuries
till
Roman
viz.
literature
does not begin
several centuries later,
shortly after the middle of the
third
century
B.C.
We may
recognize the following clearly
marked periods of the language and literature a. The Preliterary Period, from the earliest times down
to
240 B.C., when Livius Andronicus brought out his first play. For this period our knowledge of Latin depends almost exclusively upon the scanty inscriptions that have survived from this
remote time. Few of these are of any length. The Archaic Period, from Livius Andronicus (240 B.C.) to b. Cicero (81 B.C.). Even in this age the language had already
become highly developed
as a
medium
of expression.
In the
hands of certain gifted writers it had even become a vehicle of In its simplicity, however, it naturally power and beauty. marks a contrast with the more finished diction of later days. To this period belong
Livius Andronicus, about 275-204 B.C. (Translation
of
Homer's Odyssey
;
Tragedies).
Plautus, about 250-184 B.C. (Comedies).
Naevius, about 270-199
dies).
B.C. ("
Punic
War "
;
Come-
Ennius, 239-169
B.C. ("
Annals "
B.C.
;
Tragedies).
Terence, about 190-159
Pacuvius, 220-about 130
(Comedies).
(Tragedies).
Lucilius, 180-103 ^-C- (Satires).
B.C.
Accius, i7o-about85
b.c.
(Tragedies).
XIV
c.
INTRODUCTION.
The Golden Age, from Cicero (8i
A.D.).
gustus (14
b.c.) to the death of AuIn this period the language, especially in the
stylistic perfection,!
its
hands of Cicero, reaches a high degree of
Its vocabulary,
however, has not yet attained
greatest
full-
Traces of the diction of the Archaic Period are often noticed, especially in the poets, who naturally sought their effects by reverting to the speech of olden times. Literature reached
its
ness and range.
culmination in this epoch, especially in the
great poets of the Augustan Age.
The
following writers belong
here:
Lucretius, about
95-55
B.C.
(Poem on Epicurean
Philosophy).
Catullus, 87-about 54 B.C. (Poet). Cicero, 106-43 ^.c. (Orations Rhetorical
;
Works
Philosophical
Works
;
Letters).
Caesar, 102-44 B.C. (Commentaries on Gallic and
Civil Wars).
Sallust, 86-36 B.C. (Historian). Nepos, about loo-about 30 b.c. (Historian). Virgil, 70-19 B.C. ("Aeneid"; "Georgics"; "Bu-
colics ").
Horace, 65-8
B.C.
(Odes
;
Satires
;
Epistles),
Tibullus, about 54-19 B.C. (Poet).
Propertius, about 50-about 15 b.c (Poet). Ovid, 43 B.C.-17 A.D. ("Metamorphoses" and other poems).
Livy, 59 B.C.-17 a.d. (Historian).
d.
The Silver
Latinity,
to the death of
from the death of Augustus (14 a.d.) Marcus Aurelius (180 a.d.). This period is
marked by a
certain reaction against the excessive precision of
the previous age.
It had become the practice to pay too much attention to standardized forms of expression, and to leave too little play to the individual writer. In the healthy reaction against this formalism, greater freedom of expression now mani-
fests itself.
We
note also the introduction of idioms from the
INTRODUCTION.
colloquial language, along with
XV
usages.
many poetical words and
The
following authors deserve mention
Phaedrus, flourished about 40 a.d. (Fables in Verse)
Velleius Paterculus, flourished about 30 a.d. (Historian).
Lucan, 39-65 a.d. (Poem on the Civil War). Seneca, about 1-65 a.d. (Tragedies Philosophical Works).
;
Pliny the Elder, 23-79 a.d. (" Natural History"). Pliny the Younger, 62-about 115 a.d. ("Letters ").
Martial, about 45-about 104 a.d. (Epigrams).
Quintilian, about 3S-about 100 a.d. (Treatise on Oratory and Education).
Tacitus, about 5s-abont 118 a.d. (Historian).
Juvenal, about 55-about 135 a.d. (Satirist). Suetonius, about 75-about 150 a.d. ("Lives of the
Twelve Caesars
").
Minucius Felix, flourished
Christian Apologist).
about 160 a.d. (First
Apuleius, i2S-about 200 " Golden Ass ").
e.
B.C. ("
Metamorphoses," or
TTie
Archaizing Period.
This period
is
characterized by a
conscious imitation of the Archaic Period of the second and
first
centuries B.C.
;
it
overlaps the preceding period, and
is
of importance from a linguistic rather than from a literary point oi
view.
Of
writers
conspicuously
who manifest the archaizing tendency most may be mentioned Fronto, from whose hand we
letters
have a collection of
addressed to the Emperors Antoninus
Pius and Marcus Aurelius; also Aulus Gellius, author of the " Attic Nights." Both of these writers flourished in the second
second century a.d. The Period of the Decline, from 180 to the close of literary This period is characterized activity in the sixth century a.d.
half of the
/.
by rapid and radical
of the conversational
alterations in the language.
The
features
idiom of the lower strata of society invade
xvi
INTRODUCTION.
the literature, while in the remote provinces, such as Gaul, Spain, Africa, the language suffers from the incorporation of
local peculiarities.
Representative writers of this period are
:
TertuUian,
Writer).
about
i6o-about
240
a.d.
(Christian
Cyprian, about 200-258 a.d. (Christian Writer). Lactantius, flourished about 300 a.d. (Defense of
Christianity).
Ausonius,
about 310-about
395 a.d. (Poet).
]
Jerome, 340-420 a.d. (Translator of the Scriptures). Ambrose, about 340-397 (Christian Father).
Augustine, 354-430 (Christian Father
;
— "City
of
God ").
Prudentius, flourished 400 a.d. (Christian Poet).
Claudian, flourished 400 a.d. (Poet).
Boethius, about 480-524 a.d. (" Consolation of Phi-
losophy
4.
").
Subsequent History
of
the Latin Language.
— After
the
sixth
century a.d. Latin divides into two entirely different
streams.
One
of these
is
the literary language maintained in
scholars.
courts, in the Chur.ch,
and among
the language of people in general,
This was no longer and as time went on, became
is
more and more
idiom of the
artificial.
The
other stream
the colloquial
common
people, which developed ultimately in the
provinces into the modern so-called
in
Romance
idioms.
These
are the Italian, Spanish, Portuguese, French, Provencal (spoken
Provence,
i.e.
southeastern
France), the
(spoken in the Canton of the Grisons
in Switzerland),
Rhaeto-Romance and the
Roumanian, spoken
All these
in modern Roumania and adjacent districts. Romance languages bear the same relation to the
Latin as the different groups of the Indo-European family of languages bear to the parent-speech.
ART
I.
SOUNDS, ACCENT, QUANTITY.
—
•
THE ALPHABET.
1. The Latin Alphabet is the same as the English, except that the Latin has no w.
1.
K occurs only in Kalendae and a few other words
;
y and
z were
introduced from the Greek about 50 B.C., and occur only in foreign
words
2.
—
chiefly Greek.
employed only capitals, I served For us, however, it is more convenient to distinguish the vowel and consonant sounds, and to write Yet some scholars prefer i and u for the former, j and v for the latter. to employ i and u in the function of consonants as well as vowels.
With
the
Romans, who
regularly
both as vowel and consonant; so also V.
CLASSIFICATION OF SOUNDS.
2.
I.
are Consonants.
2.
The Vowels are a, e, i, o, u, y. The The Diphthongs are ae, oe,
are
further
other letters
ei,
au, eu, ui.
Consonants
subdivided
into
Mutes,
Liquids, Nasals,
3.
and Spirants.
are p,
t, o,
The Mutes
these,
—
k, q; b, d, g; ph, th, oh.
Of
d) p,
t, c,
k,
q
are voiceless,*
i.e.
sounded without voice or vibra-
tion of the vocal cords.
b) b, d, cords.
'
g are
voiced,'' i.e.
sounded with vibration of the vocal
2
For For
'
voiceless,'
'
surd,'
'
hard," or
soft,'
'
'
tenuis
'
'
are sometimes used.
'
voiced,'
'
sonant,'
'
or media are sometimes used.
SOUNDS, ACCENT, QUANTITY.
c)
ph, th, ch are aspirates.
sively to
These are confined almost
exclu-'
words derived fi-om the Greek, and were equivalent to p + h, t + h, o + h, i.e. to the corresponding voiceless: mutes with a following breath, as in Eng. loop-hole, hot-house^
block-house.
4.
The Mutes admit
Labials,
of classification also as
p, b, ph.
t,
Dentals (or Linguals),
Gutturals (or Palatals),
5.
d, th.
c, k, q, g,
ch.
6.
its
The Liquids are 1, r. These sounds were voiced. The Nasals are m, n. These were voiced. Besides ordinary sound, n, when followed by a guttural mute
had another sound, called n adultennum ; as,
also
— that —
of ng in sing,
— the
so-
anceps, double, pronounced angceps.
7.
The
Spirants (sgmetimes called Fricatives) are
f, s,
h.
These were voiceless. 8. The Semivowels are j and v. These were voiced. 9. Double Consonants are x and z. Of these, x was
equivalent to
cs,
while the equivalence of z
is
uncertain.
See
§ 3. 3.
10.
The following
:
consonant sounds
—
table will indicate the relations of the
SOUNDS OF THE LETTERS.
SOUNDS OF THE LETTERS.
3.
The
following pronunciation (often called
Roman)
is
substantially that
of their
1.
employed by the Romans at the height civilization i.e. roughly, from 50 B.C. to 50 a.d.
;
Vowels.
ia.
as
father
5
i
as in the
first
syllable of
aM
as in ihey as in
g as in mei
as in pin 8 as in oiey, melody ; ti as input;
machine;
.
as in note
as in rude;
like
French
u,
German
ii.
2.
Diphthongs.
ai in aisie
;
ae
like
eu with
oe
ei
like oi in oil;
its two elements, S and fi, pronounced in rapid succession
as in rein
like
ui occurs almost exclusively in cui
au
I
ow
in
how;
and huic. These words may be pronounced as though written kwee and wheek.
3.
Consonants.
f,
d,
h, k,
1,
m,
s, p,
qu
are pronounced as in English, except that
bs, bt are pronounced ps, pt.
is is
always pronounced as k. always a plain
/,
never with the sound of sh as in Eng. oration.
vowel,
always as in get ;
when ngu precedes a
languidus.
gu has
the sound of
gzv, as in anguis,
has the sound of jy as in yei.
was probably
slightly trilled with the tip of the tongue,
; in suadeo, suavis, suesco, and in compounds and derivatives of these words, su has the sound oisw. like w. always like ks ; never like Eng. gz or z. uncertain in sound possibly like Eng, zd^ possibly like z. The latter sound is recommended. The aspirates ph, oh, th were pronounced very nearly like our stressed
always voiceless as in sin
;
Eng./,
sounds
c, t
— so
nearly so, that, for practical purposes, the latter
suffice.
(Doubled
letters, like 11, mm, tt, etc., should be so pronounced that both members of the combination are distinctly articulated.
SOUNDS, ACCENT, QUANTITY.
SYLLABLES.
4.
There are as
many
syllables in a Latin
word as
there
are separate vowels and diphthongs.
In the division of words into syllables, 1. A single consonant is joined to the following vowel;
ge-iit, pe-rit, a-dest.
2.
—
as, vo-lat,
Doubled consonants,
like tt, ss, etc., are
always separated;
as,
vit-ta, mis-sus.
Other combinations of two or more consonants are regularly^ and the first consonant of the combination is joined with the preceding vowel as, ma-gis-tri, dig-nus, mon-strum, sis-te-re.
3.
separated,
;
4.
An
exception to Rule 3 occurs
1
when
;
the two consonants consisf
etc.').
of a mute followed by
or r (pi, ol, tl
pr, or, tr,
In such cases
;
both consonants are regularly joined to the following vowel
vo-lu-oris, pa-tris, ma-tris.
as, a-gri,
Yet if the 1 or r introduces the second parf of a compound, the two consonants are separated as, ab-rumpo,
;
ad-latus.
5.
The double consonant x
is
joined to the preceding vowel
;
as,
ax-iB, tex-i.
QUANTITY.
5.
A.
Quantity of Vowels.
is
A vowel
its
long ox short according to the length of time required
for
pronunciation
No
;
absolute rule can be given for determining the
quantity of Latin vowels.
measure, by experience
1.
This knowledge must be gained, in but the following principles are of aid
:
large
—
A To-wel is long,i —
a) before nf or ns;
as,
infans, inferior,
consumo,
for
censeo,
insum.
h)
2.
A vowel is short, —
a) before nt,
in
;
when the
result of contraction
;
as,
nilum
nihilum.
nd as, amant, amandus. A few exceptions occui compounds whose first member has a long vowel as, non dura (non dum).
;
b) before another vowel, or
h
;
tions occur, chiefly in proper
as,
1
meus, traho. Some excep names derived from the Greek
as,
Aeneas.
In this book, long vowels are indicated by a horizontal line above tliem; as Vowels not thus marked are short. Occasionally a curve is set abovi short vowels ; as, S, ti.
a,
i,
0, etc.
ACCENT.
B.
Quantity of Syllables.
Syllables are distinguished as long or short according to the length
of time required for their pronunciation.
1.
A syllable is long, —
i
a)
b)
if it
if it
contains a long vowel
;
as,
mater, r§gnum, dius.
contains a diphthong; as, causae, foedus.
c) if
2.
A
it contains a short vowel followed by x, z, or any two consonants (except a mute with 1 or r) as, axis, gaza, resto. syllable is short, if it contains a short vowel followed by a
; ;
as, mea, amat. Sometimes a syllable varies in quantity, viz. when its vowel is short and is followed by a mute with 1 or r, i.e. by pi, ol, tl pr, or, tr, etc. ; as, Sgri, voliioria.^ Such syllables are called common. In prose they were regularly short, but in verse they might be treated as
vowel or by a single consonant
3.
;
long at the option of the poet.
artificial,
and short' are not arbitrary and Thus, a syllable containing a short vowel followed by two consonants, as ng, is long, because such a sylwhile a syllable conlable requires more time for its pronunciation taining a short vowel followed by one consonant is short, because it
Note.
— These
distinctions of long
but are purely natural.
;
takes less time to pronounce
it.
In case of the
common
syllables,
the mute
and the liquid blend so easily as to produce a combination Yet by sepawhich takes no more time than a single consonant.
two elements (as ag-ri) the poets were able to use such
syllables as long.
rating the
ACCENT.
6.
I
.
Words
of two syllables are accented
upon the
first
;
as, t^git,
morem. 2. Words
(next to the last)
of more than two syllables are accented upon the penult if that is a long syllable, otherwise upon the ante;
penult (second from the last)
3.
as,
When
the enclitics -que, -ne, -ve, -ce, -met,
amSvi, amdntis, miserum. -dum are appended
;
to words, if the syllable preceding the enclitic is long (either originally
it is accented as, miserdque, hominlsque. But if the syllable still remains short after the enclitic has been added, it is not accented unless the word originally took the accent on the antepenult. Thus, pdrtaque but miserdque.
or as a result of adding the enclitic)
;
1
To
But
avoid confusioni the quantity of syllables
if
is
not indicated by any sign.
2
the 1 or
r introduces
;
the second part of a
compound, the preceding
syllable is always long
as,
abrumpo.
SOUNDS, ACCENT, QUANTITY.
4.
Sometimes the
;
final -e of
as,
-ne and -oe disappears, but withoul
affecting the accent
tanton, istfo, illno. most, -que is not properly an 5. In utr^que, each, and pierSque, the influence enclitic; yet these words accent the penult, owing to ut^rque, utrdrnque, plerdmque. ot their oib=.r cases,
—
VOWEL CHANGES.i
^
7.
I
.
In Compounds,
—
i
;
a) 6 before a single consonant becomes
as,
—
coUigo
adigo
c)
for
con-lego.
U) a before a single consonant
for
becomes
1
;
as,
—
ad-ago.
;
S before two consonants becomes B for ez-pars. ezpers
;
as,
—
d) ae becomes T as, conquiro
e)
—
for
oon-quaero.
;
au becomes u, sometimes as, concludo for con-claudo explodo for ez-plaudo.
—
2. Contraction. Concurrent vowels were frequently contracted into one long vowel. The first of the two vowels regularly prevailed as,—
;
tres
for tre-es for
malo
amSsti
nia(v)elo;
copia cogo
for
for
co-opia co-ago;
for ania(v)isti; for
como
for
co-emo;
debeo
de(h)abe6;
junior for ju(v)enior.
ml
3.
for nihil;
Parasitic Vo-wels.
In the environment of liquids and nasals
;
a
parasitic
vowel sometimes develops
as,
—
vinculum
So periculum, saeculum.
4.
for earlier
vinclum.
Syncope.
Sometimes a vowel drops out by syncope
for aridor
for
;
as,
—
ardor valde
I
(compare aridus) valide (compare validus)
;
Only the simplest and most obvious of these are here
treated.
PECULIARITIES OF ORTHOGRAPHY.
7
CONSONANT CHANGES.i
8.
I.
Rhotaoism.
An
original s
between vowels became r
;
;
as,
arbos, Gen. arboris (for arbosis) genus, Gen. generis (for genesis)
;
dirimo
2.
(for
dis-emo)
;
.
dt, tt, ts each give e or sg
as,
penaum for pend-tum versum for vert-tum
,
miles sessus passus
for milet-s for
for
sedtus
pattus.
;
3.
Final consonants were often omitted
a.s,
—
cor
lac
4.
for
cord
for laot.
Assimilation of Consonants. Consonants are often assimilated following sound. aoourro (ado-) Thus aggero (adg-) allatus (adl-) assero (ads-) apporto (adp-) attuli (adt-) arrideo (adr-) affero (adf-) ocourro (obo-) suppono (aubp-) offero (obf-) oorruo (comr-) coUatus (00ml-) etc.
to
a
:
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
5.
Partial Assimilation.
partial.
Thus
:
—
Sometimes the
,
assimilation
is
only
a)
b
before s or t becomes
p
;
;
as,
—
scripsi (scrib-si),
b)
scriptum (scrib-tum).
as,
g before s or t becomes c actus (ag-tus).
c)
m before a dental or guttural becomes n
eundem (eum-dem)
;
;
as,
—
princeps (prim-ceps).
PECULIARITIES OF ORTHOGRAPHY.
9.
I.
Many words have
variable orthography.
Sometimes the different forms belong to different periods of the language. Thus, quom, voltus, volnus, volt, etc., were the prevaili
Only the simplest and most obvious of these are here
treated.
8
SOUNDS, ACCENT, QUANTITY.
after that, cum, vultus,; to the Augustan age So optumus, maxumus, lubet, lubido, etc., about the same era later, optimus, mazimus, libet, libido,
ing forms almost
down
;
vulnus, vult,
etc.
down
etc.
to
;
2.
of the language.
epistula,
In some words the orthography varies at one and the same period Examples are ezspecto, ezpecto ezsisto, existo
;
epistola;
adul§scens, adolescens;
to the
paulus,
as,
paullus;
oottldie, cotidie; and, particularly, prepositional compounds, which
often
made a concession
ad-gero
ad-licio
etymology in the spelling
;
—
or aggero or allicio
ad-sero
in-latus
or assero or illatua
ad-rogans or arrogans sub-raoveo or and many others.
3.
summoveo
;
Compounds
etc.,
obicio,
objicio,
4.
of jaciS were usually written eicio, deicio, adicio, but were probably pronounced as though written adjicio,
etc.
Adjectives and nouns in -quus,
-unm
preserved the earlier forms in -quos,
-quum; -vus, -vum; -uuB, -quom; -vos, -vomas,
-uos, -uom,
;
down through
;
the Ciceronian age;
;
antiques, anti-
quom saevos
perpetuos
equos
;
servos.
Similarly verjjs in
the 3d plural present indicative exhibit the terminations -quont, -quontur; -vont, -vontur -uont, -uontur, for the same period;
;
as,
relinqnont, loquontur
;
vTvont, metuont.
in our prose texts.
The
older spelling, while generally followed in editions of Plautus
and Terence, has not yet been adopted
ART
II.
INFLECTIONS.
Speech in Latin are the same as Nouns, Adjectives, Pronouns, Verbs, Adverbs, Prepositions, Conjunctions, and Interjections; but the Latin has no article. 11. Of these eight parts of speech the first four are capable of Inflection, i.e. of undergoing change of form to express modifications of meaning. In case of Nouns, Adjectives, and Pronouns, this prbcess is called Declen10.
The
Parts of
viz.
in
English,
sion; in case of verbs, Conjugation.
Chapter
A.
12.
I.
— Declension.
of
NOUNS.
a person, place, thing, or
A
Noun
is
the
name
quality; as, Caesar, Caesar; 'Roma.,
virtus, courage.
1
Rome ;
-p&ana.,
feather
Nouns
are either Proper or
Common.
;
nent names of persons or places are Common; as, penna, virtus.
2.
as,
Proper nouns are permaCaesar, Roma. Other nouns
Nouns
are also distinguished as Concrete or Abstract.
a) Concrete nouns are those which designate individual objects ss, laoas, mountain ; pea, foot; CtiBa, day ; vasna, mind.
9
lO
INFLECTIONS.
Under concrete nouns
as, legio, legion
;
are included, also, collective nouns;
oomitatus, retinue.
as,
V) Abstract
nouns designate qualities; fastness; paupertas, poverty.
constantia,
stead,
GENDER OF NOUNS.
Masculine, Feminine, There are three Genders, and Neuter. Gender in Latin is either natural or gram13.
—
matical.
Natural Gender.
14.
The gender
sex.
;
of
nouns
is
natural
when
it is
based
upon
Natural gender
of persons
1.
and these are
if
—
;
is
confined entirely to names
Masculine,
they denote males
sailor
;
as,
—
—
aa-riXa.,
asiicola., farmer.
;
2.
Feminine,
if
they denote females
as,
mater, tnother ; regina, queen.
Grammatical Gender.
15.. Grammg.tical gender is determined not by sex, but by the general signification of the word, or the ending of By grammatical gender, nouns its Nominative Singular.
denoting things or qualities are often Masculine or Feminine, simply
by virtue
of their signification or the ending;
of the Nominative Singular.
eral principles for determining
The
following are the gen:
grammatical gender
Signification.
—
A.
1.
Gender determined by
Names
of Rivers,
Winds, and Months are Mascu-
line; as,
Sequana, Seine; Eurus,
2.
east
wind; Aprilis, April.
Names
of
Trees,
-us,
and such names of Towns and
are Feminine; as,
Corinth; Rho&\xB, Rhodes.
Islands as end in
quercus,
ofl^j Corinttaua,
NUMBER. — CASES.
Other names of towns and islands follow the gender of
(see B, below)
;
1
as,
—
;
their endings
Delphi, m.
3.
Leuctra,
n.
;
Tibur,
n.
;
Carthago,
f.
Indeclinable nouns, also infinitives and phrases, are
as,
nihil, nothing; nefas,
Neuter;
wrong ; amSre,
to love.
as,
Note.
river)
,
— Exceptions to the
above principles sometimes occur;
AlUa
(the
f.
B.
Gender determined by Ending of Nominative Singular.
of other
The gender
Note
nouns
is
determined by the ending
of the Nominative Singular.'
i Comtnon Gender. Certain nouns are sometimes IMascusometimes Feminine. Thus, sacerdos may mean either priest or priestess, and is Masculine or Feminine accordingly. So also oivis, citizen ; parens, parent ; etc. The gender of such nouns is said to be commxm.
.
—
line,
Note 2. —Names of animals usually have grammatical gender, according to the ending of the Nominative Singular, but the one form
may
der.
designate either the male or female
;
as,
anser, m., goose or gan-
So vulpes, f.,/ox; aquila,
f.,
eagle.
NUMBER.
The Latin has two Numbers, — the Singular and Plural. The Singular denotes one object; the Plural,
16.
more than one.
CASES.
17.
There are
six
Cases in Latin
Objective with
:
—
or Possessive
Nominative, Case of Subject
Genitive, Dative,
of,
Objective with /a or /or;
Accusative, Case of Direct Object Vocative, Case of Address Ablative, Objective with by, from,
1
in, with.
The
ciples for
all Latin nouns come under this category. The prindetermining their gender are given under the separate declensions.
great majority of
12
1.
INFLECTIONS.
Locative.
place where), occur in
Vestiges of another case, the Locative (denoting' names of towns and in a few other words. The Genitive, Dative, Accusative, and Abla2. Oblique Cases.
tive are called
3.
Oblique Cases.
The different cases are formed by appending certain case-endings to a fundamental part called the Stem.^ Thus, portam (Accusative Singular) is formed by adding But in most cases the final the case-ending -m to the stem porta-.
Stem and Case-Endings.
vowel of the stem has coalesced so closely with the actual case-ending The apparent casethat the latter has become more or less obscured.
ending thus resulting
is
called a
termination.
THE FIVE DECLENSIONS.
18. There are five Declensions in Latin, distinguished from each other by the final letter of the Stem, and also by the Termination of the Genitive Singular, as follows
:
—
Declension.
FIRST DECLENSION. FIRST DECLENSION.
a-Stema.
13
Pure Latin nouns of the First Declension reguNominative Singular, in -a, weakened from -a, and are of the Feminine Gender. They are
20.
larly
end, in the
declined as follows
:
—
Porta, gate ; stem, porta-.
14
c)
INFLECTIONS.
The
as,
Locative Singular ends in -ae
Plural in
;
as,
Romae,
at Rome.
d)
A Genitive
tion
-um instead
Dardanidum instead -um is not a contraction
-arum sometimes occurs; of Dardanidarum. This terminal
of of -arum, but represents an
entirely different case-ending.
e)
Instead of the regular ending
in the Dative
-is,
we
usually find -abua
filia,
and Ablative Plural of dea, goddess, and
important to distinguish these nouns from the corresponding forms of deus, god, and fil us, son. A few other words sometimes have the same peculiaritv as, libertabus (from ITberta, freedwoman), equabus
it is
daughter, especially
when
(mares), to avoid confusion wiih libertis (from libertus, freedmati) and equis (from equus, horse).
Greek Nouns.
22.
These end
in -e
(Feminine)
;
-as
and -es (Masculine).
In the Plural they are declined like regular Latin nouns of the First Declension. In the Singular they are declined
as follows
:
—
Archias, Archias.
Epitome, epitome.
epitome
epitomes
Cometes,
comet.
Nom.
Gen.
Dat.
Ace.
Voc.
Archias
Archiae Archiae
Archia
Archia
epitomae
epitome epitome
Archiam (or -an) epitomen
Abl.
cometes cometae cometae cometen comete (or -5) comete (or -a)
1. But most Greek nouns in -e become regular Latin nouns in -a, and are declined like porta; as, grammatioa, grammar; musioa,
music ; rhetorica, rhetoric.
2.
Some
other peculiarities occur, especially in poetry.
SECOND DECLENSION.
Systems.
Pure Latin nouns of the Second Declension end in -us, -er, -ir, Masculine; -um, Neuter. Originally -us in the Nominative of the Masculine was -os; and -um of the Neuters -cm. So also in the Accusative.
23.
SECOND DECLENSION.
Nouns
in-us
IS
-
and -um are declined as follows Bellum, war Hortus, garden
stem, hortfi-.
:
stem, bellfi-.
i6
INFLECTIONS.
is
In the Nominative and Vocative Singular of ager, the stem
furthei
modified by the development of e before r. 2. The following nouns in -er are declined like
adulterer; ^ene^x, son-in-law; lAhei, Bacchus
;
puer
:
adulter,
socer, father^n-law;
vesper, evening; and compounds in -fer and -ger, as aignifer, armiger.
Nouns
24.
earlier
in -VHS',
-rnm, -quus.
Nouns ending
in
the Nominative Singular in -vus, -vum,
-quus, exhibited two types of inflection in the classical Latin, and a later, as follows
—
:
—
— an
Earlier Inflection (including Caesar
and
Cicero')
.
Servos,
m., slave.
Aevom,
n., age.
Equos,
m., horse.
SINGULAR.
Nom.
SECOND DECLENSION.
Nom. ingenium
Gen.
filius
fill
V]
ing^ni
penult, even
These Genitives accent the
3.
when
it is
short.
;
FQiua forms
I
tlie
Vocative Singular in
-i
(for -ie)
viz. fill,
O
son
4.
Deus, god,
:
as follows
—
lacks the Vocative Singular.
The
Plural
is
inflected
Nom.
Gen. Dat.
Ace.
Voc.
di
("Isi)
deoTum
dis
(deum)
(deis)
(^ei)
deos
di
dis
(deis)
-i; as,
AM.
5.
6.
The The
Locative Singular ends in
Corinthi, at Corinth.
Genitive Plural has -um, instead of -orutn,
—
a) in words denoting
talents; laodiara,
d) in
c)
money and measure
of pecks
;
;
;
as,
talentum, of
sestertinm, 0/ sesterces.
duumvir, triumvir, decemvir as, duumvirum. sometimes in other words as, liberum, 0/ the children
;
socium, of the
allies.
Exceptions to Gender in the Second Declension.
26.
I
.
a)
The following nouns in -us are Feminine by exception according to the general Names of to-wns, islands, trees also some names of countries; as rule laid down in § 15. 2
:
—
—
;
Aegyptus, Egypt.
V)
Five special words,
—
alvus, belly;
carbasus, y?aa-;
colus, distaff;
humus, ground;
vannus, ivinnowing-fan.
c)
A few
Greek Feminines
;
as,
^
:
atomus, atom; diphthongus, diphthong.
2.
The
following nouns in -us are Neuter
—
pelagus, sea
virus, poison
vulgus, crowd.
I8
INFLECTIONS.
Greek Nouns
of the
Second Declension.
27.
-on,
These end
Neuter.
Masculine or Feminine; and They are mainly proper names, and are dein -os, -oa,
:
clined as follows
—
Barbitos, m. and
f.,
THIRD DECLENSION.
2.
19
Consonant-Stems
fall
into several natural subdivisions, according
as the stem ends in a
Mute, Liquid, Nasal,
A. Mute-Stems.
or Spirant.
30.
1.
Mute-Stems may end,
—
; ;
In a Labial (p) ; as, princep-s. dux (duc-s). 2. In a Guttural (g or c) as, remez (remeg-s) mileB (milet-s). as, lapis (lapid-s) 3. In a Dental (d or t)
; ;
I.
Stems in a Labial Mute (p).
chief.
31.
Princeps, m.,
SINGULAR.
Tekminatioh.
Nbm.
Gen. Dot.
Ace.
Voc.
princeps
principis
-s
-is
-1
principi
principem
princeps
principe
-em
-s
AM.
-e
PLURAL.
JVom. prlncipes
-es
GeM.
principum
prlncipibus
principes
principes
-um
-ibus
-es
Dai.
Ace.
yoc.
-es
Adl.
2.
prlncipibus
-ibus
(g, c).
Stems in a Guttural Mute
32.
In
these the termination -s of the
Nominative Singular unites
with the guttural, thus producing -x.
Remex,
singular.
m., rower.
Dux, c,
leader.
20
3.
INFLECTIONS.
Stems in a Dental
final
Mute
(d, t).
33.
live
In these the
d
or t of the stem disappears in the
-s.
Nomina
Singular before the ending
Lapis, m., stone.
Miles, m.,
soldier.
THIRD DECLENSION.
C.
21
Nasal Stems.
in the
35.
These end
in -n,i
which often disappears
Nom.
Sing.
Leo, m.,
SINGULAR.
lion.
Nomeu,
n.,
name
22
INFLECTIONS.
II.
i-Stems.
1-Stems.
A. Masculine and Feminine
37.
These regularly end in -is in the Nominative Singuand always have -ium in the Genitive Plural. Originally the Accusative Singular ended in -im, the Ablative Singular but these endings in -1, and the Accusative Plural in -is have been largely displaced by -em, -e, and -es, the endlar,
;
ings of Consonant-Stems.
38.
Tussis,
f.,
cough; Ignis, ra.,fire; Hostis, c, enemy;
stem, igni-.
stem, tussi-.
stem, hosti-.
SINGULAR.
THIRD DECLENSION.
2.
23
Not
all
nouns in
-is
are i-Stems.
Some
are genuine consonant-
stems, and have the regular consonant terminations throughout, notably, canis,
3.
dog;
\\3i^6Tx\s,
youths
disguised in the Nominative
Some genuine i-Stems have become
Singular; as, pars, part, for par(ti)s; anas, diick, for ana(ti)s; so
also
ars, art; gens, tribe;
mors, death; dos, dowry ; nox, night; sors, and some others.
B. Neuter \-Stems.
lot; inSns,
mind;
39.
-ar.
These end
in the
Nominative Singular
-i
in
-e, -al,
and
in
They always have
in the Ablative Singular,
-ia
the Nominative, Accusative, and Vocative Plural, and-ium
in the Genitive Plural, thus holding
i-character than
Sedile, seat
;
more steadfastly to the do MascuUne and Feminine i-Stems.
Animal, animal;
stem, animali-.
Calcar, spur
stem, oalcari-
stem, sedili-.
H
III.
INFLECTIONS.
Consonant-Stems that have partially adapted themselves
to the Inflection of J-Stems.
40.
Many Consonant-Stems have
-Is
so far adapted them-t
selves to the inflection of i-stems as to take -ium in the
Genitive Plural, and
in the Accusative Plural.
is,
Their
by the fact that they never take -im in the Accusative Singular, or -1 in the Ablative Singular. The following words
true character as Consonant-Stems, however,
shown
are examples of this class
Caedes,
f.,
:
—
slaughter
THIRD DECLENSION.
25
26
INFLECTIONS.
THIRD DECLENSION.
h.
27
Neuter
udder.
:
cadaver, corpse ;
iter,
way ; tuber, tumor ; Gber,
;
Also botanical names in -er
as,
aoer, maple.
5.
Nouns
a.
in -6s.
:
Feminine
seges, crop.
45.
1.
Szceptions to the Rule for Feminines. Nouns
a.
b.
in -as.
:
Masculine vas, bondsman. Neuter vas, vessel.
:
2.
Nouns
a.
in -es.
Masculine: axiea,
in -is.
ram;
paries, wall ; p^a,/aoi.
3.
Nouns
a.
Masculine:
Ignis,
Also
—
all nouns in -nis and -guis; as, amnis, river; ^re; panis, bread; sanguis, blood; unguis, nail.
aads, axle.
collis,
hill.
piscis, fish.
postis, post.
fasois, bundle.
pulvis, dust.
orbis,
circle.
lapis, stone.
mensis, mr>nth.
4.
sentis, brier.
Nouns
a.
in -x.
Masculine: apex, peak; codes:, tree-trunk; grex, flock; imbrex, tile ; poUex, thumb ; vertex, summit ; calix, cup.
in -s preceded
:
J.
Nouns
a.
Masculine
by a consonant. dens, tooth ; f ons, fountain ; mons, mountain
pons, bridge.
6.
Nouns
a.
in -d5.
:
Masculine
cardo, hinge ; ordo, order,
46.
1.
Exceptions to the Rule for Neuters.
Nouns
a.
in -1.
:
Masculine
in -n.
sol,
sun ;
sal, salt.
2.
Nouns
a.
Masculine
in -ur.
:
pecten, comb.
3.
Nouns
a.
Masculine:
in -fis.
:
vvW.Vi.r,
vulture
4.
Nouns
a.
Masculine
lepus, hare.
28
INFLECTIONS.
Greek Nouns of the Third Declension.
47.
1
The
following are the chief peculiarities of these
the Accusative Singular
;
:
—
The ending -a in Salamma, Salamis. 2. The ending -Ss
Phrygians.
3
as,
aethera, aether-^
in
the
Nominative
Accusative
Plural;
as,
PhrygSs,
The ending
-Ss
in
the
Plural
;
as,
PhrygSs,
Vocatives!
Phrygians.
4.
Proper names in -as (Genitive -antis) have -a in the
Neuters in
Singular; as, Atlas (Atlantis), Vocative Atla, Atlas.
J.
-ma
(Genitive -matis) have -is instead of -ibus
;
In
poematis, poems. 6. Orpheus, and other proper names ending in -eus, form the Vocative Singular in -eu (Orpheu, etc.). But in prose the other cases usually follow the second declension as, Orphei, Orpheo, etc. 7. Proper names in -es, like Pericles, form the Genitive Singular sometimes in -is, sometimes in -1, as, Periclis or Pericli. 8. Feminine proper names in -o have -us in the Genitive, but -5
the Dative and Ablative Plural
as,
;
in the other oblique cases; as,
Nom. Dido
Gen.
Ace. Dido
Voc.
Dldus
Dat.
9.
Dido
Abl.
Did5 Dido
The
regular Latin endings often occur in
Greek nouns.
FOURTH DECLENSION.
a-Stems.
48.
line,
Nouns
and
of the Fourth Declension
end
in -us
:
Mascu
-u Neuter.
They
are declined as follows
—
FOURTH DECLENSION. — FIFTH DECLENSION.
Peculiarities of
29
Nouns
of the
Fourth Declension.
the
49.
I-
Nouns
in -us, particularly in early Latin, often form
-1,
Genitive Singular in
following the analogy of nouns in -us of the
Second Declension; Plautus and Terence.
2.
as,
senati, ornati.
This
is
usually the case in
Nouns
as,
in -us
sometimes have -u in the Dative Singular, instead
instead of -ibus, occurs in the Dative and
of-ul;
3.
fruotu
(for fructui).
The ending -ubus,
-cus
;
Ablative Plural of artus (Plural), limbs;
syllables in
as,
tribus, tribe; and in dis-
artubus, tribubus, arcubus, lacubus. But with the exception of tribus, all these words admit the forms in -ibus as well as thoseln -ubus. 4. Domus, ho7ise, is declined according to the Fourth Declension,
but has also the following forms of the Second
:
—
domi
(locative), at
home
domum,
homewards,
to one's
home
douLO, /ro7fi home;
;.
domos, homewards, to their {etc.) homes
The
;
horn
genu, knee
only Neuters of this declension in ; and veru, spit.
common
use are
:
oornu,
Exceptions to Gender in the Fourth Declension.
50. The following nouns in -us are Feminine: acus, needle; domus, house; mauus, hand; porticus, colonnade; tribus, tribe;
Idus
(Plural), Ides; also
names of
trees (§ 15. 2).
FIFTH DECLENSION.
e-Stems.
51.
Nouns
of the Fifth Declension
:
declined as follows
—
end
in -Ss,
and are
Dies, m., day.
SINGULAR.
30
Peculiarities of
52.
I.
INFLECTIONS.
Nouns
of the Fifth Declension.
is -gi,
The ending
when
of the Genitive and Dative Singular
;
instead of -ei,
a consonant precedes
as, sp6i, rgi, fidSi.
2. A Genitive ending -i (for -Si) is found in plebi (from plebes = plebs) in the expressions tribiinus plebi, tribune of the people, and plebi scitum, decree of the people ; sometimes also in other words. as, acie. 3. A Genitive and Dative form in -e sonietimes occurs 4. With the exception of dies and res, most nouns of the Fifth
;
Declension are not declined in the Plural. But acies, series, species, spes, and a few others are used in the Nominative and Accusative
Plural.
«
Gender
53.
dies, day,
in the
in the Fifth Declension.
Nouns of the Fifth Declension are regularly Feminine, except and meridies, mid-day. But dies is sometimes Feminine Singular, particularly when it means an appointed day.
DEFECTIVE NOUNS.
54.
Here belong
1.
—
2.
3.
Nouns used in the Singular only. Nouns used in the Plural only. Nouns used only in certain cases.
Indeclinable Nouns.
4.
Nouns used
in the Singular only.
55. Many nouns, from the nature of their signification, are regularly used in the Singular only. Thus
:
—
1.
2. 3.
Proper names as, Cicero, Cicero; Italia, Italy. Nouns denoting material; as, aes, copper; lac, milk. Abstract nouns; as, ignorantia, ignorance; bonitas,
;
goodr
ness.
4.
But the above classes of words are sometimes used
:
Thus
—
in the Plural.
a) Proper names,
to denote diiferent members of a family, ot specimens of a type; as, Cicerones, the Ciceros; CatonSB,
—
men
like Cato.
DEFECTIVE NOUNS.
b')
3
Names
rial,
of materials,
—> to denote objects made of the mate;
or different kinds of the substance
as,
aera, bronzes
(i.e.
bronze figures)
nouns,
c) Abstract
— to
;
ligna, woods.
denote instances of the quality
;
as,
ignorantiae, cases of ignorance.
Nouns used
56.
1.
in the Plural only.
Here belong —
Many
;
Leuctra
2.
geographical names; as, Thebae, Thebes; Leuctra, Pompeji, Pompeii. Many names of festivals as, Megalesia, the Megalesian festival.
;
3.
tant
:
—
Many
special words, of which the following are the
most impor-
angustiae, narrow pass. arma, weapons.
dSliciae, delight.
divitiae, riches.
manes, spirits of the dead. moenia, city walls. minae, threats.
nuptiae, marriage.
poster!, descendants.
reliquiae, remainder.
Idus, Ides. indutiae, truce.
msidiae, ambush. majores, ancestors.
Also in
classical prose regularly
tenebrae, darkness.
verbera, blows.
—
nares, nose.
viscera, viscera.
cervices, neck.
fides, lyre.
Nouns used only
in Certain Cases.
Many nouns of the Fourth 57. I. Used in only One Case. Declension are found only in the Ablative Singular as, jussu, by the
;
order; injussu, without the order
;
natu, by birth.
2.
Used in Two Cases.
a.
b.
Pors (chance}, Nom. Sing. forte, Abl. Sing. Spontis (free-will), Gen. Sing. sponte, Abl.
;
;
Sing.
Used in Three Cases. Nemo, no one (Nom.), has also the nemini and the Ace. neminem. The Gen. and Abl. are supplied by the corresponding cases of nuUus; viz. nuUius and nuUo.
3.
Dat.
52
4.
INFLECTIONS.
the Nom., Ace, and Abl. Sing., and tlie Nora impetus, impetum, impetu, impetus. a. Preci, precem, prece, lacks the Nom. and Gen. Sing. b. Viois, vicem, vice, lacks the Nom. and Dat. Sing. 1 Opis, dapis, and frugis, all lack the Nom. Sing. Many monosyllables of the Third Declension lack the Gen. Plu.
Impetus has
;
and Ace. Plu.
5.
viz.
'
,
6.
7.
—
\
as, cor,
luz, sol, aes, os (oris), rus, sal, tus.
Indecliiiable
58.
Nouns.
Here belong
fas, n., right.
—
nefas, n., impiety.
nihil, n., nothing.
instar,
n., likeness.
mane,
I.
n.,
morning.
secus,
n., sex.
(which may serve also as Ablative, list are simply Neuters confined in use to the Nominative and Accusative Singular.
the exception of in the morning'), the nouns in this
With
mane
Heteroclites.
59.
declension, and partly of another.
1.
These are nouns whose forms are partly Thus
:
—
of one
the Plural
Several nouns have the entire Singular of one declension, while is of another as,
;
—
;
vas, vasis {vessel)
;
Plu.,
vasa, vasorum, vasis,
etc.
etc.
jugerum, jugerl {acre)
2.
Plu., jugera,
jugerum, jugeribus,
Several nouns, while belonging in the main to one declension,'
have certain special forms belonging to another.
a)
Thus
:
—
a
b)
Many nouns Nom. and
of the First Declension ending in -ia take also Ace. of the Fifth as, materiSs, materiem,
;
material, as well as materia,
materiam.
the
Fames, hunger, 'regularly Abl. fame of the Fifth.
of the Third Declension, has
c)
Requies, requietis, rest, regularly of the Third Declension, takes an Ace. of the Fifth, requiem, in addition to requietem.
•
d) Besides plebs, plebis, common people, of the Third Declension, we find plebes, plebSi (also plebj, see 5 1:2. 2), of the
Fifth.
HETEROGENEOUS NOUNS.
Heterogeneous Nouns.
60.
1.
33
Heterogeneous nouns vary
Several nouns of the
— Second Declension have two forms, — ont
in
Gender.
Thus
:
asc. in -us,
irrus,
2.
and one Neuter in -um; as, clipeus, clipeum, shield carrum, cart. Other nouns have one gender in the Singular, another in tht
\,
lural; as,
SINGULAR.
PLURAL.
balneae, f., bath-house. epulae, f., feast.
freni,
balneum, n., bath epulum, n., feast i frSnum, n., bridle i
jocus, m.jjest;
locus, m., place ;
m. (rarely frena,
n.,
n.^, bridle,
joca, n. (also jooi, m.), jests. loca,
places
;
loci, m., passages
or topics in
an author.
rastrum,
a.
u.,
rake;
ra,stTi,
m.
;
lastra, n., rakes.
heteroclites, as in case
Heterogeneous nouns may at the same time be of the first two examples above.
Plurals
61.
'V7ith
Change of Meaning.
The
following nouns
have one meaning
:
lingular,
and
another in the Plural
—
in
the
SINGULAR.
aedis, temple auzilium, help ;
career, prison
PLURAL.
aedes, house.
auzilia, auxiliary troops.
carceres,
stallsfor racing-chariots
castrum, fort copia, abundance finis, end;
f ortuna,
oastra, camp.
copiae, troops, resources.
fines, borders, territory.
fortune
fortunae, possessions, wealth,
gratiae, thanks.
gratia, favor, gratitude ;
impedimentum, hindrance ;
littera, letter (of the alphabet)
;
impedimenta,
litterae, epistle
baggage.
;
literature.
m5s,
habit,
custom
mores, character.
operae, laborers.
opes, resources.
paitSa, party ; rdle.
sSles, wit.
opera, help, service;
(ops) opis, help psiiB, part;
;
ai,
salt
34
INFLECTIONS.
B. ADJECTIVES.
62.
Adjectives denote quality.
fall
nouns, and
1.
into
two
classes,
—
They
are declined
like
Adjectives of the First and Second Declensions.
2.
Adjectives of the Third Declension.
ADJECTIVES OF THE FIRST AND SECOND DECLENSIONS.
63.
In these the Masculine
is
declined like hortua,
puer,
;
or ager, the Feminine like porta,
Thus, Masculine like hortua
:
—
and the Neuter
like bellum,
ADJECTIVES OF FIRST AND SECOND DECLENSIONS.
64.
35
Masculine
like
30
INFLECTIONS.
voBGr, wretched ; ^xoa-^ex, prosperous ; compounds in -fer and -ger sometimes dexter, right. 2. Satur,/«//, is declined: satur, satura, aaturum.
ADJECTIVES OF THE THIRD DECLENSION.
a.
37
With
the exception of Comparatives, and a few other words
§ 70.
i,
mentioned below in
all
Adjectives of the Third
;
Declension follow the inflection of i-stems
the Ablative Singular in
-1,
i.e.
they have
the Genitive Plural in -ium, the
Accusative Plural in is (as well as -es) in the Masculine
and Feminine, and the Nominative and Accusative
in -ia in Neuters.
Plural
Adjectives of Three Terminations.
68.
These are declined as follows
:
—
38
INFLECTIONS.
Adjectives of
Two
Terminations.
:
69.
These are declined as follows
Fortis, strong.
—
F.
Portior, stronger.
SINGULAR.
M. AND
F.
Neut.-
M. and
fortior
Neut.'
fortius
Nom.
Gen. Dat.
Ace.
Voc.
fortis
forte
fortis
forti
fortis
forti
fortioris
fortioii
fortioris
fortiori
fortem
fortis
forte forte
forti
fortiorem
fortior
fortius
fortius
Abl.
forti
fortiore
fortiore
PLURAL.
Nom.
Gen. Dat.
Ace.
Voc.
fortSs
fortia
fortiores
fortiora
fortium
fortibus
fortes, -Is
fortium
fortibus
fortia fortia
fortiSrum
fortioilbus
fortiores, -is
fortiorum
fortiorlbus
fortiora
fortiora
fortes
fortiores
Abl.
I.
fortibus
is
fortibus
fortioribua
fortioribua
the Comparative of fortis. All Comparatives an regularly declined in the same way. The Ace. Plu. in -Is is rare.
rortiol:
Adjectives of One Termination.
70.
Pglix, happy.
FrudSns, prudent.
SINGULAR.
M. AND
F.
M. AND
F.
Neut.
felix
felicis
felici
Nom.
Gen. Dat.
Ace.
Voc.
felrx
felicis
felici
fellcem
felix
felici
felix
felix
felici
Abl.
PLURAL.
Nom.
Gen. Dat.
Ace.
Voc.
felices
felicia
fellcium
felicibus
felices, -Is
felicium
felicibus
felicia
felices
felicia
Abl.
felicibus
felicibus
ADJECTIVES OF THE THIRD DECLENSION.
39
40
c)
INFLECTIONS.
Patrials in -as, -Stis
and
-is, -Ttis,
when designating
place:
regularly have
-i
;
as,
in ArpinatT, on the estate at Arpinum
;
yet
-e,
when used of persons
as,
ab Arpinate, by an
Arpi
natian.
6. A very few indeclinable adjectives occur, the chief of which ir^^, frugal; uequam, worthless. ar
7.
In poetry, adjectives
and
participles in -ns
as,
sometimes form
thi
Gen. Plu. in -um instead of -ium;
venieutum, of those coming.
COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES.
There are three degrees of Comparison, the Comparative, and the Superlative. 2. The Comparative is regularly formed by adding -ioi (Neut. -ius), and the Superlative by adding -issimus (-a, -um), to the Stem of the Positive deprived of its final vowel as, —
71.
I.
—
Positive, the
;
altus, high,
fortis,
ielix,
altior, higher,
altissimus,
\ ^^S^^^^^
(
very
high.
brave,
fortior,
felicior,
fortissimus.
felicissimus.
;
fortunate,
So
also Participles,
when used
as Adjectives
as,
—
to
doctus, learned,
doctior,
doctissimus.
egens, needy,
3.
egentior,
egentisaimus.
Adjectives in -er form the Superlative
by appending -rimus
the Nominative of the Positive.
asper, rough,
The Comparative is regular.
asperrimus. pulcheriimua.
Thus: —
asperior,
pulcher, beautiful,
acer, sharp,
celer, swift,
pulchrior,
acrior,
celerior,
acerrimus.
celerrimus.
a.
Notice maturus, maturior, maturissimus or maturrimus.
4- Five Adjectives in -ilis form the Superlative by adding -limus to the Stem of the Positive deprived of its final vowel. The Comparative
is
regular.
Thus
:
—
facilis, easy,
difficilis, difficult,
facilior,
difficilior,
facillimus.
difficillimuB.
similis, like,
similior,
simillimus.
dissimillimus.
dissimilis, tinlike,
dissimilior,
humilis, low,
humilior,
humilUmus.
COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES.
41
5. Adjectives in -dicus, -ficus, and -volus form the Comparative and Superlative as though from forms in -dicSus, -ficens, -volSns. Thus
:
—
maledicus, slanderous,
magnificus, magnificent,
maledtcentior,
magnificentior,
raaledicentiasimus
magnificentissimus.
benevolus, kindly,
a.
benevolentior,
benevolentissimua.
in early Latin
;
Positives in -dicens
and -volena occur maledicens, benevolens.
as,
6. Dives has the Comparative divitior or ditior divitissimus or ditissimus.
;
Superlative
Irregular Comparison.
72.
viz.
—
Several Adjectives vary the Stem in Comparison;
bonus, good,
42
Inferi,
INFLECTIONS.
gods of the lower world,
1
Mare Inferum, Mediterranean
Sea,
six^en,
\
Inferior, lower,
imus,
j
'
J
J
1
.
gods above,
^rfr/a^zi: 5«a!,
Mare Superum,
3.
p"P^"°''
^^--^^
supremus, /aj^
«
|
summus, ^z^te^
Comparative lacking.
^
vetus, old,
fldas, /aiiA/ul,
veterrimus.
fidissimus.
^
novus, new,
sacer, sacred,
iz\s\is,
novissimus,^
sacerrimus.
falsissimus.
last
false,
less frequently used.
Also in some other words
4.
Superlative lacking.
COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES AND ADVERBS. 43
Adjectives not admitting Comparison.
75.
1
Here belong
Many
—
from the nature of their
signification,
adjectives, which,
;
do
lot
admit of comparison
as,
hodiemus,
as,
^
^0-</iz/ ;
anavLxiB,
annual
Qortalis, mortal.
2.
Some
special
words
;
mirus, gnarus, merus
;
and a few
ithers.
FORMATION AND COMPARISON OF ADVERBS.
Adverbs are for the most part derived from adjecand depend upon them for their comparison. 1. Adverbs derived from adjectives of the First and second Declensions form the Positive by changing -i of he Genitive Singular to -e those derived from adjectives )f the Third Declension, by changing -is of the Genitive
76.
ives,
;
singular to
-iter
;
as,
—
carus,
care, dearly;
pulcher,
acer,
levis,
pulchre, beautifully;
acriter, ^ercely
leviter, lightly.
a.
But Adjectives in -ns, and a few others, add -er (instead of -iter), to form the Adverb as,
;
—
sapiens,
sollers,
sapienter, wisely
sollerter, skillfully.
Note audaz, audacter,
2.
boldly.
The Comparative
ative Singular iuperlative
all Adverbs regularly consists of the AccuNeuter of the Comparative of the Adjective while the of the Adverb is formed by changing the -1 of the Genitive
of
;
Singular of the Superlative of the Adjective to -e.
Thus
—
(carus)
44
INFLECTIONS.
Adverbs Peculiar
in
Comparison and Formation.
77.
I.
bene, well,
male,
ill,
melius,
pejus,
optime. pessime.
magnopere, greatly, multum, much, non multum, little, parum,
'
magis,
plus,
maxime. plutimum.
minime.
diutissime.
minus,
diutius,
diu, long,
nequiter, worthlessly, nequius,
saepe, often,
saepius,
'
nequissime. saepissime. maturrime.
maturissime. proxime. nuperrime. potissimum, especially.
mature, betimes,
prope, near,
matutius,
propius,
nuper, recently.
potius, rather,
\
previously,
1
P"''^'
secus, otherwise,
2.
[before,
j
V^^^, first.
Declensions
_
_
.
setius, less.
A
number of
adjectives of the First
;
form an Adverb in
-o, instead of -e
as,
—
and Second
crebro, frequently
falso, falsely
;
continue, immediately
raro, rarely;
a.
3.
subito, suddenly i
and a few
others.
cito, quickly, has -8.
A
few adjectives employ the Accusative Singular Neuter as
Positive of the
Adverb
;
as,
—
the
mxAtum, much
4.
pkalMm,
little ;
fy.dle, easily.
A
few adjectives of the First and Second Declensions form
;
Positive in -iter
as,
—
the
firmus, iirndtetjfrmly
largus, largiter, copiously ;
u.
hiimanus, humaniter, humanly;
alius, aliter, otherwise,
violentus has violenter.
5. Various other adverbial suffixes occur, the most important of which are -tus and -tim; as, antiquitus, anciently; paulatim,
f^adually.
NUMERALS.
NUMERALS.
78.
I.
45
Numerals may be divided
Numeral Adjectives, comprising
a.
b.
c.
into
—
etc.
etc.
Cardinals;
zs, as,
;
Ordinals;
^naa, one; Aao, two; etc. primus, /&-j/; seGMzA-aa, second ;
as, singuli,
;
Distributives
one by one; bini, two by two;
etc.
IL Numeral Adverbs
79.
as,
semel, once ; bis, twice ;
Table of Numeral Adjectives and Adverbs.
46
Cardinals.
{
INFLECTIONS.
Ordinals.
Distributives.
singulT
et singuli
)
Adverbs.
^g^^jg^ ^^^^
/
200.
centeni centesimus primus centum unus centum et unus centesimus et primus centeni duceni ducenti, -ae, -a ducentesimus
trecenti
ducenties
trecenties
300. 400.
trecentesimus
treceni
quadringenli
quingenti
sescenti
quadringentesimus
quingentesimus sescentesimus
septingentesimus octingentesimus
quadringeni
quingeni
sesceni
septingeni
quadringentia
quingenties
sescenties
septingenties
500.
600.
700.
800. goo.
1,000.
septingenfi
octingenti
octingeni
octingenties
nongenti
raiUe
nongentesimus
millesimus
bis millesimus
nongeni
singula milia
nongenties
mllies bis mllies
centies milies
2,000.
100,000.
1,000,000.
duo milia centum milia
decies centena
bina milia
centena milia decies centena
milia
centies millesimus
decies centies mille-
decies centies
milies
milia
simus
Note.
gnsitnus and -iens are often written in the numerals
instead of -esimua and
Declension of the Cardinals.
80.
2.
I
.
The
is
declension of
unus has
:
Duo
declined
^ follows
—
already been given under
§ 66.
JVbm. duo
.Gen.
£>a/.
duae
duorum
duobus duos, duo du5bus
duarum
duabus duas duabus
Ace.
AM.
a.
3.
duo duorum duSbus duo duobus
o
is
i'j
So ambo,
is
iotA, except that its final
long.
Tres
declined,
—
tria
JVbm. tres
Gen. Dai.
Ace.
Ail.
4.
trium
tribus
tres (tris)
trium
tribus
tria
tribus
tribus
The hundreds
Mille
is
(except
centum)
are declined like the Plural
of
bonus.
J.
regularly an adjective in the Singular,
and
indeclinable.
In the Plural
it is
a substantive (followed by the Genitive qf the
is
objeda
enumerated; § 201. i), and JVbm. mflia Gen. milium Dat. mllibus
declined,
Ace. milia
yoc. milia
A61. milibus
NUMERALS.
47
two thousand men,
a.
Thus miUe homines, u thousand men; but duo milia hominum, literally two thousands of men.
Occasionally the Singular admits the Genitive construction
as, 6.
mille
hominum.
Ordinals and Distributives and Second Declensions. of Numerals.
Other Cardinals are indeclinable.
are declined like Adjectives of the First
Peculiarities in the
81.
I.
Use
The compounds from
21 to 99
first.
may
be expressed either with
is
the larger or the smaller numeral
Thus
2.
:
—
In the latter case, et
used.
triginta sex or sex et triginta, thirty-six.
The numerals under
;
by subtraction as, duodeviginti, eighteen (but also octodeoim) ; iindequadraginta, thirty-nine (but also triginta
'et
—
90, ending in 8
and
9,
are often expressed
novem
or
novem
first;
triginta).
regularly have the largest
;
3.
Compounds over 100
the others follow without et
as,
—
number
centum viginti septem, one hundred and twenty-seven. anno octingentesimo octogegimo secundo, in the year
Yet et
882.
may be
inserted where the smaller
;
one of the tens
as,
—
number
is
either a digit 01
centum centum
4.
et septem, one hundred
and seven
et quadraginta, one hundred andforty.
The
a)
Distributives are used
—
many
apiece
;
To denote
so
much
each, so
as,
—
;
bina talenta eis dedit, he gave them two
b)
talents each.
When
those nouns that are ordinarily Plural in form, but
as,
Singular in meaning, are employed in a Plural sense
—
binae litterae, two
But in such
for one,
epistles.
is
;
cases, uni (not singuli) and trini (not term) for three
;
regularly employed
as,
—
iinae litterae, one epistle
c) In multiplication
;
trinae litterae, three
epistles.
as,
—
;
bis bina sunt quattuor, twice two are four.
d) Often in poetry, instead of the cardinals
as,
—
bina
bastilia,
two spears.
48
INFLECTIONS.
C.
PHONOTJNS.
82.
A
Pronoun
it.
is
witha word that indicates something
out
naming
83.
There are the following classes of pronouns
I.
:
—
Personal.
Reflexive.
Possessive.
11.
V. Intensive. VI. Relative.
VII.
VIII.
Interrogative.
Indefinite.
III.
IV.
Demonstrative.
I.
PERSONAL PRONOUNS.
:
84.
etc.,
These correspond to the English and are declined as follows
—
/,
you, he, she,
it,
First Person.
PRONOUNS.
3.
49
as Accusative
In early Latin,
med
and ted occur
and Ablative
forms.
II.
REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS.
'
85.
in
These refer to the subject of the sentence or clause which they stand like myself, yourself, in I see myself
;
etc.
They
are declined as follows
:
—
First Person.
Supplied by oblique
cases of ego.
Second Person.
Supplied by oblique
cases of tu.
Third Person.
Gen. Dat.
Ace.
Voc.
mel, of myself mihi, to myself
tui,
of thyself
thyself
thyself
sui
sibi
1
tibi, to
me, myself
.
te,
se or sese
Abl.
1.
me, with myself
etc.
te,
with thyself
etc.
se or sese
The
Reflexive of the Third Person serves for all genders and for
both numbers.
themselves;
2.
Thus sui may mean, of himself herself itself or of and so with the other forms. All of the Reflexive Pronouns have at times a reciprocal force
inter se pugnant, they fight with each other.
as,
3.
In early Latin, sed occurs as Accusative and Ablative.
III.
POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS.
strictly adjectives of
86.
These are
the First and Second
Declensions, and are inflected as such.
First Person.
They
are
—
Second Person.
tuus,
-a,
meus,
noster,
-a,
-um, my; nostra, nostrum, our;
-um, thy
vester, vestra, vestrum,
/o«r
Third Person.
suua, -a, -um, his, her,
I
.
its,
their.
Suus
is
exclusively Reflexive
;
as,
—
his children.
pater liberos suos amat, the father loves
Otherwise, his, her,
of is, viz. ejus
;
its
are regularly expressed by the Genitive Singular
and
1
their
by the Genitive
i is
Plural,
eorum, earum.
,-
The
final
sometimes long
in poetry.
so
2.
INFLECTIONS.
The Vocative Singular Masculine of meus is mi. The enclitic -pte may be joined to the Ablative
in case of suo,
Singular of the
is particularly
3.
Possessive Pronouns for the purpose of emphasis,
This
common
sua;
as,
suopte, suapte.
IV. 87.
DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS.
there, or as
These point out an object as here or
previously mentioned.
They
I
are
;
—
;
hio, this (where
iste, that
ille,
is,
am)
(where you are)
that (something distinct from the speaker)
;
;
that (weaker than ille)
the same.
idem,
Hio, iste, and
ille are
accordingly the Demonstratives of the
First,
Second, and Third Persons respectively.
Hie,
this.
INTENSIVE PRONOUN. — RELATIVE PRONOUN.
5
52
VII.
INFLECTIONS.
INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS.
90.
The
Quia,
Interrogative Pronouns are quia,
qui,
who?
(sub-
stantive)
I.
and
whatf what kind
off (adjective).
who?
SINGULAR.
Neuter.
Masc. and Fem.
N'om.
quis
quid
cujus
cui
The
rare Plural
'
Gen. Dat.
Ace.
cujus
cui
follows the de-
clension of the
quem
quo
viz. qui,
quid
Relative Pronoun.
Abl.
2.
quo
is
Qui, what ? what kind of?
;
declined precisely like the Relative
Pronoun
a.
b.
c.
quae, quod,
etc.
An
Qui
old Ablative qui occurs, in the sense oi how?
is
why?
sometimes used for quis in Indirect Questions. Quis, when limiting words denoting persons, is sometimes an adjective. But in such cases quis homo — what man?
whereas qui
homo = what sort of man ? Quis and qui may be strengthened by adding -nam. Thus:— Substantive quisnam, who, pray ? quidnam, what, pray ? Adjective quinam, quaenam, quodnam, of what kind,prayf
d.
:
:
VIII.
91.
INDEFINITE PRONOUNS.
of
These have the general force
SUBSTANTIVES.
some
one,
any
one.
INDEFINITE PRONOUNS.—PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES. 53
1
In the Indefinite Pronouns, only the pronominal part
:
is
declined.
Thus
2.
Genitive Singular alicujus, cujuslibet,
etc.
Note that aliqui has aliqua in the Nominative Singular FemiNominative and Accusative Plural Neuter. Qui has both qua and quae in these same cases.
nine, also in the
3.
tive Plural
Quidam forms Accusative Singular quendam, quandam Geniquorundam, quarundam the m being assimilated to n
;
;
before d.
4.
Aliquis may be used
adjectively,
and
(occasionally) aliqui sub-
stantively.
5.
In combination with ne,
si, nisi,
:
num,
either
quis or qui may
stand as a Substantive.
6.
quis or si qui. Ecquis, any one, though strictly an Indefinite, generally has
si
It
Thus
interrogative force.
has both substantive and adjective forms,—
;
substantive, eoquis,
ecquid
adjective, ecqui,
eoquae and ecqua,
ecquod.
7. 8.
Quisquam
is
not used in the Plural.
declines only the
There are two Indefinite Relatives,
— quioumque and quisquis,
first
whoever.
Quicumque
part
;
quisquis declines
both but has only quisquis, quidquid, quoquo, in
common
use.
PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES.
92 The following adjectives, nominal force
:
—
also, frequently
have
pro-
I.
alias, anai/ier
alter, iAe other
;
uter, which of two ? (interr.)
neuter, neither
niillus,
whichever of two
finus, one
2.
;
(rel.)
;
no one
(in oblique cases).
The compounds, —
uterque, utraque, utrumque, each of two
utercumque, utracumque, utrumcumque, whoever of two i uterlibet, utralibet, utrumlibet, either one you please i utervis, utravls, utrumvis, either one you please
alteruter, alterutra, alterutrum, the one or the other.
The rest of the word remains In these, uter alone is declined. unchanged, except in case of alteruter, which may decline both parts
as,
Nom. alteruter
Gen.
alterius utrius,
altera utra
etc.
alterum utrum
54
INFLECTIONS.
Chapter
93.
II.
— Conjugation.
;
A
Verb
is
a word which asserts something
loves.
as, est,
he is; amat, he
Conjugation.
94.
The
Inflection of
Verbs
is
called
Verbs
:
Person
1
—
have
Voices,
Voice,
Mood, Tense, Number, and
Two
2.
Three Moods,
3.
— Active and Passive. — Indicative, Subjunctive, Imperative. Six Tenses, —
Present,
Imperfect,
Perfect,
Pluperfect,
Future,
Future Perfect.
;
But the Subjunctive lacks the Future and Future Perfect Imperative employs only the Present and Future.
4.
5.
while Jie
Two Numbers, — Singular and
Three Persons,
Plural.
—
First,
Second, and Third.
95.
this,
These make up the
the following
1.
so-called Finite Verb.
Besides
we have
2.
Noun and
Adjective Forms:
Noun Forms,
—
Infinitive,
Gerund, and Supine.
Adjective Forms,
— Participles (including the Gerundive).
of the
96.
The Personal Endings
Verb
are,
—
Sing.
Plu.
VERB-STEMS.
I.
— THE
FOUR CONJUGATIONS.
55
Present Stem, from which are formed 1. Present, Imperfect, and Future Indicative, 2. Present and Imperfect Subjunctive,
3.
—
Active and Passive.
4.
5.
The The The
Imperative,
Present
Infinitive,
Present Active Participle, the Gerund, and Gerundive.
II.
Perfect Stem, from which are formed 1. Perfect, Pluperfect, and Future Perfect Indicative, 2. Perfect and Pluperfect Subjunctive,
3.
—
1
>
Active.
Perfect Infinitive,
J
III.
Participial Stem, from which are formed
1.
—
Passive.
Perfect Participle,
Perfect, Pluperfect,
2.
and Future Perfect Indicative,
3.
Perfect and Pluperfect Subjunctive, Perfect Infinitive,
4.
gin, are the Supine, the
Apparently from the same stem, though really of different ori^ Future Active Participle, the Future Infinitive
Active and Passive.
THE FOUR CONJUGATIONS.
98.
There are
in Latin four regular Conjugations, dis-
tinguished from each other by the vowel of the termination
of the Present Infinitive Active, as follows
Conjugation.
:
—
56
INFLECTIONS.
CONJUGATION OF SUM.
100.
The
irregular verb
sum
is
so
important for
is
the
conjugation of all other verbs that its inflection
at the outset.
given
PRINCIPAL PARTS.
Pees. Ind. Prks. Inf.
Peef. Ind.
Fut. Partic.1
sum
esse
IN
fui
futurus
DICATIVE MOOD.
Present Tense.
PLURAL.
SINGULAR.
sum, I am,
es,
sumus, we
are,
thou art,
he
is
estis, yoit are,
est,
sunt, they are.
Imperfect.
eram,
I was,
was
eramus, we were,
eratis,
eras, thou wast,
erat, he
you were,
erant, they were.
Future.
ero,
eris, erit,
/ shall be,
thou wilt
he will be
be,
erimus,
eritis,
we
shall be,
you will be,
be.
erunt, they will
Perfect.
fui,
/ have
been,
I was,
fuimus,
fuistis,
we have been, we
been,
were,
were,
fuisti,
fuit,
thou hast been, thou wast,
you have
you
he has been, he
was
fuerunt,
fuere,
they have been, they were.
Pluperfect.
fueram,
fiieras,
/ had been,
had been
thou hadst been,
fueramus, we'had been, fueratis, you had been,
fuerant, they
.
fuerat, he
had been.
Future Perfect.
fuero,
T shall have been,
have been. he will have been
»
fuerimus,
fueritis,
fueris, thou wilt
fueiit,
fuerint,
is
we shall have been, you will have been, they will have been.
sum.
The
Perfect Participle
wanting in
CONJUGATION OF SUM.
SUBJUNCTIVE.'
Present.
SINGULAR.
sim,
57
may I be,
thou
be,
simus,
be,
let
us
be, be,
SIS, ntayst
sit, let
sitis, be ye,
may you
be.
him
may he
be
;
»
sint, let
them
Imperfect.
essem,2
I should be,
esses,^ thou wouldst be,
esaet,2 j^ ivould be
essemus, we should be, essetis, you would be,
essent,2 they
would be.
Perfect.
fiierim,
fiieris,
I may -have may have
been,
thou ntayst have been,
fueritis,
fuenmus, 7ve may have been, you may have been,
fuerit,
he
been
fuerint, they
may have
been.
Pluperfect.
fuissem,
fulsset,
/ should have
been,
fuisses, thou wouldst
have been, he would have been
fuissemns, we should have been, fuissetis, you would have been,
fuissent, they
would have
been.
IMPERATIVE.
Fres. es, be thou
este, be ye,
Fut.
esto, thou shall be,
estote, ye shall
be,
esto, he shall be;
suuto, they shall
be.
INFINITIVE.
Pres. esse, to be.
Per/, fuisse, to
PARTICIPLE.
been.
be.
have
Fut. futurus esse,' to be about to
1
Fut. futurus,* about to
be.
The meanings
of the different tenses of the Subjunctive are so
varied, particularly in subordinate clauses, that
many and so no attempt can be made to give
them here. For fuller information the pupil is referred to the Syntax. ^ For essem, esBes, esset, essent, the forms forem, fores, foret, forent are sometimes used. * For futurus esse, the form fore is often used. * Declined like bonus, -a, -um.
58
INFLECTIONS.
FIRST (OR A-) CONJUGATION.
101.
Active Voice.
— Amo,
amav^
/
love.
PRINCIPAL PARTS.
Pbks. Iot.
Pkes. Inf.
Pkef. Ind.
Perf. Pass. Pastic.
amo
amare
amatus
INDICATIVE MOOD.
Present Tense.
SINGULAR.
PLURAL.
amo, I love, amas, you love,
zmat, Jie loves
amamus, we
amant, ihey
Imperfect.
love,
amatis, you love,
love.
amabam, I was
a.ma.ha.B,
loving^
loving,
amabamus, we were
loving,
you were
amSbat, he was loving;
amabatis, you were loving, amabant, they were loving.
Future.
amabo, I shall love, amabiSj/ow will love,
amSbit, he will love
amabimus, we shall love, amabitis, you will love, amabunt, they will love.
Perfect.
amavi, I have loved, I loved, amavistijj/oa have loved, you
loved,
.amavimus, we have loved, we amavistis, /o« have loved, you
loved,
lined,
amavit, he has loved, he loved;
amaverunt, -ere, they have loved,thij
loved.
Pluperfect.
amaveram, / had loved, a.Taa,vera.B, you had loved, amaverat, he had loved;
amaveramus, we had loved, amaveratis, you had loved,
amaverant, they had loved.
Future Perfect.
amavero, / shall have loved, amaveris, you will have loved, amaverit, he will have loved;
1
amaverimus, we shall have loved, amaveritis, you will have loved, amaverint, they will have loved.
also
The Imperfect
means I loved.
FIRST CONJUGATION.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
Present.
SINGULAR.
59
PLURAL.
amem, may I love, ames, may you love^
amet,
let
amemus, lei us love, ametis, may you love,
ament,
Imperfect.
let
him
love
them
love.
amarem, / should love, amtres,^0» would love, amSret, he would love
atnaremus, we should
love,
amaretis, you would love,
amarent, they would
Perfect.
love.
amaverim, / may have loved, amaveris, you may have laved, amaveiit, he may have loved i
amaveritis, j/oa
amaverimus, we may have loved, may have loved,
amaverint, they-^ay^have loved.
Pluperfect.
amavissem, I should have loved, amavisses, you would have loved, amavisset, he would have loved;
atnavissemus, we shouldhave loved,
amavissetis, ypxrwould have loved,
amavissent, iheyjwould have loved.
IMPERATIVE.
Pres. ama, love thou;
am ate,
love ye.
love,
Fut.
amato, thou shall love, amato, he shall love;
INFINITIVE.
ama.t6te,ye shall
amanto, they shall love.
PARTICIPLE.
Pres. amans,^ loving.
Pres. amare, to love.
Perf. amavisse, to have loved.
Fut.
amatuTus esse,
to love.
to be about
Fut.
(Gen. amantis.) amaturus, about to love.
GERUND.
Gen. amandi, of loving, Dat. iimaxido, for loving.
Ace.
Abl.
SUPINE.
amandum,
loving,
Ace.
Abl.
amatum,
amatu, to
to love;
love, be 'oved.
amando, by
loving.
1
For declension of amans, see
§ 70. 3.
6o
INFLECTIONS.
FIRST (OR A-) CONJUGATION. Amor, / am loved. Passive Voice.
102.
—
FIRST CONJUGATION.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
Present.
61
May I be loved,
SINGULAR.
let
him
be loved.
PLURAL.
amer
ameris, or -re
amemur
amemini amentur
Imperfect.
loved.,
ametur
I should be
amarer
amareiis, or -re aniaretur
he would be loved.
amaremur
amaremini amareutur
Perfect.
/ may have been
loved.
amatus sim ^ amatuB sTs amatuB sit
Pluperfect.
amati simus amati Bitis amati sint
I should have
been loved, he
would have been
loved.
amatus essem amatus esses amatus esset
amati essemus
amati esaetis amati essent
IMPERATIVE.
Pres. amare,^ be thou loved
amamini,
be ye loved.
Fut.
amator, thou shall be loved, amator, he shall be loved;
INFINITIVE.
amantor, they shall be loved
PARTICIPLE.
Perfect.
Pres. amSxi, to be loved. Perf.
amatus esse,
loved.
to
have been
amatus, loved, havittg
been loved.
Fut.
amatum
iri, to
be about to
be loved.
Gerundive, amandus, to be loved, deserving to be
loved.
1
Fuerlm,
etc.,
are sometimes used for
sim
;
so fulssem,
etc.,
for
essezn.
^ In actual usage passive imperatives occur only In deponents (J 112).
6z
INFLECTIONS.
SECOND (OR
103.
B-)
CONJUGATION.
Active Voice.
— Moneo, I advise.
Perf. Ind.
PRINCIPAL PARTS.
Phes. Ind.
Prbs. Inf.
Perf. Pass. Partic
moneo
monere
monui
monituB
INDICATIVE MOOD.
Present Tense.
SINGULAR.
/ advise.
PLURAL.
moneo monSa
monet
Imperfect.
monemuB
monetis
monent
/ was advising,
or
/ advised.
monebam
SECOND CONJUGATION.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
Present.
,
63
May
SINGULAR.
/advise,
let
him
advise.
.PLURAL.
moneam
moneas moneat
Imperfect.
moneamus
moneatia
moneant
he would advise.
I should advise, monerem
moneres moneret
moneremuB
monSretis
monerent
Perfect.
/ may have advised.
monuenm
monueris monuerit
Pluperfect
monuerimua
monueritis
monuerint
I should have
monuiBsem
monuisses monuisset
advised, he
would have advised.
moniiaaemit
monulssetls
monuissent
IMPERATIVE.
Pres.
Fut.
mone, advise thou monSto, thou shall advise, moneto, he shall advise
INFINITIVE.
mon§te, advise ye. monetote, ye shall advise, monentS, they shall advise.
PARTICIPLE.
Pres. monehs, advising.
Pres. monere, to advise. Perf. monuisse, to have advised. Fut. monituruB esse, to be about
to advise.
Fut.
(Gen. monentis.) moniturua, about to advise,
GERUND.
Gen. monendi, Dot.
Ace.
Abl.
SUPINE.
of advising.
advising,
m<yaB.-a&.o, for advising.
monendum,
Ace. monitjum, to advise,
Abl. monitu, to advise, ie advised
monendo, by advising.
64
INFLECTIONS.
SECOND (OR
104.
E-)
CONJUGATION.
Passive Voice.
— Moneor, I am advised.
Perf. Ind.
PRINCIPAL PARTS.
Phes. Ind. Pres. Inf.
moneor
moneri
monitus
sum
INDICATIVE MOOD.
Present Tense.
SINGULAR.
I am advised.
PLURAL.
moneor
moneris
monemur
monemini monentur
Imperfect.
monetur
I was advised.
monebar
monebaris, or -re
monebamur
monebamini monebautur
Future.
monebatur
I shall be advised.
monebor
moneberis, or -re
monebimur
monebimini monebuntur
Perfect.
monebitur
/ have
monitus sum monitus es monitus est
been advised,
I was advised.
moniti
sumus
moniti estis
moniti sunt
Pluperfect.
I had been
monitus eram monitus eras monitus erat
advised.
moniti
eramus
moniti eratis
moniti erant
Future Perfect. I shall have been advised.
monitus ero monitus eris monitus erit
moniti erimus
moniti eritis moniti erunt
SECOND CONJUGATION.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
Present,
6$
May I be advised,
SINGULAR.
let
him
be advised.
PLURAL.
monear
moneaiis, or -re
moneamur
moneaminl moneantur
Imperfect.
moneatur
T should be advised, he would be advised.
monerer
monereris, or
monerSmur
^e
Perfect.
moneretur
moneremini monerentur
/ tnay have
monitua sim monitus sis monitus sit
been advised.
moniti
simus
moniti sitis
moniti sint
Pluperfect.
I should have been
monitus essem monitus esses monitus esaet
advised, he
would have been advised.
moniti essemus moniti essetis moniti essent
IMPERATIVE.
Pres.
icaonete, be thou
advised
be ad-
moneminS., be ye advised.
Fut.
monetor, thou shall
vised,
monetor, he shall be advised.
monentor, they shall be advised.
INFINITIVE.
moneri, to be advised. Perf. monitus esse, to have been
Pres.
Perfect.
PARTICIPLE.
monitus, advised,
having been advised.
Gerundive, monendus, to be advised, deserving to
be advised.
advised.
Fut.
monitum
iri, to
be about to
be advised.
66
INFLECTIONS.
THIRD (OR CONSONANT-) CONJUGATION.
105.
Active Voice.
— Rego, /
rule.
PRINCIPAL PARTS.
Ind. D.
Pees.
In-f. 1
Pekf. Ind.
regS
THIRD CONJUGATION.
67
68
INFLECTIONS.
THIRD (OR CONSONANT-) CONJUGATION.
106.
Passive Voice.
— Regor, I am ruled.
PRINCIPAL PARTS.
Pres. Ind.
THIRD CONJUGATION.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
Present.
69
May I be ruled,
regar
regaris, or -re
let
him
be ruled.
PLURAL.
regamur
regamini regantur
Imperfect.
.1 should be ruled,
regatur
he would be ruled.
'
regerer
regereris, or -re
regeremur
regeremini regerentur
regeretur
Perfect.
/ tnay have
rectus siia
been ruled.
recti
simus
rectus SIS
rectus sit
recti Bitis
recti sint
Pluperfect.
I should have
rectus
been ruled, he
would have been
recti
ruled.
essem
essemus
essent
rectus esses rectus esset
recti essetis recti
IMPERATIVE.
Pres.
vtgeie, be thou ruled
regitor, thou shall be ruled,
regitor, he shall be ruled;
re^maa.,
be ye ruled.
Fut.
reguntor, they shall be ruled.
INFINITIVE.
Pres.
Per/,
regi, to be ruled.
PARTICIPLE.
Perfect.
rectus, ruled,
having
rectus 6sse, to have been
ruled.
•
been ruled.
Gerundive, regendus, to be ruled,
deserving
ruled.
to
Fut.
rectum
iri,
to
be about to
be
be ruled.
70
INFLECTIONS.
FOURTH (OR
107.
X-)
CONJUGATION.
Active Voice.
— Audio, /^^ar.
PRINCIPAL PARTS.
PwBS. Imd;
FOURTH CONJUGATION.
71
72
INFLECTIONS.
FOURTH (OR
108.
I-)
CONJUGATION.
Passive Voice.
— Audior, I atn heard.
FOURTH CONJUGATION.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
Present.
73
May I be heard,
SINGULAR.
let
him
be heard.
PLURAL.
audiar
audiaris, or -re
audiamur
audiamini audiantur
Imperfect.
audiatur
I should be
audirer
audireiis, or -re
heard, he would be heard.
audiremui''
audiretur
Perfect.
audiremini audirentur
/ niay have
auditus
been heard.
audit!
Sim
simus
audltuB sis
auditus sit
auditi sitia
auditi sint
Pluperfect.
r should have been heard, he would have been heard.
auditus
essem
auditi
essemus
auditus esses auditus esset
auditi essetis
auditi essent
IMPERATIVE.
Pres. audire, be thou
heard;
audimini, be ye heard.
Fut.
auditor, thou shall be heard,
auditor, he shall be heard;
audiuntor, they shall be heard.
INFINITIVE.
Pres.
audiri, to be heard.
PARTICIPLE.
Perfect.
auditus, heard,
Per/,
auditus esse, to have been
heard.
having been heard^
Gerundive, audiendus, to be heard, deserving
to be heard.
Fut.
audltum
iri,
to be about to be
heard.
74
INFLECTIONS.
VERBS IN -lO OF THE THIRD CONJUGATION.
109. I. Verbs in -i5 of the Third Conjugation take the endings of the Fourth Conjugation wherever the latter endings have two successive vowels. This occurs only in
the Present System.
2.
Here belong
—
make;
fodio,
to
a) capio, to take; cupio, to desire; facio, to
dig; fugio, to flee; jacio, to throw; pario, to bear; quatid, to shake ; rapio, to seize ; sapio, to taste.
b)
Compounds of lacio and speoiS (both
allicio, entice
ante-classical)
;
as,
c)
The
conspicio, behold. deponents gradior, to go ; morior,
;
to die
;
patior,
te
suffer.
110.
Active Voice.
— Capio, I take.
PRINCIPAL PARTS.
Prks. Ind.
VERBS IN -10 OF THE THIRD CONJUGATION. 7$
76
SINGULAR.
captus sum,
es, est
INFLECTIONS.
,
Perfect.
plural.
capti sumus, estis, sunt.
Pluperfect.
captus eram, eras, erat
capti eramus, eratis, erant^
Future Perfect.
captus ero,
eris, erit
capti erimus, eritis, erunt.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
Present.
capiar, -iaris, -iatur
capiamur, -iamini, -iantur.
Imperfect.
caperer, -ereris, -eretur
caperemur, -eremini, -erentur.
Perfect.
captus sim,
sis, sit
capti simus,
sitis, siat.
Pluperfect.
captus essem, esses, esset
capti essemus, essetis, essent.
IMPERATIVE.
Pres.
capere
capitor,
capiminl.
Fut.
capitor
capiuntor.
INFINITIVE.
Pres.
capi.
PARTICIPLE.
Perfect.
Perf.
captus esse.
captus.
Fut.
captum
iri.
Gerundive, capiendus.
DEPONENT VERBS.
112.
Deponent Verbs have
in the
main Passive form
:
with Active or Neuter meaning.
a.
But
b.
They have the following Active forms Future Infinitive, Present and Future Participles, Gerund, and Supine. They have the following Passive meanings: always in the
Gerundive, and sometimes in the Perfect Passive Participle;
as,
Bequendus,
to be
followed; adeptus, attained.
DEPONENT VERBS.
113.
n
Paradigms of Deponent Verbs are miroT, mirari, miratus sum, admire. I. Conj.
—
78
INFLECTIONS.
SEMI-DEPONENTS.
Semi-Deponents are verbs which have the Present System in the Active Voice, but the Perfect System in Here belong the Passive without change of meaning.
114.
I.
—
audeo, aud^re, ausus sum, to dare. gaudeo, gaudere, gavisua sum, to rejoice.
soleo,
fido,
3.
aolere,
fldere,
solitus sum, to be wont.
fisus
sum,
to trust.
The
following verbs have a
:
Active meaning
—
Perfect
Passive
Participle with
adolesco,^(7K/ up; cenare, dine
placexe, please
adultus, having grown up.
ceuatus, having dined.
placitus, having pleased, agreeable,
prandere, lunch potSre, drink jurare, swear ;
a.
pransus, having lunched. potus, having drunk. juratus, having sworn.
in
Juratus
is
used
a passive sense
also.
3.
Revertor and devertor both
;
the Active Voice
viz.
—
regularly form
their
Perfect
in
revertor,
reverti (Inf.), .revert! (Perf.), to return. dSvertor, deverti (Inf.), deverti (Perf.), to turn aside.
PERIPHRASTIC CONJUGATION.
There are two Periphrastic Conjugations, the The Active is formed by com. bining the Future Active Participle with the auxiliary sum, the Passive by combining the Gerundive with the same
115.
—
Active and the Passive.
auxiliary.
Active Periphrastic Conjugation.
Pres.
Imp.
Ftit.
Perf.
Plup.
Put. P.
INDICATIVE MOOD. amaturus (-a, -um) sum, I am abottito love. amaturuB eram, / was about to love. amatarus ero, / shall be about to love. amaturus fui, / have been [was) about to love. amaturus fueram, / had been about to love. amatarus luero, / shall have been about to love.
PECULIARITIES OF CONJUGATION.
SUBJUNCTIVE. amaturus sim, may I be about to love. amaturus essem, I should be about to love. amaturus fuerim, / may have been about to love. amaturus f ulssem, / should have been about to love,
INFINITIVE.
Pres.
Perf.
79
Pres.
Imp.
Perf.
Plup.
amattirus esse,
to be
to
about
to love.
amaturus f ulsse,
have been about to
love.
Passive Periphrastic Conjugation.
INDICATIVE.
Pres.
Imp.
Put.
Perf.
Plup.
Put. P.
amandus (-a, -um) sum, / am to be loved, must be loved. amandus eram, / was to be'loved. amandus ero, I shall deserve to be loved. amandus fui, / was to be loved. amandus fueram, / had deserved to be loved. amandus fuero, / shall have deserved to be loved,
SUBJUNCTIVE. amandus sim, may I deserve to be loved. amandus essem, / should deserve to be loved. amandus fuerim, / may have deserved to be loved. amandus fuissem, / should have deserved to be loved.
INFINITIVE.
Pres.
Imp.
Perf.
Plup,
Pre^.
Perf.
amandus esse, to deserve to be loved. amandus fuisse, to have deserved to be loved.
PECULIARITIES OF CONJUGATION.
and -ivi, with the forms derived from them, often drop the ve or vi before endings beginning with r or s. So also novi (from nosco) and the compounds of movl (from
116.
I.
Perfects in -avl, -evx,
moveo)
.
Thus
:
—
amavisti
amasti
delevisti
delesti
amavisse
amasse
araarunt
delevisse
delesse
amaverunt amaverim
deleverunt
delerunt
amarim
deleverim
delerim
amaveram
amavero
novisti
amaram
amaro
HOStl
deleveram
delevero
deleram
delero
noverim
norim
novisse
audivisti
n5sse
audTsti
noveram
audivisse
noram
audisse
8o
2.
INFLECTIONS.
In the Gerund and Gerundive of the Third and Fourth Conju -undus, -undi, often occur instead of -endus anc
gations, the endings
-endi, as faciuudus, faciundi.
3. Dico, duco, facio, form the Imperatives, die, duo, fao. Bui compounds of facio form the Imperative ,in -fice, as confice. Compounds of dioo, duco, accent the ultima as, edno, edic. 4. Archaic and Poetic forms
:
—
;
a.
The ending -ier in the Present Infinitive Passive; amarier, monerier, dicier, for amarl, moneri, dici. The ending -ibam
Conjugation,
;
as,
b.
scibo, for
c.
for -iebam in Imperfects of the Fourtli and -ibo for -iam in Futures as, scibam, soiebam, sciam.
Instead of the fuller forms, in such words as dixistT, scrTp-
surrezisse, we surreze, etc.
sistis,
d.
sometimes
find
dizti, soripstis,
The endings
-im,
;
-is, etc. (for
-am,
Subjunctive forms
5.
as,
edim
(eat),
-as, etc.') occur in a few duint, perduiat.
In the Future Active and Perfect Passive Infinitive, the auxiliary often omitted as, acturum for acturum esse ; ejectus for Sjectus esse.
esse
is
;
FORMATION OF THE VERB
117.
STEiVIS.
Formation of the Present Stem.
Many
Present Stem
verbs employ the simple Verb Stem for the ^ as, dicere, amare, monere, audire. Others
; -
modify the Verb Stem to form the Present, as follows: 1 By appending the vowels, a, e, i as,
.
;
—
—
juvare. Present Stem juva- (Verb Stem juv-). augere, « " « auge- ( « aug-). vincire, « « " vinci- ( " vino-).
By adding i, as capio, Present Stem capi- (Verb Stem cap-)By the insertion of n (m before labial-mutes) before the final con' sonant of the Verb Stem as, fundo (Stem fud-), rumpo (Stem rup-) 4- By appending -n to the Verb Stem as,
3.
3.
;
;
—
°ern-5
peIl-6 (for pel-no).
1 Strictly speaking, the Present Stem always ends in a Thematic Vowel (S or 6) as dic-e., dic-6-; amg.6-, ama^a-. But the multitude of phonetic changes involved prevents a scientific treatment of the subject here. See the author's Uim
;
Lamuare.
FORMATION OF THE VERB STEMS.
5.
8
By appending
t to the
Verb Stem
flect-o.
;
as,^
6.
By appending so
cresc-o.
to the
Verb Stem
;
as,
—
initial
scisc-o.
7.
By
Reduplication, that
i
;
the
Verb Stem with
as,
—
is,
by prefixing the
consonant of
gi-gn-o (root gen-),
si-st-o (root sta-).
FormatiDn
118.
1.
of the Perfect
is
Stem.
The
Perfect
Stem
formed from the Verb Stem
;
—
By adding v
amav-T,
(in case of
Vowel Stems)
dSlev-i,
as,
audiv-i.
;
2.
By adding u
(in case of
some Consonant Stems)
alu-i.
as,
— —
strepu-i,
3.
geuu-i,
By adding
s (in case of most Consonant Stems)
;
as,
carp-o. Perfect carps-i. " Bcrips-i (for sorib-si). " ris-i (for rid-si) lid-eo,
sorib-o,
sent-io,
" "
sens-i dix-i
(for sent-si)
(i.e.
dic-o,
a.
dic-ai).
Note that before the ending
lost;
-sT a Dental Mute (t, d) is a Guttural Mute (o, g) unites with s to form x; while
4.
the Labial b is changed to p. Without addition. Of this formation there are three types a) The Verb Stem is reduplicated by prefixing the initial consonant with the following vowel or e as,
:
—
;
—
posco,
pello,
curro. Perfect cu-curri. " po-posci.
"
pe-puli.
with the exception of do, ato, sisto, disco,
:
Note i.— Compounds,
omit the reduplication.
posco,
Thus
com-puli, but re-poposci.
as,
Note
plication,
2.
— Verbs beginning with sp
The
legi
but drop s from the stem;
spondeo, spo-pondi;
or St retain both consonants in the redusto, steti.
;
i)
c)
Verb Stem is lengthened as, lego, Note that S. by this process becomes e. The vowel of the Verb Stem is unchanged; as, verto, vertij minuo, minui.
short vowel of the
;
ag5, egi.
82
INFLECTIONS.
Formation of the Participial Stem.
119.
The
Perfect
is
Passive Participle, from
-us, is
Participial
1.
Stem
;
derived by dropping
which formed
:
—
the
By adding
-tus (sometimes to the Present Stem, sometimes
as,
to
the
Verb Stem)
—
ama-re. Participle ama-tus.
asle-re,
" "
"
dele-tus.
audi-re,
leg-ere,
audi-tus.
leo-tus.
sorlb-ere,
aeuti-re,
"
"
aorip-tuB,
caed-ere,
a.
"
sen-sus (for sent'-tns). oae-sus (for caed-tus).
becomes c (see § 8, s) t> becomes p which is then often simplified to s (§ 8,
!
Note
that g, before t,
;
while
z).
dt or tt becomes
ss,
caesus, where 2. After the analogy of Participles like sensus and -BUS arises by phonetic change, -sus for -tus is added to other Verb
Stems
;
as,
—
lab-i,
Participle lap-sus.
fig-ere,
a.
"
fi-xus.
The same consonant changes occur in appending this ending -SUB to the stem as in the case of the Perfect ending -si (see § ii8, 3, a).
;
3.
A
few Verbs form the Participle in -itus
as,
—
doma-re, mone-re,
4.
dom-itus.
m.on-itus.
is
The Future
But
Active Participle
usually identical in
its
;
stem
with
the Perfect Passive Participle; as, ama-tus,
moniturus.
juva-re,
—
amaturus
moni-tus,
LIST OF
LIST OF
THE MOST IMPORTANT VERBS.
PRINCIPAL PARTS.
First (A-) Conjugation.
83
THE MOST IMPORTANT VERBS, WITH
120.
I.
Perfect in -Vi.
amavi
amatus
love
amo
poto
amare
All regular verbs of the First Conjugation follow this model.
84
II.
INFLECTIONS.
Perfect in -T7I. Type -eo, -ere, -ui,
arcere
a.
-itua.
arceo
arcui
coerceo ccerceg
coercere
m
calui
coercitus exercjtus
calitjinis
,
keep off hold in check
practise
be
exencui
-
CeLfeM. carui
ffOf'
myiCLJ
warm
.
be without
—dplep.
habeo
grieve
habere
abut
habitus
debitus
have
owe
offer
lie
-f^aebeo
praebitus
jacere
jacui
—jaceo
mereo
jaciturus
merere
merui
meritus
earn, deserve
^moneo
monere^
npcere
^2F'''
advise
injure
obey
ml
placui
tacui
'
please
taciturus
territus
vali turns
,
be silent
-terreo
-
terrui
frighten
be strong
: -
valeo
valui
i.
Note
-eeeo
The
following
l|.ck
the Participial Stem
egere
egui egul
want
stand forth bloom
bristle
emmeo
flSreo
eminere
florere
eminul
florui
horreo
lateo
horrere
latere
horrui
latui
lurk
niteo
nitere
nitui
gleam
smell
be pale
lie
oleo
palleo
olere
pallere
olui
pallul
-pateo
patere
patui
open
rubeo
sileo
rubere
silere
rubui
silul
be
red
be silent
splendeo
studeo
stupeo
-timed
splendere
studere
stupere
splendui
studul
stupuT
gleam
study
be
amazed
timere
torpere
timul
torpul
viguT
virui
fear
be dull flourish
be green
torpeo
vigeo
vireo
vigere
virere
and
others.
LIST OF
Note
2.-
THE MOST IMPORTANT VERBS.
85
86
V.
INFLECTIONS.
LIST OF
-tego
THE MOST IMPORTANT VERBS.
87
88
LIST OF
-emo
THE MOST IMPORTANT VERBS.
8g
90
tremo
INFLECTIONS.
LIST Of
11.
THE MOST IMPORTANT VERBS.
:
9
Verbs with Present Stem
92
So
etc.
INFLECTIONS.
other prepositional compounds, perficio, perjicior ; interficio. interficior
But
—
assuefacio
assuefacere
assuefeci
assuefactus
accustom
Passive, assuefio, assuefierl, assuefactus
sum.
non-prepositional com-
So
also fatefacib, pateflo ; calefacio, caleflo ;
and
all
pounds.
'^jacio
LIST OF
3.
THE MOST IMPORTANT VERBS.
93
Verbs
94
II.
INFLECTIONS.
Perfect ends
in
IRREGULAR VERBS.
IRREGULAR VERBS.
124.
95
A number of Verbs are called
Verbs
is
Irregular.
The most
fio.
important are sum, do, ed5,
fero, volo, nolo,
malo, eo,
The
peculiarity of these
that they
append the
the stem,
fer-s
personal endings in
instead of
many forms
fer-i-s.
directly to
employing a connecting vowel, as
(2d
Sing, of fer-6), instead of
They
are but the relics
of
what was once
125.
in Latin a large class of Verbs.
The
Inflection of
sum
has already been given.
compounds are
inflected in the
same way.
afui
They
are
—
Its various
absum
adsum desum
insum
intersum
abesse
am
absent
Pres. Partic. absens (absentis), absent.
adesse
deesse
inesse
interesse
adful defui
Infui
interfui
praefiii
praesum
praeesse
am present am lacking am in am among am in charge
hinder
of
Pres. Partic. praeSens (praesentis),^^'sje«^.
obsum prosum subsum
supersum
obesse prodesse
subesse
superesse
is
obfui
profui
subfui
superful
of
am am am
;
of advantage underneath
left
Note. — Prosum
the
compounded
d
disappears before consonants, as
prod prosumus
(earlier
form of pro) and but prodestis.
is
sum
;
126.
Possum.
In
its
Present System
possum
a
compound
of
pot- (for pote, able^ and
sum
;
potui
is
from an obsolete potere.
—;> possum,
96
INFLECTIONS.
IRREGULAR VERBS.
1.
97
is inflected regularly with the short vowel. Thus: dSbatur, dSietur, etc. 2. The archaic and poetic Present Subjunctive forms duim, duint, perdxut, perduint, etc., are not from the root da-, but from du-, a collateral root of similar meaning.
The
Passive
dSri, d^tur,
128.
Edo,
/«a/f.
PRINCIPAL PARTS.
edo,
esse,
edi,
esus.
Active Voice. INDICATIVE MOOD.
Pres.
98
129.
INFLECTIONS.
IRREGULAR VERBS.
99
lOO
130.
INFLECTIONS.
IRREGULAR VERBS.
131.
lOI
/^^"^
Flo.
fy^<h (0
^'
ICCa-
PRINCIPAL PARTS.
fio,
fieri,
factus sum,
to become, be
made.
I02
INFLECTIONS.
DEFECTIVE VERBS.
103
I04
136.
INFLECTIONS.
Fan,
to speak.
This is inflected regularly System it has
—
in the perfect tenses.
In the Present
INDICATIVE MOOD.
SINGULAR.
Pres.
PLURAL.
fatur.
Fut.
fabor,
fabitur.
Impv.
Inf. Pres. Partic.
fare.
farl.
fantis, fanti, etc.
Gerund, G., Gerundive,
Note. —Forms of fari
fandi
;
D. and AM., fando.
fandus.
as,
are rare. More frequent are its compounds; aff atur, he addresses ; praef amur we say in advance.
,
—
137.
1
Other Defective Forms.
to be able,
Queo, quire, quivi,
to be unable, are inflected like eo, but
and nequeo, nequire, nequivi, occur chiefly in the Present Tense,
and there only in special forms.
2.
Quaeso, / entreat;
qvLSLesvimvLB,
we
entreat.
;
3.
Cedo
4.
5.
(2d sing. Impv.), cette (2d plu.) £-ive me, Salve, salvete, hail. Also Infinitive, salvere.
tell
me.
Have
(av5), havete, hail.
Also
Infinitive,
havere.
IMPERSONAL VERBS.
Impersonal Verbs correspond to the English, it seems, etc. They have no personal subject, but may take an Infinitive, a Clause, or a Neuter Pronoun; as, me pudet hoc feoisse, lit. it shames me to have done this; hoc decet, this is fitting. Here belong
138.
snows,
it
—
;
I.
Verbs denoting operations of the weather
folget
toilet
fulsit
as,
it
lightens
tonuit
it
thunders
IMPERSONAL VERBS.
grandinat
105
Part
III.
PARTICLES.
139.
Particles are the four Parts of
;
admit of inflection
tions, Interjections.
viz.
Speech that do not Adverbs, Prepositions, Conjunc-
ADVERBS.
140.
Adverbs denote manner,
place, time, or
degree.
Most adverbs are in origin case-forms which have become
stereotyped by usage.
The common
adverbial terminations
have already been given above (§ jS). Table of Correlatives is important
:
—
The
following
Relative and Interrogative.
Demonstrative.
Indefinite.
ubi, where ; where ?
hic, here.
ibi, illic, istic, there.
alicubi, us quam, ua<
piam, somewhere.
aliquo, to some place.
qu5, whither; whither f hue, hither.
eo, istuc, illuc,
thither.
unde, whence ; whence f hinc, hence.
inde, istiuc, illinc,
thence.
alicunde, from somewhere.
allqua, by sotne way.
qua, where; where?
hao, by this way.
ea^ istac, iliac, by
cum, when. quando, when ?
quotiens, as often as
that way. nunc, now.
turn, tunc, then.
aliquando, umquam,
sometime, ever.
totiSns, so often.
tarn, so
aliquotiens, some
how often ? quam, as much as j how much?
much.
io6
number of times. aliquantum, somewhat.
PREPOSITIONS.
107
PREPOSITIONS.
141. Prepositions show relations of words, lowing Prepositions govern the Accusative
:
—
The
fol-
ad,
to.
contra, against.
erga, toward.
post, after.
adversus, against,
praeter, past.
adversum, toward,
against.
extra, outside.
infra, below. inter, between.
prope, near. propter, on account of
ante, before.
secundum,
after.
apud, with, near. circa, around.
circiter, about.
intra, within.
juzta, near.
subter, beneath. super, over.
circum, around.
cis, this side of.
ob, on account of. penes, in the hands
per, through.
supra, above.
of.
trans, across.
ultra, beyond.
cltra, this side of.
1.
pone, behind.
th'e
versus, toward.
sense oi even;
as,
ITsque
is
often prefixed to ad, in
Usque ad urbem, even
2.
to the city.
Versus always
follows
its
case
;
as,
—
;
Romam versus, toward Rome.
It
may be combined
with a preceding Preposition
as,
—
ad urbem versus, toward the
3.
city.
Like prope, the Comparatives propior, propius, and the Super-
latives
prozimus, prozimg, sometimes govern the Accusative;
as,
Ubii prosime Rhenum incolunt, the Ubii dwell next to the Rhine propius castra hostium, nearer the camp of the enemy.
142.
a,
The
following Prepositions govern the Ablative
:
—
of,
ab, 3Jo3,from, by.
cum,
dS, from, concerning.
6,
pro, in front
for. sine, without.
absque, without. coram, in the presence
ex, from, out
of.
of
1.
prae, before.
tenus, up
to.
A, ab, abs.
Before vowels or h,
sonants
we
find
sometimes
f,
a,
ab must be used; before consometimes ab (the latter usually not
nor before c,
g, q,
before the labials b, p,
v,
m
;
or t)
;
abs occurs
conso-
only before te,
2.
and a
is
admissible even there.
E, ex.
Before vowels or h,
nants,
we
find
sometimes
e,
ex must be used sometimes ex-
;
before
Io8
3.
PARTICLES.
Tenus
It
regularly follows
its
case, as,
pectoribus tenus, up
as,
to iht
breast.
sometimes governs the Genitive,
is
labrorum tenus,
as far
as the lips.
4.
Cuia
appended
to the
Pronouns of the First and Second
Persons, and to the Reflexive Pronoun; usually also to the Relatiye
and Interrogative.
Thus
:
—
mecum
tecum secum
nobiscum vobiscum
quocum or cum quo quacum or cum qua quibuscum or cum quibus
i.
On
143.
quicum, see § 89, Footnote
in, in, into,
Two
Prepositions,
and
sub, under, gov-
ern both the Accusative and the Ablative.
cusative they denote motion
in
I.
;
With
city.
the Ac;
with the Ablative, rest
in urbe, in the
as,—
urbem,
into the city
Subter and super
are also
occasionally construed with the
Ablative.
144. Relation of Adverbs
1.
Prepositions were originally Adverbs, and
and Prepositions. many
etc.
of
them
still
retain their adverbial
meaning;
as,
post, afterwards; ante, previadverbs,
are
occasionally
ously
2.
;
contra, on the other hand,
Conversely
several
;
words, usually
employed as prepositions as, clam, pridie, with the Accusative. prpcul, simul, palam, with the Ablative.
3.
is
—
Andstrophe.
;
A
Preposition sometimes follows
its case.
This
called Andstrophe
el,
as,
quos inter
erat, those
among whom he was.
Anastrophe occurs
chiefly with dissyllabic prepositions.
CONJUNCTIONS AND INTERJECTIONS.
145. I. Conjunctions are used to connect ideas. For Coordinate Conjunctions, see §§ 341 ff. Subordinate Conjunctions are treated in connection with Subordinate Clauses.
2.
Interjections express emotion
1.
Thus
:
—
Surprise; as, en, eoce, o.
2.
3.
4.
Jov as, io, euoe. Sorrow and Pain as, heu, eheu, vae, pio. Calling as, heus, eho.
; ; ;
Part IV.
— WORD-FORMATION. —
•
I.
DERIVATIVES.
by appending certain terstems of verbs, nouns, or
146.
Derivatives are formed
Suffixes
to
minations called
adjectives.
A.
1.
NOUNS.
Fem.
-trix, denotes /^£«^i?m/; as,-^
Nouns derived from Verbs.
147.
I.
The
suffix -tor (-sor),
victor, victrix, victor
defensor, defender.
occasionally
;
Note.
— The
suffix
appended to noun stems g'ladiator gladiator (from gladlus)
-tor
is
,
as,
2.
The
as,
suffix
-or (originally -os) denotes
an
activity or
a condi
Hon;
a.moi,love;
3.
tivaor, fear ;
dolor, pain.
The
suffixes -tio (-sio), Gen." -onis,
denote an action as in process ; as,
—
and -tus (-sus), Gen. -us,
Tgnatio, hunting; obsessio, blockade; gemitus, sighing; cursus,
running.
Note.
— Rarer endings with the same force are —
:
;
0) -tura, -stira
as,
sepultura, burial; mensura, measuring,
i)
-ium; as,—
graudium,
c)
rejoicing.
-ido;
as,
cupido,
desire.
109
no
4.
WORD-FORMATION.
The
suffixes
-men, -mentum, -orum, -trum, -bulum, -culum,
;
denote the means or place of an action
as,
—
proof aratrum, plough } sepulcrum, grave vehiculum, carriage.
lumen (luo-s-men), light; ornamentum, ornament;
vocabulum, word;
AocxaxLevAvLxa.,
2.
ITouns derived from Nouns.
148.
I-
Diminutives end in
-ulus,
—
NOUNS.
4.
— ADJECTIVES.
official position
Ill
The
suffix
-atus denotes
or honor; as,
consulatus, consulship (consul)
5.
The
suffix
-ina appended to nouns denoting persons designates
it is
a vocation or the place where
carried on
;
as,
;
—
doctrina, teaching (doctor,
sutrina,
6.
cobbler'' s
teacher')
medicina, the art of healing (medicus, physician)
shop (sutor, cobbler).
;
Patronymics are Greek proper
names denoting son of
:
daughter of
...
.
They have
:
the following suffixes
—
.
.
.,
a) Masculines
-ides,
-ades,
-Tdes
;
as,
Friamides, son of
Peleus.
Priam ; Aeneades, son of Aeneas ; FelTdSs, son of
b)
:
;
Feminines -eis, -is, -ias as. Nereis, daughter of Nereus Atlantis, daughter of Atlas; Thaumantias, daughter of
Thaumas.
3.
Nouns derived from
Adjectives.
-ia, -itia
;
149.
for
The
suffixes -tas (-itas),
-tudo (-itudo),
the formation of abstract nouns denoting qualities
as,
—
are used
bonitas, goodness;
celeritas,
swiftness;
magnitudo, greatness
audacia, boldness;
arrilcitLa., friendship.
B.
1.
ADJECTIVES.
Adjectives derived from Verbs.
suffixes
;
150.
I.
The
-bundus and -cundus
of a present participle
as,
—
give nearly the force
tieraebMn&as, trembling
2.
jucundus Quvo), pleasing.
tendency.,
The
suffixes
-ax and -ulus denote an inclination or
credulus, credulous.
as,
mostly a faulty one; as,
loquaz, loquacious
3.
The
suffix
-idus denotes a state ;
—
cwpiAaa, eager.
ability,
calidus,
4-
^17^ ;
VLmidLOB, timid
The
suffixes -ilis
;
a passive sense
as,
—
and
-bilis
denote capacity or
usually in
ix2L^\&, fragile
docilis, docile.
(i.e.
capable of being broken)
;
112
2.
WORD-FORMATION.
Adjectives derived from Nouns.
a)
From Common Nouns,
151.
I.
The
suffixes
;
stances or materials
nxiievLs,
2.
as,
—
-eus and -inus are appended to names of sublexieus, of iron
tsLginvis,
ofgold
;
of ieec/i.
The
suffixes -ius, -icus, -His, -alis, -aris, -arius, -nus, -anus,
to,
-tnus, -ivus, -ensis signify belonging
connected with ; as,
—
oratorius, oratorical;
bellicuB, fiertaining to
civllis, civil;
legionarius, legionary
war ;
paternus, paternal urbanus, of the city
regalis, regal;
marinus, marine;
consularis, consular
aestivus, pertaining to summer ; ciroensis, belonging to the citcus.
3.
The
suffixes
-osus and -lentus Atnoie fullness ;
as,
—
periculosus, full of danger, dangerous
4.
gloriosus, glorious
opulentus, wealthy.
;
The
suffix
-tus has the force oi provided with
as,
—
barbatus, bearded;
S)
stellatus, set with stars.
From Proper Names.
152.
I.
Names
of j!>^rw«j take the suffixes: -anus, -ianus, -inus;
as,—
Catoniauus, belonging
2.
to
Cato; Plautinus, belonging to PlaiUus.
;
Names Names
as,
oi nations
talce
the suffixes -icus, -ius
as,
—
Germanicus, German
3.
Thracius, Thracian.
-ius
;
—
of places take the suffixes -anus, -inus, -gnsis, -aeus,
Romanus, Roman
Amerinus, of Ameria
Note.
Athiniensis, Athenian
Smy rnaeus, of Smyrna
Corinthius, Corinthian.
to names of countries, designate something stationed in the country or connected with it, but not indigenous as,
;
— -anus
—
and -ensis, appended
bellum Afrioanum, a war {of Romans with Romans') in Africa. bellum Hispaniense, a war carried on in Spain. legiones GalUcanae, {Roman) legions stationed in Gaul.
ADJECTIVES.
— VERBS.
—
\
113
3.
Adjectives derived from Adjectives.
;
153.
Diminutives in -lus sometimes occur
as,
parvolus, little misellus (passer), poor pauperculus, needy.
4.
little
{sparrow)
Adjectives derived from Adverbs.
in -ernus, -ternus, -tinus, -tinus
;
154.
These end
as,
—
hodiemus,
hesternus,
intestinus,
of to-day of yesterday
internal
long-lasting
(hodie)
(heri)
;
;
(intus)
(diu).
;
diutinus,
C. 1.
VERBS.
Verbs derived from Verbs.
155. I. Inceptives OR Inchoatives. These end in -sco, and are formed from Present Stems. They denote the beginning of an action
as,
labasoo,
begin to totter
(from labo)
horresco, tremesco,
grow rough
be^n
to tremble
(from horreo)
(from tremo)
obdormisco,
2.
fall asleep
(from dormio).
or energetic action.
Frequentatives or Intensives. These denote a repeated They are formed from the Participial Stem, and end in -to or -so. Those derived from verbs of the First Conjugation end in -ito (not -ato, as vife should expect). Examples of Frequentatives are
—
jacto,
toss about,
brandish
(from jacio, hurl)
;
curso,
volito,
a.
run hither and thither
flit
(from ourro, ruii)
(from vol6,y^).
;
about
;
Some double
cantito,
Frequentatives occur
as,
—
114
3.
WORD-FORMATION.
are
Desideratives. These denote a desire to do something. formed from the Participial Stem, and end in -urio as,
;
—
They
esurio,
desire to eat,
am hungry
(edo)
;
parturio, want to bring forth, ajn in labor (pario)
2.
Verbs derived from Kouns and Adjectives
(Denomiiiatives)
156. Denominatives of the First Conjugation are mostly transitive, those of the Second exclusively intransitive. Those of the Third and
Fourth Conjugations are partly transitive, partly intransitive.
ples are
—
Exam-
a)
From Nouns
:
—
defraud
clothe
fraudo,
vestio,
tloreo,
b')
(fraus)
(vestis)
(flos).
bloom
:
From
Adjectives
libero,
—
.
free
be fierce
(liber)
saevio,
(saevus).
D.
157.
I.
ADVERBS.
;
Adverbs derived from verbs are formed from the Stem by means of the suffix -im as,
—
Participial
certatim, curaim,
statim,
2.
emulously
in haste
(oerto)
;
(ourro)
immediately (sto).
:
Adverbs derived from nouns and adjectives are formed a) With the suffixes -tim (-sim), -atim; as,—
—
gradatim, step by step
pa.ulatim, gradually viritim, man by man.
b)
With
the suffix -tus
;
as,
— —
antlquitus, of old;
radioitus,/roOT the roots.
c)
With
the suffix -ter
;
as,
breviter,
briefly.
COMPOUNDS.
II.
115
COMPOUNDS.
Compounds are formed by the union of simple The second member usually contains the essential meaning of the compound the first member expresses
158.
I.
words.
;
some modification of
2.
this.
in
Vowel changes often occur
:
Thus
—
a.
b.
the
process
of
composition.
member of compounds. (See § 7. i.) vowel of the stem of the first member of the compound often appears as i where we should expect 5 or S; sometimes it is dropped altogether, and in case of consonant
In the second
final
The
stems
I is
often inserted
;
as,
—
signif er, standard-bearer
tubiceu, trumpeter magnaniiuus, high-minded^ matricida, matricide.
159.
I.
Examples of Compounds.
Nouns:
a)
—
+ Noun
;
Preposition
as,
—
.
de-deous, disgrace
'
pio-a.'Wis, great-grandfather.
b)
Noun + Verb Stem
;
as,
—
agri-cola, farmer
fratri-cida, fratricide.
1.
Adjectives
:
—
4-
a)
Preposition
Adjective (or
Noun)
;
as,
per-magnus, very great sub-obscurns, rather obscure i a-mens, frantic.
b)
Adjective
-I-
Noun
;
as,
magn-animus, great-hearted;
celeri-pes, swift-footed.
c)
Noun
-I-
Verb Stem
;
as,
—
parti-ceps, sharing;
morti-fer, death-dealing.
Il6
3.
WORD-FORMATION.
Verbs:
—
is
The second member
«)
always a verb.
The
first
may be
—
A
Noun
;
as,
—
;
aedi-fico, build.
b)
An
Adjective
as,
—
ampli-fico, enlarge.
c)
An Adverb
;
as,
—
at. as,
male-dico, rail
d) Another Verb
;
—
make warm.
cale-facio,
e)
A
Preposition
;
as,
—
ab-jungo, detach;
re-f ero, bring back
dis-cerno, distinguish
ez-specto, await.
Note.
— Here belong the so-called Inseparable Prepositions
ambi- (amb-), around;
dis- (dir-, di-), apart, asunder
;
:
por-, forward
red- (re-), back; sed- (ae-), apart from;
ve-, without.
4.
Adverbs
:
—
;
These are of various types
as,
—
antea, before ilioo (in loco), on the spot
imprimis,
especially
obviam,
in the way.
Part V.
SYNTAX.
160.
Syntax treats of the use of words
in sentences.
Chapter
I.
— Sentences.
—
CLASSIFICATION OP SENTENCES.
161.
I.
Sentences
may be
classified as follows:
;
Declarative, which state something as, puer scribit, the boy is writing.
Interrogative, which ask a question
;
1.
as,
quid puer
3.
scribit, wJiat is the boy writing? are in the form of an exclamation
;
Exclamatory, which
as,
—
quot libros
4.
scribit,
how many
books he writes
;
Imperative, which express a command or an admonition
scribe, write !
as,—
FORM OF INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES.
162.
Questions
may be
either
Word-Questions or Sen-
tence-Questions.
I.
Word-Questions.
These are introduced by the various
;
interrogative
qualis,
pronouns and adverbs
?
such as
e^C.
—
quis, qui,
:
quantus, quot, quotiens, quo, qua,
quia veuit, who comes
Thus
—
quam
diu manSbit, how long will he stay f
117
Il8
2.
SYNTAX.
Sentence-Questions.
a)
b)
These are introduced
'
,•
—
By nonne implying the answer 'j/^J nonne videtis, do you not see? By num implying the answer 'no'' ;
as,
as,
—
;
num exspectas, do you expect f (i.e. you donH expect, doyouf)
c)
by
usually stands
the enclitic -ne, appended to the emphatic word (which as,— first), and simply asking for information
videsne, do you see?
A question
introduced by -ne
;
may
receive a special impli-
cation from the context
as,
sensistine, did you not perceive?
d) Sometimes by no special word, particularly in expressions of surprise or indignation ; as,
—
tu in jQdicum conspectum venire audes, do you dare come into the presence of the judges ?
3.
to
Rhetorical Questions.
These are questions merely
doubts).
in
form, being employed to express an emphatic assertion;
as, quia clubitat,
4.
who doubts f {= no one
:
Double Questions.
Double Questions are introduced
by the following particles utrum
-ne
—
...
an;
an
....
If the
an.
(less often
second member
:
Examples
—
is
negative,
annon
necne)
is
used.
utrum honestum est an turpe,] bonestumne est an turpe, \ honeatum est an turpe, J
auntne di annon, are
a.
is it
honorable or base ?
there gods or not ?
An
or
was not
originally confined to double questions, but in-
troduced single questions, having the force of -ne, nonne,
num.
Traces of this use survive in classical Latin; as,—
abstrahit Lenectus. Quibua? An quae juventute geruntur et vJribus ? Old age (it is alleged) withdraws men from active pursuits. From what
eis
A rebus gerendis
Is
it
pursuits ?
not merely
from
those
which are carried on
by the strength of youth ?
SIMPLE AND COMPOUND SENTENCES.
5.
IIQ
Answers.
a.
The answer Yes
B5ne, or
is
expressed by
;
ita,
by
'
repetition of the verb
as,
—
etiam, vero,
'visne locum
place ?
'
mutemus?'
Certainly.''
'sang.'
^
Shall
we change
'
the
'eatisne vos legati?' <sumus.'
b.
'
Are you envoys f
Ves.^
The answer No
negative
' '
;
is
expressed by non, mlnimg,
minime vero; or by repeating the verb with a
as,
—
jam ea
praeteriit ?
'
'
non.'
<
Has
'
it
passed? '
'
No:
estne frater intus ?
'
'
non
est. '
/j your brother withi» f '
'No:
SUBJECT AND PREDICATE.
163.
The two
essential parts of a sentence are the Sub-
lECT and Predicate.
asked,
etc.,
The Subject is that concerning which something is said, etc. The Predicate is that which is said, asked,
concerning the Subject.
SIMPLE AND COMPOUND SENTENCES.
164.
Sentences containing but one Subject and one
Predicate are called Simple Sentences, those containing
legit,
more are called Compound Sentences. Thus puer Ubros the boy reads books, is a Simple Sentence but puer
;
libros Jegit
et epistulas
scribit,
the
boy reads books
and
writes letters, is
members
165.
of a
Compound Sentence. The different Compound Sentence are called Clauses.
a
Coordinate and Subordinate Clauses. Clauses which Coordinate a Clause dependent upon another is called Subordinate. Thus in puer libros legit et epistulas scribit the two clauses are Coordinate but in puer libros legit quos pater scribit, the boy reads the books which his father writn.
stand ^upon an equality are called
;
;
the second clause is Subordinate to the
first.
I20
SYNTAX.
Chapter
The
II.
— Syntax of Nouns.
SUBJECT.
{i.e.
is
166.
Subject of a Finite Verb
any form
of
the Indicative, Subjunctive, or Imperative)
native Case.
1
in the Nomi-
The
a)
Subject
may be
—
man
"writes.
A Noun
puer
or Pronoun; as,
scribit, the boy writes
hio scribit, this
i)
An
Infinitive
;
as,
—
is
decorum
c)
est pro patria mori, to die for one's country
a
noble thing.
A
Clause
;
as,
—
vidisti,
it
opportune accidit quod that you saw.
2.
happened opportunely
A
Personal Pronoun as Subject
separately expressed
;
and
is jiot
as,
—
is
usually implied in the Verb,
scribo,
a.
/ write
videt, he
sees.
But for the purpose of emphasis or contrast the Pronoun
expressed
;
as,
—
is
ego scribo et tu
legis,
/ write, and you
read.
is sometimes omitted when it can be easily supplied 3. from the context, especially the auxiliary sum as,
;
The verb
—
recte
ille {sc. facit),
he does rightly ; consul prof actus
{sc. est), the
consul set out.
PREDICATE NOUNS.
167. ject
A Predicate Noun is one connected with the Subby some form of the verb Sum or a similar verb. A
-^
168.
Case
;
as,
—
1
Predicate
Noun
agrees with
its
Subject
in
For
the Predicate Genitive, see \\ 198, 3; 203, 5.
PREDICATE NOUNS. — APPOSITIVES.
121
Numa
1.
Cicero orator fuit, Cicero was an orator creatus est rex, Numa was elected king.
possible, the Predicate
When
ject in
Gender
also
;
as,
—
Noun
usually agrees with
its
Sub-
philosophia est vitae ra^i^&ti^., philosophy
2.
is
the guide of life.
Besides sum, the verbs most
cate
Noun
are
—
frequently accompanied
by a Predi-
a) fio, evado, exsisto
;
maneo videor
;
;
as,
—
etc. ;
Croesus non semper mansit rex, Croesus did not always
remain king.
6) Passive verbs of making, calling, regarding,
appellor, habeor
;
as,
—
as,
creor,
Homulus rex appellatus
est,
Romulus was
called king;
habitus est deus, he was regarded as a god.
APPOSITIVES.
169.
I.
An
Appositive
is
a
Noun
explaining or definas,
ing another
Noun
denoting the same person or thing;
city
Cicero consul, Cicero, the Consul;
urbs Roma, the
2.
Rome.
An Appositive
agrees with
its
Subject in Case;
as,
opera Ciceronis oratoris, the works of
Cicero, the orator
apud Herodotum, patrem historiae,
father of history.
3.
in the
works of Herodotus,
the
When
;
der also
as,
—
possible, the Appositive agrees with its Subject in
Gen-
assentatio adjutrix vitiorum,^?^^^^^^, the promoter of evils.
4.
A
Locative
may
take in Apposition the Ablative of urbs or
;
oppidum, with or without a preposition
CoiinthT,
Greece.
5.
as,
—
Achaiae urbe, or in Achaiae urbe,
at Cormth, u city of
Partitive Apposition.
A
Noun denoting a whole
;
followed by an Appositive denoting a part
milites, fortissimus
as,
—
is
frequently
quisque, hostibus restiterunt, the
soldiers, all
the bravest of them, resisted the enemy.
122
SYNTAX.
THE CASES. THE NOMINATIVE.
170.
The Nominative
is
confined to
its
use as Subject,
See
Appositive, or Predicate Noun, as already explained.
§§ 166-169.
THE VOCATIVE.
171.
The Vocative
is
the Case of direct address
;
as,
—
tu,
credite mibi, judices, believe me, judges.
1.
By
a species of attraction, the Nominative
is
occasionally used
;
for the Vocative, especially in poetry
and formal prose
as,
audi
populus Albanus, hear ye, Alban people!
2.
Similarly the Appositive of a Vocative may, in poetry, stand
;
in
the Nominative
as,
nate,
mea magna
potentia solus,
O
son, aloni
the source of my great power.
THE ACCUSATIVE.
172. 173.
The Accusative
The
is
the Case of the Direct Object,
Direct Object
:
following relations
—
may
express either of the two
A. The Person or Thing Affected by the action as,— consulem interfecit, he slew the consul; lego librum, / read the book.
;
B.
The Result Produced by
librum scrips!, I wrote a book
the action
(i.e.
;
as,
—
;
produced one)
templum
struit,
he.
constructs a temple.
174. Verbs that admit a Direct Object of either of two types are Transitive Verbs.
a.
these
without
Verbs that regularly take a Direct Object are sometimes used it. They are then oaid to be employed absolutely;
est
is
as,— rumor
son
meum gnatum
loi'e.
amare,
it is
rumored
that my
in
THE ACCUSATIVE.
Accusative of the Person or Thing Affected.
175.
sative
;
123
I.
This
as in
—
is
the most frequent use of the
Accu-
parentes amamus, we love our parents ;
mare
2.
aspioit, he gazes at the sea.
The
a)
following classes of Verbs taking an Accusative of this kind
:
are
worthy of note
—
Many
tion,
Intransitive Verbs,
become Transitive.
when compounded with a Thus
:
—
Preposi-
i)
Compounds
of ciroum, praeter, trans
to
;
as,
—
hostes circumstare,
surround the enemy ; urbem praeterire, to pass by the city muros transceudere, to climb over the walls.
2) Less frequently,
compounds of ad, per,
in,
sub
;
as,
—
adire urbem, to visit the city peragrare Italiam, to travel through Italy
inire
magistratum,
to take office
subire periculum,
b)
to
undergo danger.
Many Verbs
expressing emotions, regularly Intransitive, have
;
also a Transitive use
as,
—
queror fatum, I lament my fate; doleo ejus mortem, I grieve at his death rideo tuam stultitiam, I laugh at your folly.
•
So
also lugeo,
maereo, mourn
;
gemo, bemoan ; horreo,
unbecom-
shudder, and others.
c)
The impersonals deoet,
ing; juvat,
it
it
becomes; dedecet,
it is
pleases, take the Accusative of the Person
Affected; as,
mS
are
decet haec dicere,
it
becomes
me
to
say
this.
d) In poetry
many
employed as Middles (§ 256,
;
Passive Verbs, in imitation of Greek usage, i 2), and take the Accuas,
sative as Object
—
;
galeam induitur, he puis on his helmet cinctus tempora hedera, having bound
ivy
his temples with
nodo sinus coUecta, having gathered her dress
in a knot.
124
SYNTAX.
Accusative of the Result Produced.
176.
I.
The ordinary type
such expressions as
—
of this Accusative
is
seen
in
librum scribS, / write a book ; domum. aedificS, / build a house.
2.
Many Verbs
a)
usually Intransitive take a Neuter Pronoun,
Adjective, as
an Accusative of Result.
;
Thus
:
—
oi'
A Neuter Pronoun
as,
—
haec gemebat, he jiiade these moans idem gloriari, to make the same boast eadem peccat, he makes the same mistakes.
b)
A Neuter Adjective, particularly Adjectives of number multum, multa, pauca, etc. ; also nihil as, amount,
—
—
oi
;
—
multa egeo, / have many needs pauca studet, he has few interests j
multum
Note.
valet, he has great strength
;
nihil peccat, he
makes no mistake.
this construction
;
— In poetry other Adjectives are freely used in
as,
—
mlnltantem vana, making vain threats acerba tuens,^^z»^ a fierce look; duloe loquentem, sweetly talking.
3.
The
adverbial use of several Neuter Pronouns and Adjectives
this Accusative
;
grows out of
as,
—
multum sunt
a.
in venatione, they are
much engaged in
;
hunting.
generally;
etc.
So
also
plurimum, very greatly
plerumque,
aliquid, somewhat; quid,
4.
why?
nihil, not at all;
Sometimes an Intransitive Verb takes an Accusative of Result is of kindred etymology with the Verb. This is called a Cognate Accusative, and is usually modified by an Adjective as,
vrhich
;
sempiternam servitutem serviat, let him serve an everlastinir slavery; vTtam duram vixi, I have lived a hard life.
a.
Sometimes the Cognate Accusative is not of kindred mology, but merely of kindred meaning as,
;
—
ety-
stadium
currit, he runs a race
Olympia
vincit, he wins
an Olympic
victory.
THE ACCUSATIVE.
5.
1
25
The Accusative
of Result occurs also after Verbs of
/aj/iV/g-
and
smelling; as,
piscis
mare
sapit, the fish tastes of the sea
orationes autlquitatem redolent, the speeches smack of the past.
Tv70 Accusatives
177.
I.
— Direct Object and Predicate Accusative.
of
Many Verbs
like,
Making, Choosing, Calling,
Showing, and the
tive; as,
take two Accusatives, one of the
Person or Thing Affected, the other a Predicate Accusa-
me heredem
Here
fecit, he
made me
heir.
mS
So
also
—
is
Direct Object,
heredem
tfiey
Predicate Accusative.
eum judicem
urbem
se
2.
as,
cepere,
took
him as judge
man.
Romam vocavit, he called the city Rome
praestitit, he showed himself a
virum
The
Predicate Accusative
may be an
Adjective as well as a
Noun
homines caecos reddit cupiditas, covetousness renders men blind; Apollo Socratem sapientissimum judicavit, Apollo adjudged Socrates the wisest ?nan.
a.
Some
Verbs, as
reddo,
usually admit only an Adjective as the Predicate
Accusative.
3.
In the Passive the Direct Object becomes the Subject, and the
Predicate Accusative
becomes Predicate Nominative
(§ 168. 2.
iJ)
;
as,
urbs
a.
Roma
vocata
it.
est, the city
was
called
;
Rome.
efflcio, for
Not
all
Verbs admit the Passive construction
reddo and
example, never take
Two
178.
I.
Accusatives
— Person
and Thing.
Accusatives,
Some Verbs
take two
one of
the Person Affected, the other of the Result Produced.
Thus
:
a) Verbs of requesting and demanding;
as,
—
speeches of
me
otium divos rogat, he asks the gods for rest; duas orationes postulSs, you demand two
me.
126
SYNTAX.
So also oro, posed, reposco, ezposoo, flagito, though some of these prefer the Ablative with ab to the Accusative
of the Person
;
as,
—
opem a
b)
te posco,
/ demand aid ofyou.
its
Verbs oi teaching (doceo and
te litteras doceo,
compounds)
letters.
;
as,
I teach you your
as,
c)
Verbs oi inquiring ;
te
haec rogo, I ask you this; te sententiam rogo, I ask you your
a) Several Special Verbs
;
opinion.
viz.
moneo, admoneo, commoneo,
cogo, accuso, arguo, and a few others. These admit only a Neuter Pronoun or Adjective as Accusative of the Thing
;
as,
te moneo, I give you this advice; id accusas, j/o?< bring this accusation against me; id cogit nos natura, nature compels us {to) this.
hoc
me
e)
OaeVtrh of concealing, celo as, non te celavi sermonem, / have sation from you.
;
not concealed the conver-
2.
In the Passive construction the Accusative of the Person becomes
the Subject, and the Accusative of the
Thing
is
retained
;
as,
—
was taught all accomplishments; rogatus sum sententiam, I was asked my opnnion multa admonemur, we are given many admonitions.
».
omnes
artes edoctus est, he
Only a few Verbs admit the Passive construction.
Tviro
Accusatives
-w^ith
Compounds.
of trans
179.
I.
Transitive
compounds
;
may
take two
Accusatives,
one dependent upon the Verb, the other
as,
upon the Preposition
—
milites flumen transportat, he leads his soldiers across the
2.
river.
With other compounds
this construction is rare.
is
3.
In the Passive the Accusative dependent upon the preposition
retained; as,
milites flumen traducSbantur, the soldiers were led across the river
THE ACCUSATIVE.
Synecdochical (or G-reek) Accusative.
180.
to
I
.
1
27
The Synecdochical
(or Greek) Accusative denotes the part
;
which an action or quality refers
as,
—
tremit artus,
literally,
he trembles as
to his limbs, i.e. his
limbs tremble
n^da
gfentl,
lit.
bare as
lit.
to the knee, i.e.
with knee bare
i.e.
manas revlnctus,
2.
tied as to the hands,
with hands tied.
Note that
a)
b)
c)
this construction
Is
borrowed from the Greek.
Is chieiiy confined to poetry.
Usually refers to a part of the body.
Is
d)
used with Adjectives as well as Verbs.
Accusative of Time and Space.
Duration of Time and Extent of Space are denoted by the Accusative; as,
181.
I.
quadraginta annos vixit, he lived forty years i hie locus passus sescentos aberat, this place was six hundred paces
away qnmquaginta pedes altae, trees fifty feet high ; abhiuc septem annos, seven years ago.
arbores
2.
Emphasis
is
sometimes added by using the Preposition per
;
as,
per biennium laboravi,
I toiled throughout two years.
I is
/j
Accusative of Iiimit of Motion.
182.
a)
I.
The Accusative
of Limit of Motion
used
—
as,'
With names of Towns, Small Islands, and Peninsulas ;
Romam veni, / carne to Rome
Athenas
proficiscitur, he sets out for Athens
Delum
B)
perveni,
I arrived at Delos.
as,
With domuni, domos, rus;
—
building),
it
domum
rus 5b6,
revertitur, he returns home;
1 shall go
to the country.
Note
osition
;
When —— domus
as,
means house
to
(i.e.
takes a prepe
in
domum
veterem remigrare,
move back
to
an old house.
'
128
2.
SYNTAX.
Other designations of place than those above mentioned
;
a Preposition to denote Limit of iVIotion
as,
—
require
ad Italiam
a.
venit, he came to Italy.
also
The
Preposition
or
is
customary with the Accusatives
they stand in apposition with the
urbem
oppidum when
;
name of a town
as,
—
Thalam, in oppidum magnum, to Thala, a large town Genavam ad oppidum, to the town Geneva.
b.
The name
of a town denoting limit of motion may be combined with the name of a country or other word dependent upon a preposition as,
;
—
Thurios in Italiam perveotus, carried
cum Aoen ad ezercitum
the
to Thurii in Italy; venisset, when he had come to
army
at Ace.
to the vicinity of, in the vicinity of, ad is used 3. as,— ad Tarentum veni, / came to the vicinity of Tarentum ad Cannas pugna facta est, a battle was fought near Cannae.
4. In poetry the Accusative of any noun denoting a place may be used without a preposition to express the limit of motion as,
;
To
denote toward,
—
Italiam venit, he came
5.
to Italy.
to represent the original function of the Traces of this primitive force are recognizable in the phrase infitias Ire, to deny (lit. to go to a denial)., and a few other
The goal notion seems
Accusative Case.
similar expressions.
Accusative in Exclamations.
183.
tive, is
The Accusative, generally modified by an Adjec' used in Exclamations as,
;
—
me miserum, ah, wretched me O fallacem spem, oh, deceptive hope!
Accusative as Subject of the
184. tive
;
Infinitive.
The
as,
—
Subject of the Infinitive
is
put in the Accusa-
video hoiuinem abjte, I see that
the
man
is going
away.
THE ACCUSATIVE. —THE DATIVE.
Other Uses of the Accusative.
185.
1.
I2g
Here belong
—
originally Appositives
;
Some Accusatives which were
id genus, of that kind;
(originally
as,
viz.
—
homines id genus, men of that kind homines, id genus hominum, men, that kind
of men)
;
muliebre secus, of the male sex,of the female sexi vioem, tuam vioem, etc., for my part, etc. bonam partem, magnam partem, in large part; maximam partem, for the most part.
virile secus,
meam
2.
Some
phrases of doubtful origin
;
as,
—
si,
id temporis, at that time id aetatis, at that time
quod
but if;
cetera, in other respects.
THE DATIVE.
186. The Dative case, in general, expresses relations which are designated in English by the prepositions to
and
'
for.
Dative of Indirect Object.
187.
The commonest use
of the Dative
is to
denote the
person to
I.
whom something
is
given, said, or done.
Thus
:
—
With
;
sative
as,
—
transitive verbs in connection with the
Accu-
hanc peciiuiam mibi dat, he gives me haec nobis dixit, he said this to us.
a.
this
money
Some verbs which take this construction (particularly douo and circumdo) admit also the Accusative of the person along with the Ablative of the thing. Thus
:
—
Either Themistocli munera donavit, he presented
Themisiocles, or
gifts to
Themistoclem muneribus donavit, he presented Themistocles.witk gifts
urbi muros circumdat, he builds walls around the city, ol urbem muris circumdat, ne surrounds the city with wall:
I'^O
SYiMAA.
With many
a.
II.
intransitive verbs; as,
—
believe,
nuUi labor!
cedit, he yields to no lubor.
Here belong many verbs signifying favor^ help, injure, please, displease, trust, distrust, command, obey, serve, resist,
indulge, spare, pardon, envy,
persuade, and the like
;
as,
—
threaten, be angry,
Caesar popularibus favet, Caesar favors (i.e. is favorable to) the popular party amicis c5nf ido, / trust (to) my friends Orgetorix Helvetiis persuasit, Orgetorix persuaded (made it acceptable to) the Helvetians bonis nocet qui mails parcit, he injures (does harm to)
the good,
who
in
spares the bad.
that these verbs
Note. —
It is to
be borne
mind
do not take
the Dative by
because they are intransiSome verbs of the same apparent English tive, and adapted to an indirect object. equivalence are transitive and govern the Accusative; as, juvo, laedo, delecto.
virtue of their apparent English equivalence, but simply
Thus:
audentes deus juvat, God
b.
helps the bold;
neminem
laesit, he
injured no one.
Verbs of this
as,
class are
used in the passive only impersonally
tibi parcitur,
you are spared; mihi persuadetur, I am being persuaded
ei invidetur, he is envied.
of the foregoing verbs admit also a Direct Object in connection
;
c.
Some
mihi
with the Dative
as,
—
mortem
to
mlnitatur, he
threatens
me
with death (threatens
death
me)
III.
With many verbs compounded with the
preposi-
fions
tfub,
:
ad, ante, oircum, com,^ in, inter, ob, post, prae, pro,
super.
classes,
These verbs fall into two main I. Many simple verbs which cannot
object
tion
;
—
preposi-
take a Dative of the indirect
become capable of doing so wheii compounded with a
as,
—
afflictis succurrit, he helps the afflicted;
ezercitui praefuit, he was in
command of
the
army
govs
intersum
consiliis,
/ share
in the deliberations.
^ Many such verbs were originally intransitive in English also, and once " This was the original form of the preposition cum. erned the Dative.
THE DATIVE.
2.
131
direct object
Many
transitive verbs
which take only a
become
indirect
capable,
when compounded, of taking a
dative
also
as
object; as,
pecuniae pudorem anteponit, he puts honor before money i micere spem amicTs, to inspire hope in one''s friends muuitiom Labienum praefScit, he put Labienus in charge of the
fortifications.
Dative of Reference.
188.
I.
The Dative
of Reference denotes the person to
whom a
is
statement refers, of
of interest ; as,
the eyes to me")
—
whom
it is true,
or to
whom
it
mihi ante oculos versaris, you hover before
;
my
eyes
(lit.
hover before
illi
severitas
amorem non
(lit.
diminish love
to him. severity
dSminuit, in his case severity did not did not diminish)
;
intercludere inimicTs commeatuin, to cut off the supplies of the enemy.
a.
Note the phrase allcui interdicere
aqua
et ignl,
to interdict
one
from fire and water.
Note.
— The Dative
of Reference, unlike the Dative of Indirect Object, does
It is often
not modify the verb, but rather the sentence as a whole.
used where,
first
according to the English idiom,
third of the
we should
expect a Genitive; so in the
and
above examples.
2.
Special varieties of the Dative of Reference are
ct)
—
Dative of
participle
;
tlie
as,
—
Local Standpoint.
This
is
regularly a
oppidum primum Thessaliae venientibua ab Epiro, the first town of Thessaly as you come from Epirus (lit. to those coming from Epirus").
i)
Ethical Dative.
structions of the personal
This name is given to those Dative conpronouns in which the connection
is
of the Dative with the rest of the sentence
slightest sort
;
of the very
as,
—
tu mihi istius audaciam defendis?
that man's audacity f
tell
me, do you defend
quid mihi Celsus agit ? what
is
my
Celsus doing ?
132
c)
SYJNTAA.
Dative of Person Judging
eiit ille
(i.e.
;
as,
—
be
mihi semper deus, he will always
in
a god to me
that
he
my
opinion)
;
quae ista servitus tarn claro bomiui, how can
slavery to so illustrious a
man
(i.e.
to his
mind)
d) Dative
especially
of Separation.
Some
;
verbs
of taking away,
of
compounds of ab, de, ex, ad, govern a Dative
as,
the person, less often of the thing
—
honorem detraxerunt homim, from the man
away from
silicT
they took
away
the honor
Caesar regi tetrarchiam eripuit, Caesar took
the king;
}ie
the tetrarchy
scintillam escudit,
struck
a spark from
the
flint.
Dative of Agency.
189.
1
The Dative
is
used to denote agency
;
—
Regularly with the Gerundive
as,
—
is
haec nobis agenda aunt, these things must be done by us; °mihi eundum est, I must go (lit. it must be gone by me).
a.
To
avoid ambiguity, Gerundive; as,
a
with
tlie
Ablative
sometimes used with
•
the
hostlbus
2.
a,
nobis
parcendum
est, the enemy must Be spared by us.
Much
less frequently with the
compound
;
voice and the perfect passive participle
as,
—
tenses of the passive
disputatio quae mihi nuper habita est, the discussion which was
recently conducted by me.
3.
Rarely with the uncompounded tenses of the passive
;
as,
—
honesta bonis
virls quaerun,tur, noble ends are sought by good nun.
Dative of Possession.
190.
The Dative
of Possession occurs with the verb
:
in
such expressions as
—
ease
mihi est liber, I have a book; mihi nomen est MSrous, I have the name Marcus.
I.
But with
;
Ihe Dative
as,
nomen est the name is more commonly mihi Marco nomen est.
attracted
into
THE DATIVE.
Dative of Purpose or Tendency.
133
The Dative of Purpose or Tendency designates end toward which an action is directed or the direction in which it tends. It is used
191.
the
—
1.
Unaccorapanied by another Dative
;
as,
caatris
locum
dSligere, to choose a place for a
camp guard
(lit.
legiones praesidio relinquere, to leave the legions as a
for a guard) receptuT canere, to sound the sigfialfor a
\
retreat.
2.
Much more
:
person
—
frequently in connection with another Dative of the
a) Especially with
some form of esse
;
as,
—
to
fortuuae tuae mihi curae sunt, your fortunes are a care me (lit. for a cere) quibus supt odio, to whom they are an object of hatred; cui bono ? to whom is it of advantage?
;
b)
With other verbs
hos
tibi
;
as,
—
sent these to
muneri misit, he has
you for a
the
present
Pausaoias Atticis venit auzilio, Pausanias came to aid of the Athenians (lit. to the Athenians for aid).
3.
In connection with the Gerundive
;
as,
—
decemviii legibus scribundis, decemvirs for codifying the laws; me gerendo bello ducem oreavere, me they have made leader for carrying on the war.
Note.
— This construction with the gerundive
The use
is
not
common
till
Livy.
Dative 'with Adjectives.
192.
of the Dative with Adjectives corresponds
very closely to
I.
its
use with verbs.
Thus
:
—
Corresponding to the Dative of Indirect Object
:
it
occurs with
adjectives signifying
friendly, unfriendly, similar, dissimilar, equal^
as,
near, related to, etc.
;
—
mihi inimicua, hostile to me sunt prozimi GermSnTs,. they are next to the Germans noziae poena par esto, let the penalty be equal to the damage.
134
a.
SYNTAX.
For
§ 14^,
propior and
3-
proximus
with
the Accusative,
see
3.
Corresponding to the Dative of Purpose, the Dative occurs
:
with
adjectives signifying
suitable, adapted, fit
^
as,
oastris idoneus locus, a place fit for a
camp
a
sacrifice.
apta dies sacrificio, a day
Note.
suitable for
— Adjectives of
this last class often take the
Accusative with ad.
Bative of Direction.
193.
direction
it
In the poets the Dative
of motion
;
as,
—
is
occasionally used to denote the
clamor caelo,
t^e shout goes
heavenward;
cineres rivo fluenti jace, cast the ashes toward a flowing stream.
I
.
By an
extension of
tliis
construction the poets sometimes use the
;
Dative to denote the limit of motion
as,
—
dum Latio
deos inferret,
till he.
sAould bring his gods to Latium.
THE GENITIVE.
194.
The
Genitive
is
used with Nouns, Adjectives, and
Verbs.
GENITIVE WITH NOUNS.
195.
the
With Nouns the Genitive is ike case which defines meaning of the limited noun more closely. This relation is
:
generally indicated in English by the preposition of. There are the following varieties of the Genitive with Nouns
—
Genitive of Origin, Genitive of Material, Genitive of Possession, Subjective Genitive,
196.
Objective Genitive, Genitive of the Whole, Apposltlonal Genitive, Genitive of Quality.
Genitive of Origin
;
as,
—
son of Marcus,
Marci
197.
filius, the
;
Genitive of Material
as,
—
talentum auri, a talent of gold; acervus frumenti, a pile ofgrain.
THE DATIVE.— THE GENITIVE.
198.
135
Genitive of Possession or Ownership
;
as,
—
The Geni-
domus
1.
Ciceronis, Cicero's house.
Here belongs the Genitive with causa and gratia.
;
tive
always precedes
as,
—
hominum causa, /or the sake of nun meorum amicorum gratia, yor the sake of my friends.
2.
The Possessive Genitive
and
fieri
;
with esse
as,
—
is
often used predicatively, especially
domus
est regis, the house
is
the king's
it is
stulti est in errore
manere,
(the part)
of a fool
to
remain in
error ;
de bello judicium imperatoris
For the difference
in force
a.
est,
uon militum,
the decision con-
cerning war belongs to the general, not to the soldiers.
a.
between the Possessive Genitive and the Dative
of
Possession, see \ 359,
199.
Subjective Genitive.
This denotes the person who makes
as,
or produces something or
who has a feeling;
—
dicta PlatSnis, the utterances of Plato timores liberorum, the fears of the children.
200.
Objective Genitive.
or feeling; as,
—
This denotes the
object
of an action
metus deorum,
the fear of the gods;
amor
I.
libertatis, love of liberty
consuetudo bonorum hominum,
This relation
is
intercourse with
good men.
;
often expressed by
love
means of prepositions
a.s,
amor erga parentis,
201.
toward one's parents^
This designates the whole oi
Genitive of the Whole.
is
which a part
!.
taken.
It is
used
—
Superlatives,
With Nouns, Pronouns, Comparatives,
;
and Ordioai
Numerals
as,
—
magna pars hominum, a great part of mankind;
duo milia peditum, two thousandfoot-soldiers quis mortalium, who of mortals f major fratrum, the elder of the brothers;
gens
maxima Germanorum,
the first
the largest tribe of the
Germans;
primus omnium,
of all.
136
a.
SYNTAX.
Yet instead of the Genitive of the Whole we often find ex or dS the Ablative, regularly so with Cardinal numbers and quidam as,
;
with
—
fldelissimus de servis, the most trusty of the quidam ex amicis, certain of his friends ;
slaves ;
unus ex
i.
milltibus, one of the
soldiers.
In English we often use of where there is no relation of whole to part In such cases the Latin is more exact, and does not use the Genitive;
as,
estis, how many ofyou are there f treoenti conjuravimus, three hundred of us have conspired we, three hundred in number).
quot vos
(j. e.
2.
The
Genitive of the
Whole
is
used also with the Nominative
or
Accusative Singular Neuter of Pronouns, or of Adjectives used substantively; also with the Adverbs parum, satis, and partim wlien
used substantively
;
as,
—
quid consilT, what purpose ? tantum cibi, so much food; plus auctoritatis, more authority ;
minus lab oris,
tess
labor;
satis pecuniae, enough money
parum
a.
industriae, too
little
industry.
An
Adjective of the second declension used substantively
as,
may
be em-
ployed as a Genitive of the Whole;
t.
nihil boni, nothing good.
thej
But Adjectives of the third declension agree directly with the noun limit as, nihil dulclus, nothing sweeter.
;
3.
Occasionally
;
we
as,
Adverbs of place
—
find the Genitive of the
Whole dependent
upon
ubi terrarum ? ubi gentium ? where in the world?
u..
By an
extension of this usage the Genitive sometimes occurs in dependence upon pridle and postridle, but only in the phrases pridle ejus diei, on the day before that ; postridle ejus dlei, on the day
after that.
202.
force of
Appositional Genitive.
an appositive
;
as,
—
The
Genitive sometimes has
the
nomen
regis, the
name of king;
poena mortis,
203.
tive is
the penalty of death; ars scribendi, the art of writing.
Genitive of Quality.
The
used to denote quality. varieties. Thus it is used
—
Genitive modified by an AdjecThis construction presents several
THE GENITIVE.
1.
137
characteristic of a person
To denote some
;
or thing
as,
—
internal or
permanent
vir
magnae virtutis, a man of great virtue rationes ejus modi, considerations of that sort.
this construction, chiefly
a.
Only a limited number of Adjectives occur in
magnus, mazlmus, summus, tantus,
2.
along with ejus.
;
To denote measure {breadth, length, etc.) as, — fossa quindecim pedum, a trench fifteen feet wide ezsilium decem annorum, an exile of ten years.
(or deep)
;
3.
Equivalent to the Genitive of Quality (though probably of different
origin) are the Genitives tanti,
minimi, plurimi, mazimi.
indefinite
value ;
as,
—
quanti, parvi, magni, minoris, plutis, These are used predicatiVely to denote
n&lla studia tanti sunt, no studies are of so much value magni opera ejus ezistimata est, his assistance was highly esteemed.
4. By an extension of the notion of value, quanti, tanti, pluris, and minoris are also used with verbs of buying and selling, to denote
indefinite price
;
as,
—
quanti aedes emisti, at how high a price did you purchase the house ?
5.
Any
of the above varieties of the Genitive of Quality
;
used predicatively
as,
—
may be
tantae molis erat
Romanam
condere gentem, of
race.
so great difficulty
was
it
to found the
Roman
GENITIVE WITH ADJECTIVES.
204.
The
Genitive
is
used with many. Adjectives
limit the extent
I.
of their application.
Thus
:
—
;
to
With
adjectives signifying desire, knowledge, familiarity,
as,
^y, participation, power, fullness, and their opposites
—
mem-
studiosus discendi, desirous of learnings
peritus belli, skilled in
war
;
insuetus laboris, unused to toil immemor mandati tui, unmindful ofyour commission plena periculorum est vita, life is full of dangers,
a.
Some
participles
used adjectively also take the Genitive
;
as,
—
diligens verltatis,/)«<i of truth; amans patriae, devoted to one's country.
138
2.
SYNTAX.
Sometimes with proprius and
communis
axtians.,
;
as,
—
of a man.
is
vlri
propria est fortitude, bravery
est
is characteristic
memoria
a.
communis omnium
memory
common
to all
professions.
proprius and
communis are
also construed with the Dative.
With similis the Genitive is the commoner Cicero, when the reference is to living objects as,
3.
;
—
construction
in
niius patris sim.iUimus est, the son is exactly mei similis, like me; vestri similis, like you.
like his father;
When
the reference
is
to things, both Genitive
and Dative occur
;
as,
—
mors sompo
is
(or
somnT) similis
est, death is like sleep.
4. In the poets and later prose writers the use of the Genitive with Adjectives extended far beyond earlier limits; as, atrox zsc&aa., fierce of temper ; incer-
tus cousili,
-undecided in purpose.
GENITIVE WITH VERBS.
205.
Verbs
206.
:
—
I.
The
Genitive
is
used with the following classes
of
Memini, Remlniscor, Oblivisoor.
When
;
referring to Persons
as,
—
reflexive
a.
memini
pronouns
always takes the Genitive of personal or
—
mei memineris, remember me !
nostrl meminit, he remembers
us.
With
other words denoting persons
;
rarely the Genitive
as,
—
meminT
takes tne Accusative,
SuUam memini, / recall Sulla vivSrum memini, / remember the
b.
living.
;
obliviscor regularly takes the Genitive
as,
Epicuri non licet oblivisci,
2.
-we
mustnH forget
Epicurus.
obliviswithout
When
referring to Things, memini, reminiscor,
;
cor take sometimes the Genitive, sometimes the Accusative, difference of meaning as,
—
animus praeteritorum meminit, the mind rem,embers the past; meministine nomina, do you remember the names? reminiscere veteris incommodi, remember the former disaster'. reminiscens acerbitatem, retnemiering the bitterness.
»
THE GENITIVE.
a.
139
But neuter pronouns, and adjectives used substantively, regularly stand
in the Accusative
;
as,
—
meminl, / remember this multa rerainiscor, / remember many
taaec
3. The phrase mihi (tlbi, etc.) in memini, takes the Genitive as,
;
things,
—
mentem
venit, following the analogy of
mibi patriae veniebat In mentem, / remembered my
country,
Admoneo, Commoneo, Commonefacio,
207.
These verbs,
in addition to
an Accusative of the
;
person, occasionally take a Genitive of the thing
te veteris
as,
—
amicitiae commonefacio, / remind you of our old
friendship.
It,
But more frequently
with the Ablative
;
(in
as,
—
Cicero almost invariably) these verbs take
de
me admones de
i.
sorore, you remind me of your
sister,
A
te
neuter pronoun or adjective used substantively regularly stands in
the Accusative (178. i.d); as,
hoc admoneo, I give you
this
warning.
Verbs
208.
I.
of Judicial Action.
Verbs of Accusing, Convicting, Acquitting take
the Genitive of the charge ; as,
—
me furti
Verrem
accusat, he accuses
me of theft
avaritiae coarguit, he convicts Verres of avarice ; impietatis ab^olutus est, he was acquitted of blasphemy.
2.
Verbs of Condemning take
a.
— —
condemned
\
The Genitive of the charge ; as, peciiniae publicae condemnatus,
(on
the
charge) of embezzlement (lit. public money) capitis damnatus, condemned on a capital charge
(lit.
on
a charge involving his head),
b.
The
Ablative of the penalty
;
as,
—
{to
capite
damnatus
est, he
mille
nummis damnatus
sesterces
was condemned to death est, he was condemned
pay)
a thousand Means).
(lit.
by a thousand sest'rces, Abl. of
I40
:
SYNTAX.
3. Note the phrases voti damnatus, voti reus, having attained score of one's vow)
;
—
one's
prayer
(lit.
condemned on
tit
de
vi,
{accused, convicted, etc^ of assault
{accused, convicted, etc)
inter sicarios,
of murder.
Genitive with Impersonal Verbs.
209.
I.
The Impersonals
pudet, paenitet, mlseret, taedet,
piget take the Accusative of the person affected, along with
the Genitive of the person or thing toward whom the feeling is directed ; as,
—
pudet
paenitet
me tui, / am ashamed ofyou (lit. it shames me ofyoii) me hujus facti, I repent of this act;
is
;
eum
a.
taedet vitae, he
weary of life;
pauperum
te miseret, you pity the poor.
tlie
Instead of
Genitive of the thing
life
often find
Pronoun used as subject of the verb.
Thus
:
—
an
Infinitive or Neuter
me paenitet hoc fecisse, / repent of having done this me hoc pudet, / am ashamed of this.
2.
;
Misereor and miseresco
also govern
the Genitive;
allies.
as,—
miseremini sociorum, pity
Interest, RStert.
210.
the
With
interest,
;
consideration
viz.
—
it
concerns, three
points enter
into
a) the person concerned ;
b) the thing about
c)
which he
is
concerned
the extent of his concern.
I.
211.
The person concerned
patris interest,
it
is
regularly denoted by
the Genitive; as,
concerns the father.
a.
But instead of the Genitive of the personal pronouns, me!,
tui,
nostri, vestri, the Latin uses the Ablative Singulai
viz.
.-
Feminine of the Possessive,
mea, tua,
etc. ; as,
—
mea
interest,
it
concerns me.
THE GENITIVE.
2.
I4I
is
The
a)
denoted
—
thing about which a person
concerned
is
by a Neuter Pronoun as subject
;
as,
—
hoc
V)
rei publicae interest, this concerns the state.
Infinitive
;
by an
as,
—
it
omniuin interest valere,
c)
concerns all to keep welli
by an Indirect Question
;
as,
—
/ am
concerned as
to
mea
interest
quando
venias,
when
you are coming.
3.
The
a)
degree vf concern
the Genitive
(cf. §
is
denoted
:
—
etc. ; as,
by
203, 3)
it
magni, parvi,
—
mea magnl
6)
interest,
concerns
me greatly.
etc. ;
by the Adverbs, magnopere, magis, maxime,
as,
—
civium minime interest,
c)
it
concerns the citizens very
etc.
;
little.
by the Neuters, multum, plus, minus,
as,
—
it
multum vestra interest,-zif concerns you
4.
much.
rarely
Refert follows interest in
its
construction, except that
:
takes the Genitive of the person.
Thus
it
—
mea
refert,
concerns
me
but rarely illius refert, it concerns
him.
Genitive with Other Verbs.
212.
I.
Verbs of Plenty and Want sometimes govern
;
the Genitive
as,
—
pecuniae indiges, you need money.
a.
These verbs more commonly take the Ablative (§ 214, i) indigeo is the only verb which has a preference for the
;
Genitive.
2.
the Genitive, almost always so in Sallust
Potior, though usually followed by the Ablative, sometimes takes and regularly in the phrase
;
potlri rerum, to get control of affairs.
3.
In poetry some verbs take the Genitive in imitation of the Greek
;
as,
—
desine querellSrum, cease yow complaints ; operum eoVJiH, freed from their t^shs.
142
SYNTAX.
THE ABLATIVE.
213.
The Latin Ablative
distinct
unites in itself three cases which
in
were originally
both
form and
in
meaning
;
viz. -9,
The Ablative or from-case. The Instrumental or with- case. The Locative or where-case.
The
uses.
uses of the Latin Ablative accordingly
uses, Instrumental' uses,
fall
into
Genuine Ablative
and
Locative
GENUINE ABLATIVE USES.
Ablative of Separation.
214.
The Ablative of Separation
following words
:
is
construed sometimesi
with, sometimes without, a preposition.
I.
The
a)
preposition
—
regularly
take
the
Ablative without
a
The Verbs oifreeing: libero, solvo, levo The Verbs of depriving: privo, epoliS, ezuo, fraudo, nudo c) The Verbs of lacking: egeo, careo, vaco d) The corresponding Adjectives, liber, inanis, vacuus, nudus,
b)
;
and some others of similar meaning.
Thus
:
—
the enetry of
curls libeiSAMS, freed from cares;
Caesar hostes armis ezuit, Caesar stripped their arms caret sensu commiini, he lacks common sense
bonorum vita vacua
from
Note
larly
i.
auzilio eget, he needs help est metu, the
fear.
life
of the good
is fret
— Yet Adjectives
§,
and libero may take the preposition ab,— regit
;
so with the Ablative of persons
as,
—
urbem
NOTli
2.
tyranno liberarunt,
they freed the city from the tyrant,
— Indigeo usually takes the >jenitive.
See
§
212,
i,
a.
THE ABLATIVE.
2.
I43
withdraw, some
Of Verbs signifying
Examples:
to keep
from,
to rejnove, to
take the preposition, otiiers omit
constructions.
—
it.
The same Verb
often admits both
abstl&ere cibo, to abstain from food
hostes finibus prohibueruut, they kept the enemy from their borders^ praedones ab insula prohibuit, he kept the pirates from the island.
3.
Other Verbs of separation usually take the Ablative with a Prep-
osition, particularly
compounds of dis- and sg-
;
as,
—
dissentio a te, / dissent from you ; secernantur a nobis, let them be separated from us.
4.
The
Preposition
is freely
omitted in poetry.
Ablative of Source,
215.
iiatuB
The Ablative
of Source
is
used with the participles
and ortus
(in poetry also with editus, satus,
others), to designate parentage or station ; as,
—
and some
Jove natus, son ofJupiter
summo
1.
looo natus, high-born
(lit.
born from a very high place')
\
nobili genere ortus, born of a noble family.
Pronouns regularly (nouns rarely) take ex;
as,
ex
2.
me
as,
natus, sprungfrom me.
To
denote remoter descent, ortus ab, or oriiindus (with ot
is
without ab),
used
;
—
ab Ulixe oriundus, descended from
Ablative of Agent.
216.
Ulysses.
The Ablative accompanied by
a (ab)
is
passive verbs to denote the personal agent
; as,
—
used with
a Caesare accusatus est, he was arraigned by Caesar.
I.
Collective
nouns referring
to persons,
and abstract nouns when
personified,
may be
construed as the personal agent.
Thus
:
—
hostes a f ortuna deserebantur, the enemy were deserted by Fortune
by a multitude of the enemy.
a.
,-
a multitudine hostium montes tenebantur, the mountains were held
Names
of animals sometimes admit the
same
construction.
Thus:
—
a canibus lauiatus
est, he was torn
to pieces by dogs.
144
SYNTAX.
Ablative of Comparison.
217.
I.
The Ablative
in the sense of than ; as,
—
is
often used with Comparativd|
melle dulcior, sweeter than honey; patria mihi vita carior est, my country
2.
is
dearer to me than
life,
This construction, as a
as,
rule,
occurs only as a substitute for quam
(than) with the Nominative or Accusative.
be used
;
—
In other cases
quam
must
tui studiosior
sum quam
illo
illius,
I am fonder ofyou than of him.
Studiosior
would have meant, / am fonder ofyou than heis.
Plus, minus, amplius, longius are often employed as the
alents of pliis
quam, minus quam,
etc.
Thus
:
—
equiv-
amplius viginti urbes inoendun'Lur,
fired;
7nore than twenty
cities
an
minus quinque milia processit, he advanced less than five
3.
miles.
Note the use of oplnioue with Comparatives
;
as,
—
(lit.
opinione celerius venit, he comes more
guickly than expected
than
opiniott).
INSTRUMENTAL USES OF THE ABLATIVE.
Ablative of Means.
218.
The
as,
ment ;
—
Ablative
is
used to denote means or
est,
instnir
Alexander sagitta vulneratus
arrow.
Alexander was wounded
by an
There are the following special
I.
varieties of this Ablative
:
—
take
Utor, fruor, fungor, potior, vesoor, and their compounds
;
the Ablative
as,
—
divitiis utitur, he uses his afealth
(lit.
he benefits himself by Ms
wealth)
;
vita fruitur, he enjoys life (lit. he enjoys himself by life) munere fungor, I perform my duty (lit. I busy myself with duty);
;
carne vescuntur, they eat flesh (lit. feed themselves by means of) castris potitus est, he got possession of the camp (lit. made himself powerful by the camp)
|
u.
Potior sometimes governs
the Genitive.
Sec
§
212, ^.
THE ABLATIVE.
2.
I45
With opus est
(rarely
usus
est), there is need; as,
—
duce nobis opus
a.
est,
we need a leader.
A
Neuter Pronoun or Adjective often stands as subject with
as predicate.
opus
Thus
:
—
hoc
b.
miM
opus
est, (his is necessary for me.
An
ordinary substantive rarely stands as subject.
is
Thus dux
opus
est;
nobis opus est
L.
a rare form of expression.
participle with
Note the occasional use of a perfect passive
as,
opus est properat5,
3.
there is need of haste.
;
With
nitor, innizus,
and fretus
(lit.
as,
—
\
nititur hasta, he rests
on a spear
fretus virtute, relying on virtue
4.
(lit.
supports himself by a spear'^ supported by virtue').
consist of; as,
With contineri, consistere, constare,
—
bones
(lit.
nervis et ossibus continentur, they consist of sinews they are held together by sinews and bones)
;
and
mortali consistit corpore
stance
6.
(lit.
mundus,
the
world consists of mortal subof, etc.)
holds together by
means
In expressions of the following type
:
—
(lit.
quid hoc homine facias, what can you do with this man ? quid mea Tulliola fiet, what will become of my dear Tullia ? will be done with my dear Tullia ?)
7.
what
In the following special phrases at variance with the ordinary
:
English idiom
—
proelio contendere, vincere, to contend, conquer in battle; proelio lacessere, to provoke to battle
curru vehi,
a chariot logo on foot; castiis se tenere, to keep in camp.
to ride in
pedibus
ire,
8.
With Verbs oifilling and Adjectives ol plenty ;
as,
—
204,
i.
fossas virgultis complSrunt, they filled the trenches with brush.
a. 9.
But plenus more commonly takes the Genitive.
also
See
§
Under 'Means' belongs
as,
the
Ablative
of the
Way
by
Which;
vinum Tiber! devectum, wine
brought
down
(by) the Tiber.
146
10.
SYNTAX.
The means may be a person
{i.e,
as well as
a
thing.
Thus
:
—
perducit,
with
militibus
a lacu Lemanno ad montem Juram
by means
of) Ais troops
murum
he runs a wall Jrom Lake Geneva to Mt, Jura,
Ablative of Cause.
219.
The Ablative
is
used to denote cause ;
fecit, he
as,
—
multa gloriae cupiditate
love of glory.
did many things on account of hit.
1 So especially with verbs denoting mental states as, deleotor, gaudeo, laetor, glorior, fido, confido. Also with contentus;
;
as,
—
fortuna amicl gaudeo,
;
/ rejoice
at the fortune of
my friend
(i.e.
on
account of it) victoria sua gloriantur, they exult over their victory natura loci confidebant, (hey trusted in the character of their cowvtry (lit. were confident on account of the character).
a.
fido and confido always take the Dative of the person sometimes the Dative of tlie thing.
(§ 187. II. a)
2.
As
jussG, by order
Ablatives of Cause are to be reckoned also such Ablatives of, injussu, without the order, rogatu, etc.
as
Ablative of Manner.
220.
as,
The Ablative with cum
is
used to denote manner',
cum
I.
gravitate loquitur, he speaks with dignity,
The
preposition
;
by an adjective
as,
—
may be
absent when the Ablative
is
modified
magna
1.
gravitate loquitur, he speaks with great
is
dignity.
jure,
The
preposition
regularly
absent in the expressions
injuria, joco, vx, fraude, voluntate, furto, silentio.
3.
A
special variety of the Ablative of
Manner denotes
:
that in
at-
cor dance with
It is
which or in pursuance of which anything generally used without a preposition. Thus
—
is
cr
is
doae.
mea
sententia, according to
my
opinion
suTs moribus, in accordance with their custom sua sponte, voluntarily, of his (their) ovm accord; ea condicione, on these terms.
THE ABLATIVE.
Ablative of Attendant Circumstance.
221.
147
The Ablative
is
often used to denote an attendant
;
circumstance of an action or an event
as,
—
boms
auspiciis, under good auspices
debate -was ever held
umquam habita majoribus, no under circumstances of greater applause ezstinguitur ingenti luctu provinciae, Ae dies under circumstances ofgreat grief on the part of the province longo intervallo sequitur, he follows at a great distance.
nulla est altercatio clamoilbus
Ablative of Accompaniment.
222.
to
The Ablative with cum
as,
denote accompaniment ;
—
is
used with verbs of motion
cum comitibus profectus est, he set out with his attendants cum febri domum rediit, he returned home with a fever. I. In military expressions the Ablative may stand without cum
when modified by any adjective except a numeral as, omnibus copiis, ingenti ezercitu, magna manS but usually
; ;
—
cum
ezercitu,
cum duabus
legionibus.
Ablative of Association. 222 A.
The
Ablative
is
often used with verbs oi joining,
to denote association ; as,
mixing, clinging, exchanging ; also with assuesco, consuesco,
assuefacio,
and some others
—
improbitas scelere juncta, badness joined with crime; aer calore admiztus, air mixed with heat assuetus labore, accustomed to (lit. familiarized with) toil; pacem bello permutant, they change peace for (lit. with) war.
Ablative of Degree of Difference.
223.
The Ablative
is
used with comparatives and words
involving comparison (as post, ante, infra, supra) to denote
the degree of difference ; as,
—
dimidio minor, smaller by a half; tribus pedibus altior, three feet higher
pauio post, a little afterwards quo plura habemus, e5 cupimus ampUora, the more we have, tht
more we want.
148
SYNTAX.
Ablative of Quality.
224.
The
Ablative, modified
denote
qtiality; as,
—
by an
adjective,
is
used
to
puella ezimia forma, a girl of exceptional beauty vir singular! industria, a man of singular industry.
I.
The
est
Ablative of Quality
may
also be used predicatively
;
as,
magna prudentia, he is (a man) ofgreat wisdom ; bono animo sunt, they are ofgood courage.
J. In place of the Adjective we sometimes find a limiting Genitive as, sunt specie et colore taurf, they are of the afpearance and color of a
;
bull,
3.
In poetry the Ablative of Quality sometimes denotes ZKa/«>va/;
as,
scopulis pendentibus antrum, a cave of arching rocks.
Ablative of Price.
225.
With verbs
of buying
;
nated by the Ablative
as
—
and
selling, price is desig-
servum quinque minis emit,
1
he bought the slave for five minae.
omission
The
Ablatives
magno, pluiimo, parvo, minimo (by
;
of pretio) are used to denote indefinite price
as,
aedes magno vendidit, he sold the house for a high price.
2.
For the Genitive of Indefinite
Price, see § 203. 4.
Ablative of Specification.
226.
The Ablative
of Specification
is
is
that in respect to which something
or
is
used done
;
to denote
as,
—
Helvetii omnibus Gallis virtute praestabant, the Helvetians passed all the Gauls in valor tjede claudus, lame in his foot.
t.
sur-
Note the phrases
:
—
to age)
;
major natu, older (lit. greater as minor natu, younger.
2. Here belongs the use of the Ablative with dignus, worlhi indignus, unworthy, and dignor, deem worthy of; as,
—
digni honore, worthy of honor
fide indigni,
(i.e.
in point of honor)
i
me
unworthy of confidence dignor honore, I deem myself worthy of honor.
THE ABLATIVE.
Ablative Absolute.
227.
I49
The Ablative Absolute
it
is
grammatically
In
its
inde-
pendent of the rest of the sentence.
form
consists
;
participle
as,
—
of
a
noun
or
commonest pronoun limited by a
urbe capta, AenSas fugit, when the city had been captured, Aeneas fled (lit. the city having been captured).
1. Instead of a participle we often find an adjective or noun as, VIVO Caesare res publica salva erat, while Caesar was alive the state was safe (lit. Caesar being alive) Tarquinio rege, Pythagoras in Italiam venit, in the reign of Tarquin Pythagoras came into Italy (lit. Targtein being king) Cn. Pompejo, M. Crasso consulibus, in the consulship of Gnaeus
; ; ;
—
Pompey and Marcus Crassus
2.
(lit.
P.
and
C. being consuls)
Tlie
Ablative Absolute
is
generally used in
Latin where in
Englisli
we employ subordinate
to
clauses.
may correspond
a)
b)
a clause denoting
—
Thus
the Ablative Absolute
Time, as in the foregoing examples.
Condition
;
as,
—
omnes
c)
virtutes jacent, voluptate dominaute, all virtues lie prostrate, ifpleasure is master.
as,
Opposition;
perditis
omnibus rebus,
virtus se sustentare potest,
yet Virtue can maintain
though everything
herself.
else is lost,
d) Cause; as, nulls adversante regnum obtinuit,
him, he secured the throne.
e)
since
no one opposed
Attendant circumstance as, pasBis palmis paoem petiverunt, with hands outstretched,
; •
—
they sued for peace.
3.
An
Infinitive or clause
sometimes occurs in the Ablative Absolute
construction, especially in Livy
and
it
later writers
;
as,
—
audito
4.
eum
fugisse,
when
was heard that he had fled.
stands in the Ablative Absolute construction only when it denotes a different person or thing from any in the clause in which it stands. Exceptions to this principle are extremely rare.
A noun or pronoun
I50
,
aVNTAX.
LOCATIVE USES OF THE ABLATIVE,
Ablative of Place.
A. Place where.
228.
lative
The
place where
is
regularly denoted by the Ab-
with a preposition ;
as,
—
iu urbe habitat, he dwells in the
I.
city.
But
a)
certain
sition; viz.
—
words stand in the Ablative without a
of
prepo-
Names
towns,
— except
Singulars
;
of the
First
and
Second Declensions (see
§ 232. i)
as,
Carthagini, at Carthage ; Athenis, at Athens
Vejis, at
b)
Veii.
The
general words loco, locis, parte; also
;
many
as,
modified by totus or even by other Adjectives
—
words
hoc loco,
c)
ai this place
totis castris, in the whole camp.
The
special
words
:
foris, out
of doors;
ruri, in the country \
terra marique, on land
and sea.
denot-
d) The poets
ing place
;
freely
as,
omit the preposition with any word
stant ITtore puppes, the sterns rest on the beach.
B. Place from which.
229.
'^
Place from which
is
regularly
Ablative with a preposition ; as, ab Italia profectus est, he set out from Italy} ex urbe rediit, he returned from the city.
I.
—
denoted by
the
But certain
;
sition
viz.
—
words
stand
in
the Ablative without a prepo-
a)
Names
of towns and small islands
;
as,
Roma profectus
Rhodo
1
est, he set out from
Rome;
revertit, he returned from Rhodes.
strictly
Place from which, though
a Genuine Ablative use,
is
treated here
fol
>a)<e ur
convenience.
THE ABLATIVE.
b)
151
Aovaa, from home ; ivas, from the country.
poetry
;
c) Freely in
as,
—
Italia decesait, he withdrew from Italy.
2.
With names of towns, ab
is
used to mean
is
from
as,
the vicinity of
or to denote the point whence distance
measured;
a G-ergovia discessit, he withdrew from the vicinity of Gergovia mllia aberat, he was ten miles distant frotn Rome. a Roma
X
XJrbe and oppido, when standing in apposition with a town name, as, are accompanied by a preposition
;
—
Curibus ex oppido Sabinorum, from Cures, a town of the Sabines.
Ablative of Time.
A. Time
230.
at which.
The Ablative
as,
is
used
to
denote
the
time at
which;
qu9rta hora mortuus est, he died at the fourth hour anno septuagesimo consul oreatus, elected consul in his seventieth
year.
1.
Any word
struction, particularly
denoting a period of time may stand in this conannus, ver, aestas, hiems, dies, nox, hora,
in, unless
comitia {Election Day), ludi (the Games), etc. 2. Words not denoting time require the preposition
accompanied b} a modifier.
in pace, in peace
but
3.
Thus
:
—
in bello, in
in the second
war ;
secundo bello Punico,
Punic War.
senectute, take the
Expressions like in eo tempore, in
summa
preposition because they denote situation rather than tiine.
B. Time within which.
231.
either
Stella
Time within which is denoted by the Ablative with or without a preposition ; as,
—
Saturn! triginta annis cursum conficit, the planet Saturn
completes its orbit within thirty years
ter in
I.
anno,
thrice in the course
of the year.
Occasionally the Ablative denotes duration of time: as,
;
—
biennis prosperas res habult
/o/- two years he had a prosperous administration.
152
SYNTAX.
THE LOCATIVE.
232.
words
1.
:
—
The Locative
case occurs chiefly in the following
Regularly in the Singular of names of towns and small island
first
of the
and second declensions,
af
to denote the place in which ;
as,
—
Romae,
Rome
Corinthi, ai Corinth
RhodT, at Rhodes.
2.
In the following special fonns
dovai, ai hotne
belli, in
:
—
hntnl, on the ground
militiae, in
war
war
vesperi, at evening;
3.
heii, yesterday.
lit.
Note the phrase pendSre animi,
to be in suspense in one's
mind.
4.
For urba and oppidum
in apposition with a Locative, see § 169.
4.
Chapter
233.
I.
III.
— Syntax of Adjectives.
Adjective agrees
is
The word with which an
Subject.
called
2.
its
Attributive and Predicate Adjectives.
is
An Attributive
;
Adjective
one that
limits its subject directly
as,
—
vir sapiens, a wise man.
A
Predicate Adjective
is
one that
wise
limits its subject through
;
the
medium
of a verb (usually esse)
as,
—
vir est sapiens, the
man
is
vir videbatur sapiens, the
vir judicatus est sapiens, the
man seemed wise man was judged wise
hunc virum sapientem judicavimus, we adjudged this mun wise.
3.
Participles
and
Adjective Pronouns have the construction
o(
Adjectives.
AGREEMENT OF ADJECTIVES.
AQREEMENT OF ADJECTIVES. Agreement with One Noun. When an
one noun
it
I
S3
234.
limits
Adjective
agrees with
it
in Gender,
Number, and
Case.
as,
is
Two Adjectives in the Singular may limit a noun in the Plural; prima et vicesima legiones, the first and twentieth legions. 2. A Predicate Adjective may stand in the Neuter when its Subject Masculine or Feminine and denotes a thing as,
1.
;
—
omnium rerum mors
235.
est
eztremum,
or
death
is
the
end of all things.
Agreement with Two
A.
More Nouns.
AGREEMENT AS TO NUMBER.
Adjective
is
1.
When the
Attributive,
;
in
number with the nearest noun
pater tuus et
raS.ter,
as,
—
it
regularly agrees
your father and mother
eadem
2.
alacritas et studium, the same eagerness
and zeal.
regularly
When
et
the Adjective
is
Predicative,
it
is
Plural; as,
pax
coQCordia sunt pulchrae, peace and concord are glorious.
B.
AGREEMENT AS TO GENDER.
;
1.
in
When the Adjective is Attributive, gender with the nearest noun as,
—
it
regularly agrees
res operae
2.
multae ac laboris, a matter of much
the Adjective them
in gender
is
effort
and
labor.
When
vfith
Predicative
—
a) If the nouns are of the same gender, the Adjective agrees
;
as,
—
pater et filius capti sunt, father and son were captured.
Yet with feminine abstract nouns, the Adjective quently Neuter as,
;
is
more
fre-
—
stultitia et timiditas fugienda sunt, folly
and cowardice
must be shunned.
154
SYNTAX.
i) If the nouns are of different gender
;
then,
—
is
a) In case they denote persons, the Adjective
line
;
as,
—
Mascu-
pater et mater mortui sunt, ike father and
died.
/8)
mot}i,er have
In case they denote
things,
the Adjective
is
Neu-
ter; as,
honores et viotoriae fortuita sunt, honors and
are accidental.
y) In
Adjective
case they include both persons
is,
victories
—
and
things, the
aa) Sometimes Masculine
;
as,
—
and children
domus, uxor,
liberi inventi sunt, home, wife,
are secured.
ySyS)
Sometimes Neuter
;
as,
—
as,—
parentes, Iiberos,
domos
vilia habere, to hold parents,
children, houses cheap.
yy) Sometimes
it
agrees with the nearest noun
;
populT provinciaeque liberatae sunt, nations and provinces were liberated.
c)
jective does not agree with a
Construction according to Sense. Sometimes an Adnoun according to strict gram;
matical form, but according to sense
as,
—
pars bestiis object! smA, part {of the men) were thrown
to beasts.
236.
I.
ADJECTIVES USED SUBSTANTIVELY. Plural Adjectives used Substantively.
in the
Adjectives are quite freely used as Substantives
Plural.
The Masculine denotes
;
denotes things
as,
—
persons;
the
Neuter
docti, scholars
parva, small things
mall, the wicked Graeci, the Greeks;
magna, great
things
utilia, useful things
nostri, our men.
ADJECTIVES USED SUBSTANTIVELY.
2.
1
55
Nominative and Accusative cases.
Neuter Plural Adjectives thus used are confined mainly to the Such forms as magnorum, omto
;
nium; magnis, omnibus, would ordinarily lead where there is no ambiguity, they sometimes occur
parvis
ambiguity; yet
as,
—
componere magna,
:
to
compare great things with small.
rebus,
etc.
Otherwise the Latin says
magnarum r§rum, magnis
237.
Singular Adjectives used Substantively.
Ad-
jectives are less
freely used as Substantives in the Sin-
gular than in the Plural.
1.
Masculine Adjectives occur only occasionally in this use; as,^
probus invidet nemini,
a.
the honest tnan envies nobody.
Usually vir,
homo, or some
similar
word
is
employed
;
as,
—
doctus, a scholar vir Romanus, a Roman.
6.
homo
But when limited by a pronoun any adjective may be so
used;
as,
hic doctus, this scholar
doctus quidam, a
2.
certain scholar.
as,
Neuters are likewise infrequent
;
—
verum, truth
justum, justice;
honestum,
a.
virtue.
is
This substantive use of Neuter Singulars
struction of the Genitive of the
commonest
in the con-
Whole, and
after Prepositions;
as,—
allquid veri, something true ; nihil novi, nothing new ;
in medio, in the midst.
238.
From
Adjectives which, like the above, occasionally admit the
substantive use,
must be
;
have become nouns
as,
—
carefully distinguished certain others
which
adversarius, opponent
aequalis, contemporary
hiberna, winter quarters ;
propinquus,
relativ:
amicus, friend cognatus, kinsman
socius, partner
sodalis, comrade
etc.
;
vicinus, neighbor;
156
SYNTAX.
ADJECTIVES WITH THE FORCE OP ADVERBS.
239.
lish
The Latin
often uses an Adjective
where the Eng,
;
idiom employs an Adverb or an adverbial phrase
as,
—
senatus frequens oonvenit, the senate assembled in great numbers; fuit assiduus mecum, he was constantly with me.
COMPARATIVES AND SUPERLATIVES.
240.
with
'
I.
The Comparative often corresponds
'
rather^
somewhat^
'
too
'
;
as,
—
is
to the English Positive
seuectus est loquaoior, old age
2.
'
rather talkative.
So the
'
,•
very
as,
—
Superlative
often
corresponds to the Positive with
vir fortissimus, a very brave man.
Strengthening Words. Vel and quam are often used witli 3. the Superlative as strengthening particles, vel with the force of ' very^ and quam with the force of as possible ; as,
' '
—
vel masimus, the very greatest quam masimae oopiae, as great forces as possible.
4.
Phrases of the type
'
in both
members
;
as,
—
more rich than hrave regularly take the Comparative
'
exercitus erat ditior
quam
fortior, the army was more rich than brave.
OTHER PECULIARITIES.
241.
chiefly
I. Certain Adjectives may be used to denote apart of an object, primus, extremus, summus, medius, iniimus, imus; as,—
aummus mons,
extrema hieme,
2.
the top of the mountain in the last part of the winter.
Prior, primus, ultimus, and
;
lent to a relative clause
as,
—
postremns
are frequently equiva-
primus eam
vidi,
/ was
the first
last
ultimus dgcessit, he was the
3.
who saw her who withdrew.
When multus and
generally used
;
et
is
as,
—
another adjective both limit the same noun,
multae et magnae oogitstiones, many {and) great
thoughts.
PERSONAL PRONOUNS. — POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS.
1
57
Chapter IV.
— Syntax of Pronouns.
—
PERSONAL PRONOUNS.
242.
are, as
I. The Personal Pronouns as subjects of verbs a rule, not expressed except for the purpose of
emphasis, contrast, or clearness.
video,
Thus
amat, Ae
ordinarily
loves.
:
/ see
But ego te video, et tu
2.
me vides, I see you, and you see me.
Thus:
The
Genitives mei, tui, nostri, vestrT are used only as Objective
Genitives;
nostrum and vestrum as Genitives of the Whole.
—
memoT
tui,
mindful ofyou
no one ofyou.
desiderium vestri, longing foryou
nemo vestrum,
a.
But nostrum and vestrum are regularly used in the place of the Possessive in the phrases
omnium nostrum, omnium vestrum.
editorial 'we.'
3.
The
First Plural
is
often used for the First Singular of Pronouns
and Verbs.
4.
Compare the Eng.
When two Verbs
govern the same object, the Latin does not
is
use a pronoun with the second, as
virtiis
the rule in English.
Thus
:
—
ships
amicitias oonciliat et conaervat, virtue establishes friendand maintains them (not e5s conservat)
POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS.
243. I. The Possessive Pronouns, as a rule, are not employed except for the purpose of clearness. Thus
:
patrem amo, Hove my father de filii morte flebas, you wept for
But
the death ofyour son.
—
de morte
a.
filii
mel QebaB, you wept for the
its
death of my son.
When
expressed merely for the sake of clearness, the pos-
sessive usually stands after
noun
;
but in order to indias,
cate emphasis or contrast,
it
precedes
;
—
sua manii ITberos occidit, with his own hand he slew
children
hii
mea quidem
sententia, in
my opinion
at least.
158
SYNTAX.
2. Sometimes the Possessive Pronouns are used with the an Objective Genitive as,
;
—
force of
metus vester,yiar ofyou i desiderium tuum, longing for you.
3.
For special emphasis, the Latin employs ipaius or ipsorum,
;
in
apposition with the Genitive idea implied in the Possessive
as,
mea ipsius
a.
opera, by
my own
help
nostra ipsorum opera, 6y our own help
So sometimes
other Genitives
;
as,
—
mea uulus opera, dy the assistance of me alone,
REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS.
244.
I.
The
Reflexive Pronoun se and the Possessive
:
Reflexive suus have a double use
1.
—
They may
refer to the subject of the clause (either principal or
subordinate) in which they stand,'
— 'Direct Reflexives';
as,
Be amant, they love themselves suos amicos adjuvat, he helps his own friends; eum oravi, ut se servaret, / besought him to save himself.
II.
They may stand
of the principal clause,
—
in a subordinate clause
'
and
;
Indirect Reflexives
'
as,
—
refer to the subject
me
me
oravit ut se dSfenderem, he besought m.e to defend him (lit. thai I defend hitnself) ; oraverunt, ut fortunarum suarum defensionem susciperem,
they besought
a.
me
to
undertake the defense of their fortunes.
The
Indirect Reflexive is mainly restricted to those clauses which express the thought, not of the author, but of the sub-
ject of the principal clause.
regularly employed, like mei and tui, as an oblltus sui, forgetful of himself; but it occasionally occurs particularly in post -Augustan writers in place of the Possessive suus as, fruitur fama sui, he enjoys his oumfame.
2.
The
Genitive sui
is
Objective Genitive,
e.g.
—
;
—
;
3.
Se and suus
se amare,
are sometimes used in the sense,
is
one''s self,
onii
own, where the reference
not to any particular person
as,
—
to love one's self;
suum genium
propitiare, to propitiate one's
own genius.
RECIPROCAL AND DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS.
4.
159
etc.,
Suus sometimes
occurs in the meaning his own, their own,
referring not to the subject but to
an oblique case
;
as,
—
Hannibalem sui cives e oivitate ejecerunt,
drove out Hannibal.
a.
his
own fellow-citizens
This usage
;
quiaque
as,
—
is
particularly
frequent
in
combination with
suus quemque error vexat, his own error
J.
troubles each.
The
Reflexives for the
first
and second persons are supplied by
;
the
obUque cases of ego and tu (§ 85)
as,
—
vos def enditis, _)'02^ defend yourselves.
HECIPROCAL PRONOUNS.
245.
I
.
The
;
Latin has no special reciprocal pronoun
('
each other
'),
but expresses the reciprocal notion by the phrases
vos, inter se
as,
—
:
inter nos, inter
Belgae obsides inter se dederunt, the Belgae gave each other hostages (lit. atnong themselves); amamus inter nos, we love each other Gall! inter se cohortati sunt, the Gauls exhorted each other.
a.
Note that the Object
is
not expressed in sentences of tliis type.
DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS.
Hic, lUe, Iste.
246.
I.
Where
two
Mo
and
ille are
used in contrast, hie usually refers
to the latter of
2.
objects,
and
ille to the former.
'
Hic and
ille are often
used in the sense of the following'
;
as,
—
Themlstocles his verbis epistulam (couched) in the following words illud intellego, omnium ora in me conversa esse, / understand this, that the faces of all are turned toward me.
3.
misit, Themistocles sent a letter
Ille often
means
the fa?nous
;
as,
Solon
;
ille, the famous
Solon.
I
4.
5.
Iste frequently involves contempt
as,
iste
homo,
that fellow
The
above pronouns, along with is, are usually attracted to the
;
gender of a predicate noun
suum,
this is
an honor,
to be
as, hic est honor, meminisse offioium mindful of one's duty.
l6o
SYNTAX.
Is.
247.
Thus:
I.
—
a.
Is often serves as the antecedent of the relative
qui.
Maziniuni,
.
eum
qui Tarentum recepit, dilezi,
I loved Maximus,tht
oisuch (=
talis)
;
man who
as,
retook Tarentum.
is
Closely akin to this usage
is in the sense
non sum
is
qui terrear, f
am
not such a person as
to be
frightened.
b.
Note the phrase id quod, where id stands in apposition with an entire clause as,
;
—
non suspicabatur
testes nobis
nesses enough
(id
quod nunc
esse,
sentiet) satis multos
reliqiios
he
did not suspect
(a
thing -which he will
left.
now
perceive") that
we had
wit-
Yet
quod
alone, without preceding id,
sometimes occurs
in
this use.
2.
Is also in
^
all
cases serves as the personal pronoun of the
'they,'' 'them.''
i
third
person, ^he^
3.
she^
'it,''
When
the English uses 'that
of ^ those of
;
the noun, the Latin omits the pronoun
as,
—
to avoid repetition
of
in exercitu Sullae et postea in Crassi fuerat, he army of Sulla and afterward in that of Crassus
had
been in the
nullae
me
fabulae delectant nisi PlautT, no plays delight me
except
those of Plautus.
Note the phrases et is, et ea, etc., in the sense and that too ; as,— 4. vincula, et ea sempiterna, imprisonment, and that too permanently.
:
Idem.
248.
I.
Idem
in apposition with the subject or object often has
;
force of also, likewise
as,
—
tlie
contigit, which likewise happened to me (lit. which, same thing) bonus vir, quern eundem sapientem appellamus, a good man,
the
\
quod idem mihi
whom we call also wise.
For idem atque (ac), the same
as, see § 341. i.e.
DEMONSTRATIVE AND RELATIVE PRONOUNS. l6l
Ipse.
249.
text
;
I.
Ipse,
as,
—
literally self, acquires its special force
from the con-
eo ipso diS, on that very day ad ipsam ripam, close to the bank vpBO teixoie, dy mere /right valvae se ipsae aperueruut, the doors opened of their own accord;
ipse aderat, he
2.
was present
in person.
pronouns are often emphasized by the addition of ipse, but ipse in such cases, instead of standing in apposition with the
reflexive
reflexive,
The
more commonly agrees with the subject
;
as,
—
secnm
ipsi loquuntur, they talk with themselves
se ipse continere
non
potest, he cannot contain himself.
3. Ipse is also used as an Indirect Reflexive marking a contrast or avoiding an ambiguity ; as,
—
for the
purpose
oil
Persae pertimuerunt ne Alcibiades ab ipsTs descisceret et cum suis in gratiam rediret, the Persians feared that Alcibiades would break with them, and become reconciled with his countrymen. ea molestiBsime ferre debent homines quae ipsorum culpa contracta sunt, men ought to chafe most over those things which have been brought about by their own fault (as opposed to the fault of
others).
250.
its
is
RELATIVE PRONOUNS. Agreement. I. The Relative Pronoun
agrees with
its
antecedent in Gender, Number, and Person, but
case
it
determined by
;
stands
as,
—
its
construction in the clause in which
mulier quam videbamus, the woman whom we saw bona quibus fruimur, the blessings which we enjoy.
2. Where the antecedent is compound, the same principles for number and gender prevail as in case of predicate adjectives under similar conditions (see § 235. B. 2). Thus
:
—
pater et filius, qui capti sunt, the father
stultitia et
and son who were captured; timiditas quae fugienda saxit, folly and cowardice which
must be shunned; honores et victoriae quae sunt fortuita, honors and victories, which
are accidental.
l62
SYNTAX.
3. The Relative regularly agrees with a predicate noun as, Nominative or Accusative) instead of its antecedent
;
—
(either
career,
quae lautumiae vocantur,
the prison, which
is called
Law-
iumiae
Belgae, quae est tertia pars, ihe Belgians, who are the third part.
4. Sometimes the Relative takes meaning of its antecedent as,
;
—
its
gender and number from
the
pars qui bestiis object! sunt, a part (of the men) who were thrmvn
to beasts.
5.
Occasionally the Relative
as,
is
attracted into the case of
its ante-
cedent;
natus eo patre quo dixi, born of the father that I said.
251.
Antecedent.
;
I.
sometimes omitted as, qui naturam sequitur sapiens
2.
—
The
antecedent of the Relative
is
est, he
who follows Naiure
is wise.
The antecedent may be
an adjective)
;
rarely
as,
—
implied in a possessive pronoun
(or
nostra qui remansimus caedes, the slaughter of us who remained; servili tumultu, quos usus ac disciplina sublevarunt, at the uprising of the slaves, whom experience (servili = servorum).
3.
and
discipline assisted
Sometimes the antecedent
{routes).
is
repeated with the Relative; 13,—
routes, by which,
erant itinera duo, quibus itineribus, there were two
4.
antecedent
a)
Incorporation of Antecedent in Relative Clause. is often incorporated in the relative clause. Thus
:
—
let
The
When the relative clause stands first as, quam quisque novit artem, in hac se
;
—
each
exerceat, one practice the branch which he knows.
the antecedent
is
b)
When
an appositive
;
as,
—
oj
non longe a Tolosatium
finibus absunt, quae civitaa
the Tolosates, a state which
c)
est in provincia, they are not far from the borders is in our province.
the logical antecedent
is
When
a superlative
;
as,
Themistocles de servis
queni habuit fidelissimum miait, Themistocles sent the most trttsty slave he had.
suis,
RELATIVE PRONOUNS.— INDEFINITE PRONOUNS.
d) In expressions of the following type
1
63
—
is your is
qua es prudentia
prudence
prudence")
5.
(lit.
.
quae tua est prudentia, such of which prudence you are; which
;
your
The Relative is never omitted in Latin as it is in English. Thiis I saw must be puer quern vidi. 6. The Relative is used freely in Latin, particularly at the beginning of a sentence, where in English we employ a demonstrative; as,
the boy
quo factum est, by this it happened quae cum ita sint, since this is so quibus rebus cognitis, when these things became known.
7.
The
Relative introducing
is
a
subordinate clause
may belong
it
grammatically to a clause which
as,
subordinate to the one
introduces
numquam
digne
satis
laudari philosophia
poterit,
cui
qui
pareat,
omne tempus
aetatis sine molestia possit degere,
philosophy can never be praised enough, since he
who
he
obeys her
can pass every period of life without annoyance
which,
etc.).
(lit.
who
obeys
Here cui introduces the subordinate clause possit and connects it with philosophia but cui is governed by pareat, which is subordinate to
;
possit.
INDEFINITE PRONOUNS.
252.
I
.
Quis, any one,
is
the weakest of the Indefinites, and stands
ne,
usually in
combination with
SI
si, nisi,
num
;
as,
—
quis putat, if any one thinks.
aliqui)
is
2.
Aliquis
(adj.
more
definite
than quis, and corre-
sponds usually to the English some one, somebody, some; as,
nunc aliquis dicat mihi, now let somebody tell me utinam mode agatur aliquid, oh that something may
3.
be done.
;
Quidam, a
certain one,
is still
more
definite than aliquis
as,
homo quidam, a
a.
certain
man
(ie. one
whom I have
if)
is
in
mind).
Qmdam
sense
:
(with or without
of,
kind of: as, cognatio quaedam, a sort of relationship ; mors est quasi quaedam migratiS, death a sort
—
quasi, as
sometimes used in the
is
a kind of
transfer,
1
64
SYNTAX.
general than quis), 4. Quisquam, any one, any one whoever (more and its corresponding adjective uUua, any, occur mostly in negative and conditional sentences, in interrogative sentences implying a negativej and in clauses of comparison as,
;
—
justitia
bT
uumquam
nocet
cm.<¥Oi?cca, justice
never harms anybody^
quisquam, Cat5 sapiens
fuit, if anybody
was ever
wise, Cato was;
potestne quisquam sine perturbatione animi irasci, can anybody be angry without excitement ? SI ullo modo poterit, if it can be done in any way; taetrior hic tyrannus fuit quam quisquam superiorum, he was a
viler tyrant
5.
than any of his predecessors.
one, is used especially
Quisque, each
:
stances
—
under the following
circum-
a')
.
b) In
In connection with suus. See § 244. 4. a. connection with a Relative or Interrogative Pronoun;
as,
quod cuique
him
c) In
obtigit, id teneat,
what falls
to each, that
let
hold.
connection with superlatives; as,
all the best
;
optimuB quisque,
(lit.
each best one).
d) With ordinal numerals
as,
—
(lit.
quinto quoque anno, every four years
6.
each fifth year).
Nemo, no
one, in addition to its other uses, stands regularly with
;
adjectives used substantively
as,
—
nemo mortalis, no mortal; nemo Romanus, no Roman.
PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES.
253.
!•
Alius, another, and alter, the other, are often used
correl-
atively; as,
aliud loquitur, aliud sentit, he says one thing, he thinks another; alii resistunt, alii fugiunt, some resist, others flee; alter exercitum perdidit, alter vendidit, one ruined the army,
other sold
alterl se in
it
tht
montem
recSperunt, alter! ad impedimenta se contubetook
lerunt, the one party retreated to the fiiountain, the others
themselves to the baggage.
AGREEMENT OF VERB WJTH
2.
SUBJECT.
1
65
Where
the English says one does one thing, another anoffur, the
;
Latin uses a
more condensed form of statement
as,
—
alius aliud amat, one likes one thing, another another
aliud aliis placet, one thing pleases some, another others.
a.
So sometimes with adverbs
;
as,
—
'
alii alio fugriunt, somefiee in one direction^ others in another,
3.
The Latin
;
also expresses the notion
alius repeated
as,
—
each other
'
by means
ol
Galli alius
4.
alium cohortati sunt,
the Gauls encouraged each other.
;
Ceten means
the rest, all the others
as,
—
cSteris praestare, to be superior to all the others.
J.
ing,
— hence
Seliqui means the others in the sense of the rest, those remain' as, is the regular word with numerals
;
reliqui sex, the six others.
6.
Nesoio quis forms a compound
some one or other;
as,
force of
—
indefinite
pronoun with_ the
causidicus nescio quis, some pettifogger or other ;
misit nescio quem, he sent some one or other; nescio quo pacto, somehow or other.
Chapter V.
:
— Syntax of
Subject.
Verbs.
AGHEEMENT.
With One
254.
I.
Agreement
its
in
Number and
Person.
A
;
Finite
as,
Verb agrees with
pater
2.
subject in
see
;
Number and Person
—
vos videtis, you
filios instituit, the father trains his sons.
Agreement in Gender.
In the
compound forms
gender
;
of the verb
the participle regularly agrees with its subject in
as,
—
seditio repressa est, the
mutiny was
checked.
l66
3.
its
.
SYNTAX.
is
But when a predicate noun
of diffeijnt gender or number from
;
subject, the verb usually agrees with its nearest substantive
as,
—
Tarquiuii materna patria erat, Tarquinii was his native
country
non
on his mother''s side omnia error stultitia est dicenda,
folly.
a.
jiot
every error
is to be called
Less frequently the verb agrees with an appositive Corioli,
;
as,
—
oppidum Volscorum, '"iptum
was
captured.
eat, Corioli, a town of the
Volsci,
4.
Construction according to
its
:
Sense.
Sometimes
the verb
agrees with
form.
Thus
d) In
—
subject according to sense instead of strict grammatical
Number
;
as,
—
a crowd of nun had
multitado
hominum convenerant,
as,
gathered.
6) In
Gender
;
^sunt, two thousand {men) were
duo milia crucibus adfizi
crucified.
"With
255.
jects the
I.
Two
in
or
More
Subjects.
Agreement
is
Number.
;
With two
as,
verb
regularly plural
—
or more sub-
pater et filius mortui sunt, the father and son
.2.
died.
But sometimes the verb agrees with the nearest subject; viz.,— a) When the verb precedes both subjects or stands between
them
;
as,
—
mortuus est pater et filiua pater mortuus eat et filius.
b)
When
vel
.
the subjects are connected by aut;
.
.
vel
;
neque
.
.
.
ineque
;
as,
—
aut
.
.
.
aut;
neque pater neque
son died.
3.
filius
mortuus
est, neither father nor
When
the different subject's are
is
whole, the singular
used
;
as,
—
felt
together as constituting
a
temeritas ignoratioque vitioaa est, rashness and ignorance are had. u. This is regularly the case in senatus popultisque Bomanus,
VOICES.
4,
— TENSES.
With compound
as,
167
subjects of different
Agreement in Person.
persons the verb always takes the first person rather than the second,
and the second rather than the third;
si
—
tu et TuUia valetis, ego et Cicero yalemus, if you and Tullia are well, Cicero and I are well.
5.
participle in the
Agreement in Gender. With subjects of different genders the compound tenses follows the same principles as laid
See § 235, B,
2.
down
for predicate adjectives.
VOICES.
256.
I
•
The
Passive Voice sometimes retains traces of
;
middle or reflexive meaning
as,
—
its
original
ego non patiar
2.
eum
defend!,
/ shall not
many
allow him to defend himself.
In imitation of Greek usage
perfect passive participles are
used by the poets as indirect middles,
ing not
i.e.
the subject
is
viewed as act;
upon
itself,
but as doing something in his
own
interest
as,
—
velatus tempora, having veiled his temples.
a.
Occasionally
finite
tunica inducitur artus, he covers
3.
forms of the verb are thus used as, his limbs with a tunic.
; ;
Intran.sitive
Verbs may be used impersonally in the passive
(lit. it is
etc.')
as,
—
curritur, people run
ventum
est, he (they,
run) came (lit.
;
it
was come).
TENSES.
TENSES OF THE INDICATIVE.
257.
tiohs
:
—
I.
The
Latin tenses express
two
distinct
no-
a)
The period of time
to
which the action belongs
:
Present, Fast, or Future,
h)
The kind of
Completed.
its
action:
Undefined, Going on, or
The
Latin with
six tenses is able to express each of the three
kinds of action for each of the three periods of time
(making
practically
i68
SYNTAX.
nine tenses). It does this by employing certain tenses in more than one way, as may be seen by the following table
:
—
PERIOD OF TIME.
TENSES.
2. It is
169
Conative Present
')
;
used of an attempted action
('
as,
—
avoid
aum
3.
('
vTtant vitia, in contrSria ourrunt,
(vitant)
-vices,
tuhile they try to
they rush into opposite ones.
In lively narration the Present
')
;
Historical Present
as,
—
is
often used of a past action
Caesar imperat magnum numerum obsidum, Caesar demanded a large number of hostages (lit. demands').
4.
In combination with jam,
is
jam
;
diu,
jam pridem, and
similar
words, the Present
past
frequently used of an action originating in the
as,
and continuing
in the present
—
jam pridem cupio te visere, / have long been desiring [i.e. I desire and have long desired). Imperfect Indicative.
260.
I.
to visit
you
The Imperfect
as,
on in past time ;
—
primarily denotes action going
librum legebam, / was reading a
a.
book.
This force makes the Imperfect especially adapted to serve as the tense of description (as opposed Co mere narration)
the notion of action going on, there easily develops the
;
2.
From
notion of repeated or customary action
as,
—
legates interrogabat, he kept asking the envoys
C.
;
DuQium videbam
3.
pner, as a boy
/ ofte7i
used to see Gaius Duilius.
The Imperfect
often denotes an attempted action ('Conative Im('
psrfect') or
an action as beginning
Inceptive Imperfect')
;
as,
hostes nostros intra munitiones progredX prohibebant, the enemy tried to prevent (prohibebant) our men from advancing within
the fortifications
('
Conative
')
;
ad proeUum se ezpediebant,
battle (' Inceptive ')
4.
they were beginning to get ready for
The
Imperfect, with jam,
jam
diu,
jam dudum,
etc., is
;
some-
times used of an action
which had been continuing some time
he had
as,
—
domicilium
Romae
multos jam annos habebat, he had had
(i.e.
it
his
residence at
Rome for many years
it).
at this time
and had long had
lyo
SYNTAX.
Future Indicative.
261.
is
I.
The
Latin
is
:
much more
'
exact in the use of the Future than
If he comes, J shall be glad,'' where we really mean: < If he shall come J etc. In such cases the Latin rarely admits the Present, but generally employs the Future.
the English.
2.
We say
Sometimes the Future has Imperative force;
Perfect Indicative.
as,
dices, say
I
262.
Present;
A. Present Perfect.
a completed
(lit.
Several Present Perfects denote the
act,
state resulting from
as,
and so seem equivalent
to the
/ have become acquainted with) / have become accustomed) B. Historical Perfect. The Historical Perfect is the tense
novi, cognovi, / know
;
cSusuevT, / am wont
(lit.
of
narration (as opposed to the Imperfect, the tense oi description)
;
as,—
Regulus in senatum venit, mandata exposuit, reddi captivoa negavit esse utile, Regulus came into the Senate, set forth his commission, said it was useless for captives to be returned.
I.
Occasionally the Historical Perfect
is
used of a general truth
{'
Gnomic
Perfect').
Pluperfect Indicative.
263.
fect,
The Latin
RhSnum
Pluperfect, like the English Past Peras,
denotes an act completed in the past ;
Caesar
a.
transTre decreverat, sed naves deerant, Caesar'
cross the Rhine, but
had decided to
had no
boats,
In those verbs whose Perfect has Present force (§ 262, A), the Pluperfect has the force of an Imperfect; as,
noveram, / knew.
Future Perfect Indicative.
future time.
The Future Perfect denotes an action completed in Thus Ecribam epistulam, cum redieris, / will write the letter when you
264.
:
—
have returned
a.
(lit.
The
fect
Latin
is
than the
when you shall have returned). much more exact in the use of the Future PerEnglish, which commonly employs the Present
Perfect instead of the Future Perfect.
b.
In those verbs whose Perfect has Present force (§ 262, A) the Future Perfect has the force of a Future; as,
novero, I shall know.
SEQUENCE OF TENSES.
Epistolary Tenses.
171
In letters the writer often uses tenses which are not appropriate at the time of writing, but which will be so at the time when his
265.
letter is
received
;
the Present,
nihil
and the Pluperfect
he thus employs the Imperfect and the Perfect for the Present Perfect as,
;
—
for
habebam quod scrlberem, neque enim novi quidquam audieram et ad tuas omnes epistulas jam rescripseram, I have nothing to write, for I have heard no news and have
already answered all your
letters.
TENSES OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE.
266.
B. In Dependent Sentences.
A. In Independent Sentences. See §§ 272— 280. In dependent sentences the
tenses of the subjunctive usually
conform
to the so-called
Sequence
267.
I.
of Tenses.
In the Subjunctive the Present and Perfect are
Principal tenses, the Imperfect
2.
and Pluperfect,
Historical.
By
the Sequence of Tenses Principal tenses are
lowed by Principal, Historical by Historical.
Principal Sequence,
Thus
:
—
fol-
—
video quid facias, I see what you are doing. videbo quid facias, I shall see what you are doing. vTdero quid facias, I shall have seen what you are doing. videS quid feceris, t see what you have done. videbo quid feceris, / shall see what you have done. videro quid feceris, I shall have seen what you have done.
Historical Sequence,
—
I saw what you were
doing.
videbam quid
facerSs,
vidi quid faceres, I saw what you were doing. vTderam quid faceres, I had seen what. you were doing.
videbam quid
videram quid
3.
fScisses,
I saw what you had done.
had seen what you had done.
Subjunctive
vidi quid fecisses, I saw what you had done.
fecissSs, /
The Present and Imperfect
denote
incomplete
action, the Perfect
Indicative.
and Pluperfect completed
action, exactly as in the
172
SYNTAX.
Peculiarities of Sequence.
268.
I.
The
Perfect Indicative
is
usually an historical tense (even
when
translated in English as a Present Perfect),
;
and so
is
followed by
the Imperfect and Pluperfect Subjunctive
as,
demonstravi quare ad causam accederem, / have shown why I took the case (lit. / showed why, etc.).
2.
A
;
dependent Perfect
if
Infinitive is treated as
an
it
historical tense
wherever,
torical
as,
—
resolved into an equivalent Indicative,
would be
his-
videor ostendisse quales dei essent, / seem to have shown of what nature the gods are (ostendisse here corresponds to an Indicative,
3.
ostendi, /j^OTf««^).
Historical Present
historical.
is
I
The
sometimes regarded as a
:
tense,
sometimes as
Thus
—
principal
Sulla sues hortatur ut forti animo sint, Sulla exhorts
to be stout-hearted;
his soldiers
Gallos hortatur ut arma caperent, he exhorted the Gauls
arms.
4.
to take
Conditional
sentences
affected
by the principles
for the
of the 'contrary-to-fact' type are not Sequence of Tenses as,
;
honestum
tale est ut, vel si ignorarent id
homines, sua tamen
is
pulchritudine laudabile esset, virtue
even if men were ignorant of praise for its own loveliness.
5.
it, it
such a thing that
still
would
be worthy of
In conditional sentences of the
'
contrary-to-fact
'
type the Imper;
fect Subjunctive is usually treated as SI
an Historical tense
as,
—
solos eos diceres miseros, quibus moriendum esset, neminem tu quidem eorum qui viverent ezciperSs, if you called only
those wretched
who must
die,
you would except no
orte
of
those
who
6.
live.
In clauses of Result and
some
others, the Perfect Subjunctive
sometimes used as an historical tense.
Thus
:
—
is
rex tantum motus
enemy.
est, ut Tissaphernem hostem judicarit, the king was so tnuch moved that he adjudged Tissaphernes an
This construction is rare in Cicero, but frequent in Nepos and subsequent historians. The Perfect Subjunctive in this use represents a
SEQUENCE OF TENSES.
1
73
result simply as a fact without reference to the continuance of the act, and therefore corresponds to an Historical Perfect Indicative of direct Thus, judicarit in the above example corresponds to statement. To denote a result as something continuous, a judioavit, he adjudged.
all
writers use the Imperfect Subjunctive after historical tenses.
7.
Sometimes perspicuity demands that the ordinary principles of
Sequence be abandoned altogether.
a)
Thus
:
—
We
may have
the Present or Perfect Subjunctive after an
;
historical tense
as,
—
Verres Siciliam ita perdidit ut ea
Verres
so
:
r.estitui
non
possit,
ruined Sicily that it cannot be restored (Direct statement non potest restitui) ardebat Hortensius dicendi cupiditate sic, ut in uuUo flagrantius studium viderim, Hortensius burned so
;
•with eagerness to
greater desire (Direct statement: in uullo vidi,
seen in no one)
speak that I have seen in no one a I have
Here, by neglect of was used
Note.
as
— This
We
usage
is
is
different
from that cited under
;
6.
Sequence, the Perfect
used, though a principal tense
there the Perfect
an historical tense.
b)
may have a
principal tense followed
;
junctive used historically
as,
—
by the Perfect Sub-
nescio quid causae fuerit cur nuUas ad me litteras dares, / do not know what reason there was why you did not send me a letter.
Here fuerit
is historical,
as
is
shown by the following Im-
perfect Subjunctive.
Method
269.
to
of Expressing Future
Time in the Subjunctive.
Perfect,
The Future and Future
Subjunctive,
:
which are lacking
subordinate
the Latin
clauses as follows
I.
—
are
supplied in
a)
The Future
The Future
tenses,
is
supplied by the Present after principal tenses,
after historical tenses.
is
by the Imperfect
3)
Perfect
supplied by the Perfect after principal
after historical tenses.
by the Pluperfect
is
This
especially frequent
when
:
the context clearly shows,
by the presence of a future tense in the main
reference
is
to future time.
Thus
—
clause, that the
174
SYNTAX.
quae Caesar imperet,
the
Galli poUioentur se facturos,
Gauk
Gauls
promise they will do -what Caesar shall order Gall! poUicSbantur se facturos, quae Caesar imperaret, the promised they would do what Caesar should order Galli poUioentur se facturos quae Caesar imperaverit, the
Gauls
promise they will do what Caesar shall have ordered; Galli poUicebantur se facturos quae Caesar imperavisset, tk Gauls promised they would do what Caesar should have ordered.
2. Even where the context does not contain a Future tense in the main clause, Future time is often expressed in the subordinate clauses by the Present and Imperfect Subjunctive. Thus
:
—
timeo ne veniat, / am afraid he will come Caesar exspectabat quid consili hostes caperent, Caesar waiting to see what plan the enemy would adopt.
3.
was
Where
greater definiteness
is
necessary, the periphrastic forms
in -urus
Result,
sim and -urus essem are employed, especially in Indirect Questions, and after non dubito quin as,
;
—
clauses of
nen dubito quiu pater venturus
will come
sit,
/ do
not doubt that
my father
that
non dubitabam qum pater venturus
esset, T did not doubt
my father would come.
4.
Where
the verb has
no Future Active
its
Participle, or where
it
stands in the passive voice,
the use of the particles
Future character
as,
may be
indicated by
mox,
brevi, statim,
;
etc.,
in connection with
the Present and Imperfect Subjunctive
te mox hujus rei paeuiteat, I do not doubt that you will soon repent of this thing; non dubitabam qum haec res "itxeriii cbnfic^x%t-ar I did not doubt that this thing would soon be finished.
non dubito quin
,
270.
I.
TENSES OF THE INFINHIVE. The tenses of the Infinitive denote
Thus
:
time not
absolutely, but with reference
depend.
d)
—
to
the verb on which they
The Present
Infinitive represents
with the time of the verb on which
an act as contemporaneous it depends as,
;
videtur honores adsequi, he seems to be gaining honors; videbatur hon5r§s adsequi, ^^ seemed to be gaining honon.
TENSES OF THE INFINITIVE.
S)
175
The
Perfect Infinitive represents an act as prior to the time
it
of the verb on which
depends
;
as,
videtur hondres adsecutus esse, he seems
honors
to
have gdined
to
visus est honores adsecutus esse, he seemed gained honors.
c)
have
The Future
Infinitive represents
it
an
as,
of the verb on which
depends
;
—
act as subsequent to that
videtur honores adsecuturus esse, he seems to be about to gain honors visus est honores adseciiturus esse, he seemed to be about to gain honors.
2.
etc.,
Where
the English says
'
ought to have done^
the Latin uses debui, oportuit,
tnight have done^ potui (debebam, oportebat,
'
poteram), with the Present
Infinitive; as,
to say)
;
debuit dicere, he ought to have said (lit. owed it oportuit venire, he ought to have come potuit videre, he might have seen.
a.
Oportuit, V0I6, nolo (and
in
poetry
;
some
Perfect Infinitive instead of the Present
as,
—
other verbs),
may take
to
a
hoc jam pridem factum esse oportuit,
been done.
3.
this
ought long ago
have
cipial
Periphrastic Future Infinitive. Verbs that have no PartiStem, express the Future Infinitive Active and Passive by fore
;
ut or futuruni esse ut, with the Subjunctive
as,
—
spero fore ut te paeniteat levitatis,
fickleness
(lit.
/
hope you will repent of your
;
hope it will happen that you repent) spero futuruni esse ut hostes arceantur, / hope that the enemy will
be kept off.
a.
The
Periphrastic
Future Infinitive
is
often
used, especially in the
Participial
Passive, even in ease of verbs
which have the
Stem
;
as,
—
spero fore ut hostes vincantur, /
quered.
4.
hope the enemy will be con-
Passives and Deponents sometimes form a Future Perfect Infini;
tive
with fore
as,
—
spero epistulam scriptam fore, / hope the
written
letter
will have been
^c6 me
satis
adeptnm
fore,
/
say thai
I
shall have gained
enough.
176
SYNTAX.
MOODS
271.
IN
THE MOODS. INDEPENDENT SENTENCES.
in
The Indicative
Independent Sentences.
The
Indicative
the supposition
I.
is used for the statement of facts offacts, or inquiry afterfacts.
:
Note the following idiomatic uses
a)
—
(§ 270, 2).
est, melius
as,
With possum
;
as,
—
longum
it
possum multa
b)
dioere, / might say tmich poteram multa dioere, / might have said much
In such expressions as
est,
aequum
;
est, difficile est, iitilius est,
and some others
—
longum
difficile
est
raa
dicere,
would be
it
tedious to tell that;
est
omnia persequi,
would
be difficult to enu-
merate everything.
The Subjunctive
272.
in
is
Independent Sentences.
The Subjunctive
something
to express
1
—
used in Independent Sentences
2.
3.
As As
— Volitive Subjunctive — Optative Subjunctive Conceived of as possible — Potential Subjunctive.
-TO-illed
desired
VOLITIVE SUBJUNCTIVE.
Volitive Subjunctive represents the action as always implies authority on the part of the speaker, and has the following varieties
273.
willed.
It
:
The
—
A.
Hortatory Subjunctive.
exhorplural,
274.
tation.
The Hortatory Subjunctive expresses an
This use
eamus,
is
confined to the
first
person
:
of the Present.
The
let
negative
let
is
ns.
Thus
—
us go
us love our country \ us not despair.
amemus
patriam,
ne dSsperemua,
let
THE VOLITIVE SUBJUNCTIVE.
B. Jussive Subjunctive.
1 77
275.
The
Jussive
The Jussive stands regularly
is
used
1.
—
Subjunctive expresses a command. in the Present Tense, and
and the
Most frequently
dicat,
let
in the third singular
third plural; as,
him
tell;
let them tell; quare secedant improbi, wherefore
dicant,
let
the wicked depart
2.
Less
frequently in
the second person, often with indefinite
force; as,
-^
isto
bond
utare, use that advantage
live temperately.
modeste vivas,
C.
Prohibitive Subjunctive.
is
used in the second and third persons singular and plural, with ne, to express a prohibiBoth Present and Perfect occur, and without appretion.
276.
The
Subjunctive
ciable difference of
meaning
;
as,
—
ne repugnetis, do not resist'.. tu vero istam ne reliqueris, doii't leave her impii ne placare audeant deos, let not the impious dare
appease the gods
a. b.
to
Neither of these constructions
is
frequent in classical prose.
A
commoner method of expressing a
or by
prohibition in the second
person-is by the use of noli (nolite) with a following infinitive,
cave or cave ne with
lie !
the Subjunctive
;
as,
—
noli
hoc faoere, donH do
this (lit. be unwilling to do)
!
nolite mentiri, do not
pity!
cave ignoscas, cave t6 misereat, do not cave ne haec you do)
!
forgive, do not
facias, do not do this
(lit.
take care
lest
D. Deliberative Subjunctive. 277.
The
Deliberative Subjunctive
is
used in questions
and exclamations implying doubt, indignation, the imposThe Present is nbility of an act, obligation, or propriety.
178
SYNTAX.
used referring to present time, the Imperfect referring
to past.
The
negative
is
non.
Thus
:
—
quid faciam, -what shall I do ? ego redeam, I go back huic oedamus bujus condiciones audiamus are we bow to Mm! are we to listen to his terms I quid f acerem, what was I to do f huuc ego non diligam, should I not cherish this man f
!
!
to
a.
These Deliberative Questions are usually purely Rhetorical acter, and do not expect an answer. E. Concessive Subjunctive.
in
char
is used to indicate something as granted or conceded for the sake of argument. The Present is used for present time, the Perfect regularly for past. The negative is ne Thus
278.
The
Subjunctive
:
—
is
sit
hoc vSrum, I grant
that this
true
(lit. let
this be true)
;
ne sint in senectiite vires, I grant there is not strength in old age fuerit malus oivis aliis; tibi quando esse coepit, I grant that he was a bad citizen to others; when did he begin to be so towardyout
\
OPTATIVE SUBJUNCTIVE. The Optative Subjunctive occurs in wishing. The negative is regularly ne.
279.
1
expressions of
The
is
the wish
Present Tense, often accompanied by utinam, conceived of as possible.
is
used where
di istaec prohibeant,
falsus
may
the gods prevent that!
utinam vates sim, oh
that
I may
be a false prophet
ne veniant, may
2.
they not conu
The Imperfect
expresses, in the form of a wish, the regret that
;
something is not so
the past.
;
now
the Pluperfect that something
was
not so in
The
utinam as, utinam istud ex animo diceres, would
earnest
(i.e. I
—
Imperfect and Pluperfect are regularly accompanied by
that
you were saying
it
that in
regret that you are not saying
in earnest)
Pelides utinam vitasset Apollinis arctis, would that Achilles hai
escaped the bow of Apollo utinam ne natus essem. would that I had not been
born.
THE POTENTIAL SUBJUNCTIVE.
POTENTIAL SUBJUNCTIVE.
280.
1
79
The
Potential Subjunctive expresses a possibility.
:
The negative is non. The following uses are to be noted 1. The 'May' Potential. — The Potential Subjunctive may designate u
—
mere
possibility (English
Perfect occur,
auxiliary may). Both Present and and without appreciable difference of meaning. Thus dicat aliquis, sojiie one may say ; dizerit aliqviis, some one may say.
:
—
a.
This construction is by no means frequent, and is confined mainly to a few phrases like those given as examples.
'
2.
'
Should '-' Would
Potential.
— The
Potential
Subjunctive
may
upon a condition expressed or understood (English auxiliary should, would). Both Present and Perfect occur, and without appreciable difference of meaning. Thus
represent something as depending
:
—
fortunam citius reperias
Fortune than keep
credlderim, /should
a.
,
quam retineas, one would more quickly find
one should make the
trial)
;
it (i.e. if
believe.
Here belongs the use of velim, malim, nolim, as softened
Thus velim mihi ignoscas, / wish you would forgive me ; nolim putes me jooari, / don't want you to think Ptn joking.
:
.
forms of statement for volo, malo, nolo.
—
b.
When
the condition
is
expressed,
we
get one of the regular
;
types of Conditional Sentences (see § 303)
as,
—
dies deficiat, si coner enumerare causas, time would
fail if I should attempt to enumerate the reasons.
3.
'
Can '-' Could Potential.
'
Potential occurs in the
§ 3561
In the Present and Imperfect the second person singular (with indefinite force
—
3) of a few verbs oi perceiving, seeing, thinking,
and the
5
like
;
as,
—
;
videas, cernas, one can
videres, cerneres,
see,
one can perceive
crederes, one could believe
otie
could see, perceive
putares, one could imagine.
4-
The Imperfect and
Pluperfect in the Apodosis of conditional
sentences of the contrary-to-fact type (see § 304) are also Potential iu character. By omission of "the Protasis, such an Apodosis sometimes
stands alone, particularly
vellem, nollem, mallem
;
as,
—
vellem id quidem, / should wish that
enough)
(i.e.
were
I
bold
l8o
SYNTAX.
Tbe Imperative.
281. The Imperative is used in commands, admonitions, and entreaties (negative ne) as,
;
—
egredere ex urbe, depart from the mibi ignosce, pardon me
val§, farewell.
1
city
The
a)
Present
is
is
the tense of the Imperative most
hut the Future
employed
there
is
—
commonly
used,
Where
a distinct reference to future time,
;
in the apodosis of conditional sentences
as,
—
especially
rem vobTs proponam
;
vos earn penditote, I will
lay the
matter before you ; do you {then) consider it; SI bene disputabit, tribuito litteris Graecis, if he speak well, attribute it to Greek literature.
b) In laws, treaties, wills,
shall
maxims,
etc.
;
as,
—
consules summum jus habento, the consuls shall have supreme power hominem mortuom in urbe ne sepelito, no one shall bury a dead body in the city amicitia regi Antiocho cum populo Romano bis Iggibus et condicionibus esto, let there be friendship between Antiochus and the Roman people on the following terms and conditions quartae esto partis Marcus beres, let Marcus be heir to
;
u fourth (of the property) ignoscito saepe alteri, numquam V^i, forgive your
;
neigh-
bor often, yourself never.
2.
Except with the Future Imperative the negative
b.
is
not used
in
dassical prose.
Prohibitions are regularly expressed in other ways.
See § 276,
3.
Questions in the Indicative introduced by quin {why
not?") are
often equivalent to an Imperative or to the Hortatory Subjunctive; as,—
quin abis, go away I (lit. why don't you go away ?) quin vocem continetis, keep still'. {\it. why donH you stop your
;
voices f)
;
quin equos conscendimus, iiot mount our horses T).
let
us mount our horses
(lit.
why
do
ivt
CLAUSES OF PURPOSE.
l8l
MOODS
IN
DEPENDENT CLAUSES.
Clauses of Purpose.
282. I. Clauses of Purpose are introduced most commonly by ut (utr), quo {that, in order that), ne (in order that not, lest), and stand in the Subjunctive; as,
edimus ut vivamus, we eat that we may
adjuta
live
me quo hoc
fiat facilius, help me, in order that this
may
be
done more easily
portaz clausit, ne
quam oppidanf
rule, is
the gates, lest the townspeople should receive
a.
injuriam acciperent, he closed any injury.
Occasional
Quo, as a
employed only when the purpose clause
contains a comparative or a comparative idea.
exceptions occur; as,
haec faciunt quo Chremetem absterreaut, they ar.e doing
this in
b.
order to frighten Chremes.
TJt
ne
is
sometimes found instead of ne.
Thus:
—
ut ne quid ueglegenter agamus, in order that we may not do anything carelessly.
c.
Vt non
Thus
:
(not ne)
is
used where the negation belongs to some
single word, instead of to the purpose clause as a whole.
—
ut non ejectus ad alienos, sed invitatus ad tuos videare, that you
but invited to your
d.
may seem not driven own friends.
not
as,
^
out
among strangers,
To
say
uses
and that neve (neu)
'
;
—
or
'
or that
not,^
the Latin regularly
ut earum rerum vTs minueretur, neu pontT nocerent, that the violence of these things might be lessened, and
that they might not
harm
the bridge
profugit,
ne oaperetur neve
(for
interficeretur, he fled, that he
might not be captured or
c.
killed.
/
sometimes used in a second Purpose Clause and, after the Augustan era, even when the first clause is introduced by ne. Purpose Clauses sometimes stand in apposition with a preceding noun or pronoun as, t— But
is
neque
neve)
when ut
stands in the
first,
;
hac causa, ut pacem baberent,
have peace.
on this account, that they might
1
82
2.
SYNTAX.
A
Relative Pronoun (qui) or
Adverb (udi, unde, quo)
;
quently used to introduce a Purpose Clause
as,
—
is fre-
Helvetii legates mittunt, qui dicerent, the Helvetii sent envoys to say (lit. who should say) haec habui, de senectute quae dioerem, / had these things to say
\
about old age
aon babebant quo se reciperent,
(lit.
they
had no place
is,
to
which
to flee
whither they might flee).
in such clauses
is
a.
Qui
ibi
;
equivalent to
;
unde
to
ut inde
quo
to
ut ut eo.
ut ego,
etc.
-•
ubl
to
ut
3.
Relative Clauses of purpose follow diguus, indignus, and ido;
neus
as,
-*'
idoneus fuit nemo quern imitarere, there was no one suitable for you to imitate (cf. nemo fuit quern imitarere, there was no one for you to imitate) dignus est qui aliquando imperet, he is worthy to rule sometime.
;
4. Purpose Clauses often depend upon something to be supplied from the context instead of upon the principal verb of their own sen-
tences
;
as,
—
ut haec omnia omittam, abiimus,
that)
to
pass over
all this, {I mill say
we
departed.
Clauses of Characteristic.
283.
I.
A
characteristic
used to express a quality of a general or indefinite antecedent is called of
relative clause
a
Clause of
Characteristic,
as,
and usually stands
there are
in
the
Subjunctive;
multa sunt, quae mentem aouant,
sharpen the wits.
many
things which
Clauses of Characteristic are opposed to those relative clauses which
are used merely to state
some
fact
;
about a definite antecedent, and
as,
which therefore take the Indicative
—
Cato, senex jucundus, qui Sapiens appellatuB est, Cato, a ful old man, who was called The Wise.''
'
delight-
The
who
Clause of Characteristic implies
;
'
a person of the
'
sort that doei
something''
the Indicative relative clause implies
a particular person
does something.''
CLAUSES OF CHARACTERISTIC.
2.
183
as,
est qui
;
qui
Clauses of Characteristic are used especially after such expressions sunt qui nemo est qui nullus est qui unus est solus est qui quis est qui is qui etc. Thus
; ; ; ; ; ;
; :
—
nemo
sunt qui dicant, there are (some) who say est qui nesciat, there is nobody who is ignorant
sapientia est ana
only
quae maestitiam pellat, philosophy is the away sorrow quae civitas est quae non everti possit, what state is there
thing that drives
that
cannot De overthrown ?
noa
is
sum
qui improbos laudem, /
rarely in Cicero
;
am
not the sort of man that
praises the wicked.
u.
Someiimes (very
tic is
and Caesar)
used
after
comparatives
as,
—
the clause of characteris-
non longius hostes aberant quam quo telum
iAe
adigri posset,
{lit further
enemy were not
off than \a p&iaf\ to
3.
far off for a dart to reacfi them which a dart could be cast).
too
The Clause of
a) Cause.
Characteristic often conveys an accessory notion
of cause (since) or
opposition (although).
relative is
;
Thus:
—
The
quippe, utpote
as,
—
then frequently accompanied by ut,
o fortunate adulescens, qui tuae virtutis Homerum praeconem inveneris, O fortunate man, since you have found a Ho?ner as the herald of your valor; ut qui Optimo jure earn provinciam obtinuerit, since
he held that province by excellent right.
b) Opposition
:
—
litteras attigissem,
egomet qui sero Graecas
tamen
compliires dies Athenis commoratus sum, /, although I had taken up Greek literature late in life,
nevertheless tarried several days at Athens.
4.
Clauses of Characteristic
;
quod) non as, nemo est quin saepe
(quae,
—
may
also be introduced
by quin
=
qui
audierit, there
is
no one who has not often
heard
nemo
5.
militum quin vulneraretur, there was no one of the soldiers who was not wounded.
fuit
Related to Clauses of Characteristic are also phrases of the type
so
quod Bciam,
far as I know, quem (quam, quod), audierim,
so
far as I have heard.
184
SYNTAX.
Clauses of Result.
284.
I.
Clauses of Result are usually introduced bynt
negative ut non {so that not), and take the The main clause often contains tantns, talis,
adeo, or
{that, so thai),
Subjunctive.
tot, is
(=
:
talis), tarn, ita, sic,
some
similar word.
Thus
quis tain
Sicilian!
as to
est ut sua voluutate maereat, who is so senseless mourn of his own volition f ita vastavit ut restitui in antiquum statum non posBit,
demens
he so ravaged Sicily that
condition
it
cannot be restored to
its
former
mons
altissimus impendebat, ut facile perpauci prohibere
sent, a very high mountain overhung, so that a very few
easily stop
poBcould
non
is es
them ut te pudor
umquam
is
a turpitiidine avoo^rit, you are not
called you back from baseness.
or
so constituted that
2.
shame ever
A
Result Clause
(
oftea introduced by a Relative Pronoun
(
;
Adverb, qui
=
ut
is),
qu5
nemo
est
is
tam senex qui
= ut eo), etc. as, — se annum non putet posse vivere, nobody
habetis
a year; qui parere vestrTs decretis non dubitet, you have a consul such as does not hesitate to obey your decrees.
so old as not to think he can live
eum consulem
a.
These Relative Clauses of Result are closely related to the Clause of Characteristic, and sometimes it is difficult to distinguish the two constructions.
It is
best to class the relative clause as
is
one of Characteristic,
unless the result idea
3.
clear
and unmistakable.
Result clauses
may
also be introduced
by quin
=
ut non
;
as,—
nihil
tam
is
difBcile est
quiu quaerendo investigan possit,
it
nothing
so difficult that
cannot be discovered by searching;
nemo
est
tam
fortis
steadfast
quiu rei novitate perturbetur, no one is so as not to be thrown into confusion by a strange
occurrence.
4.
after
Note the use of comparatives as,
;
—
quam
ut (sometimes
quam
alone) to denote
Result
urbe erat manitior
quam
ut primo impeta capi posset, tlu
(lit.
city
was
toi
strongly fortified to be taken at the first attack than [sol that it could be taken, etc.).
more
strongly
firtifiii
CAUSAL CLAUSES.
Causal Clauses.
285.
iSj
Causal clauses are introduced chiefly by the
:
lowing particles
—
fol-
1.
Quod, quia, quouiam.
2.
3.
Cum.
Quando.
:
The use of moods is as follows Quod, quia, quoniam take the Indicative when the I. reason is that of the writer or speaker ; they take the Sub286.
—
junctive
when
the reason
is
viewed as that of another.
Thus
:
Farthos timeo quod diffido copiis nostris, I fear the Partkians, because I distrust our troops. Themistooles, quia non tutus erat, Corcyram demigravit, Themistocles, since
Deque
me
he was not safe, moved to Corcyra. vixisse paeuitet, quoniam bene vixT, / do not regret
having lived, since I have lived well. SCorates accusatus est quod corrumperet juventutem, Socrates was arraigned on the ground that he was corrupting the young. (Here the reason is not that of the writer but of the, accuser.
Hence the Subjunctive.) Haedui Caesari gratias egerunt quod se perioulo liberavisset, the Haedui thanked Caesar because he had delivered them from (The reason of the Haedui.) danger. quoniam Miltiades dicere non posset, verba pro eo fecit Tisagoras, since Miltiades could not speak, Tisagoras spoke for
him. (The reason of Tisagoras.) noctu ambulabat Themistooles, quod somnum oapere non pos. set, Themistocles used to walk at 'night because (as he said) he
couldn't sleep.
a.
in causal clauses as
Verbs of thinking and saying often stand in the Subjunctive though the act of thinking or saying,
and not the contents of the thought or language, constituted
the reason.
Thus
:
—
Bellovaci
suum numerum non compleverunt quod sS suo nomine cum Romanis bellum gestures dicerent, the Bellovaci did not furnish their complement.
r86
SYNTAX.
because they said they were going to
wage war with
tht
Romans on
b.
their
own
account.
attraction for
;
Won
quod, non quo (by
quia, not that, not because
non eo quod), non and non quod non, non quo
.
non, non quin, not that-. not; not because .not; not but that, are usually employed merely to introduce a hypothetical reason, and hence take the Subjunctive as, —
. .
. .
;
id feci,
non quod vos banc defensionem desiderSre arbitrarer, sed ut omnes intellegerent, this I did not because I thought you needed this defense, but that all
might perceive
Crasso commendationem non sum pollioitus, non quIn earn valituram apud te arbitrarer, sed egere mihi commendatione non videbatur, / did not promise a
recommendation to Crassus, not that
to
c.
I did
not think
it
would have weight with you, but because he did not
seem
me
to
need recommendation.
But clauses introduced by non quod, non quia take the Indicative if they state a fact, even though that fact is denied to be the reason for something as,
;
—
hoc
ita sentio, non quia sum ipse augur, sed quia sic existimare nos est necease, this I think, not because 1 am myself an augur {which I really am), but because it
is
necessary for us to think so.
as,
2.
Cum
causal regularly takes the Subjunctive;
is
—
quae cum
ita sint, since this
so
since
cum
sis mortalis,
quae mortalia sunt, cura, care for what is m.ortal.
a.
you are
mortal,
Note
the phrase
;
cum
especially since
as,
—
praesertim
(praesertim cum),
ad-
HaeduoB accusat, praesertim cum eorum precibus
ductus bellum susceperit, he blamed the Haedui, especially since he had undertaken the war at their
entreaties.
3.
Quando
;
(less frequent
as,
the Indicative
—
than the other causal particles) governs
id omitto,
wish.
quando vobis
ita placet,
/ pass
over that, since you
se
CLAUSES WITH POSTQUAM, UBI, ETC.
1
87
Temporal Clauses introduced by Postquam, Ut, Ubl,
Simul
a,c,
etc.
287. I. Postquam (posteaquam), after ; ut, ubi, when; cum primum, simul, simul ao (simul atque), as soon as, when used to refer to a single past act regularly take the Perfect
Indicative
;
as,
—
'
Epaminondas postquam audivit vicisse Boeotios, Satis inquit vixi,' Epaminondas, after he heard that the Boeotians had conquered, said, / have lived enough id ut audivit, Corcyram demigravit, when he heard this, he nwvedto
'
'
'
'
Corcyra
Caesar
cum primum
potuit,
soon as he could, hurried to the
ad exercitum contendit, army
Caesar, as
ubi de Caesaris adventu certiores facti sunt, legates ad eum mittunt, when they were informed of Caesar''s arrival, they sent envoys to him.
a.
The
Historical Present
may
take the place of the Perfect in this con-
struction.
2.
To
denote the repeated occurrence of an
act, ut, ubi,
ten.se,
simul
atque, as often as,
perfect Indicative
when
following an historical
3
;
take the Plu-
(compare §§ 288,
302, 3)
;
as,
ut quisque Verrls
animum
offenderat, in lautumias statim coniVerres''s feelings,
cieb§tur, whenever anybody had offended was forthwith put in the stone-quarry
hostes,
he
ubi aliquos egredientes conspe:serant, adoriebantur, whenever the enemy had seen any meti disembarking, they
attacked them.
a.
In Livy and succeeding historians the Imperfect and Pluperfect Subjunctive are used to denote this repeated occurrence of an act (' Indefinite
Frequency
')
;
as,
id ubl dixlsset hurled a spear.
3.
hastam mltt§bat,
whenever he had said
that,
he
Occasionally the above conjunctions are followed by the PluperIndicative of a single occurrence.
in expressions
etc.'),
:
fect
postquam
postquam.
months, years,
Thus
—
This is regularly the case with denoting a definite interval of time (days, such as post tertium annum quam, triennio
1 88
SYNTAX.
quinque post diebus quam Iiuca discesserat, ad Sardinian! veuit, five days after he had departed from Liica he came to Sar-
postquam occupatae Syracusae
ginem, after Syracuse had been
4.
erant, profectus est Carthaseized, he set out for Carthage.
occurs, to denote a continued
The Imperfect
Indicative also sometimes
state ; as,
—
postquam
Eomam adventabant, senatus consultus est,
stabant,
after they
after they were
on the march toward Rome, the Senate was consulted;
postquam strtlcti utrimque
sides
5.
had been drawn up on
both
and were
in position,
Rarely
postquam, posteaquam,
following the analogy of
;
cum,
take
the Subjunctive, but only in the historical tenses
as,
-
posteaquam sumptuosa
after fimerals
fieri fflnera
had begun
to be elaborate, they
coepissent, lege sublata sunt, were done away with by law.
Temporal Clauses introduced by Cum.
A.
Cum
REFERRING TO THE PAST.
to the past, takes,
288.
I.
Cum, when referring
—
A, The Indicative (Imperfect, Historical Perfect, or
Pluperfect) to denote the point of time at which something occurs.
B, The Subjunctive (Imperfect or Pluperfect) to denote the situation or circumstances under which something
occurs.
Examples
Indicative.
:
—
an tum eras consul, cum in Falatio mea domus ardebat, or were you consul at the time when my house burned up on the Palatine f
credo tum
cum Sicilia florgbat opibus et copiis fuisse in ea insula, / believe that at the time
island i
magna
when
artificia
Sicily
was
that
powerful in riches and resources there were great crafts in
eo tempore paruit
cum
parere necesse erat, he obeyed at the timt
when
illo dig,
it
was
necessary to obey
cum
est lata lex
de me, on
that day
when
the
law
concern'
ing
me was passed.
CUM-CLAUSES.
Subjunctive.
1 89
Lysander
cum
vellet Lycurgi leggs
commutare, prohibituB
est,
•when Lysander desired to change the laws of Lycurgus, he
was
prevented I
Pythagoras
cum in geometria quiddam novi invenisset, Musis bovem immolasse dioitur, when Pythagoras had discovered
something
the Muses.
a.
new
in geometry, he is said to
have
sacrificed
an ox
to
Note
that the Indicative
is
much
is
less frequent in
such clauses
than the Subjunctive, and
regularly confined to those cases
where the main clause has turn, eo die, eo anno, eo tempore or some similar correlative of the cum. Sometimes it depends entirely upon the point of view of the writer whether he shall employ the Indicative or Subjunctive.
2.
Cum
we
Inversum.
find
When
the logical order of the clauses
is
inverted,
in the
cum
with the Perfect Indicative or Historical Present,
sense of when,
when
suddenly.
The main
as,
often has
jam, vix, aegre,
nondum
;
—
clause in such cases
jam Galli
ex. oppido fugere apparabant, cum matres familiae repente procurrerunt, the Gauls were already preparing to flee, when suddenly the matrons rushed forth (logically, the matrons rushed forth as the Gauls were preparing to flee) TrevirT Labienum adoriri parabant, cum duas legiones venisse cognoscunt, the Treviri were preparing to attack, when {suddenly') they learned that two legions had arrived.
;
3.
To denote a recurring action in the past, cum is followed by the Inof the Pluperfect (compare §§ 287, 2
;
dicative, particularly
302, 3)
;
as,
—
cum ad aliquod oppidum
venerat,
eSdem
lectTca ad cubiculum
deferebatur, whenever he had arrived at some town, he was
{always) carried in the same
litter to his
room
cum
equitatus noster se in agros ejecerat, essedarios ex silvis gmittebat, whenever our cavalry had advanced into the fields, he would send his charioteers out from the woods.
a.
Sometimes the Imperfect or Pluperfect Subjunctive
is
thus used
;
as,
—
videret minus bene vestitum, suum amlculum dedit, often, whenever he saw some one more poorly clothed, he gave him his own mantle ; cum procucurrissent, Numldae effuglebant, as often as thtf had advanced, the Numidians ran away. This construction is frequent in Livy and subsequent historians.
saepe
cum aliquem
I90
B.
SYNTAX.
Oum
REFERRING TO THE PRESENT OR FUTURE.
refers to the Present or
289.
When cum
larly takes the Indicative; as,
—
Future
own
it
regu-
turn tua res agitur, paries
cum proximus
see,
ardet, your
is
interests
are at stake when your neighbor's house
oum
videbis, turn scies, when you
u.
burning; then you will know.
The
Indicative of the Present or Future
may
denote also a recurring
action; as,
Btabilitas amicitiae confirmari potest,
cum homines
ou-
pidinibus imperabunt, ^rm friendship can whenever men shall control their desires.
C.
be established
Other Uses op Cum.
290. I. Cum Explicative. Cum, with the Indicative, is sometimes used to indicate the identity of one act with another as,
;
—
cum
2.
tacent clamant, their
silent, they
silence is
a shout
(lit.
when
they are
shout)
Cum
.
.
.
turn.
is
When cum
;
.
.
.
the cum-clause
while, though,
it
in the Indicative
but
;
turn mean both when cum has the
.
.
.
and,
may
take the Subjunctive
as,
—
force oi
cum
te semper dilezerim, turn tuis factis incensus sum, while I have always loved you, at the same time I am stirred by your
conduct.
Clauses introduced
A.
by Antequam and Priusqnam.
Indicative.
.
.
With the
Antequam and priusquam (often written ante quam) take the Indicative to denote an qaam, prius
291.
.
.
.
.
actual fact.
1
Sometimes the Present or Future Perfect
;
as,
—
in
prius respondes
nihil
quam
rogo, you answer before
I ask
contra disputabo priusquam dizerit, / will say nothing
opposition, before he speaks.
2.
Sometimes the
Perfect, especially after negative clauses; as,
n5n prius jugulandi
finis fult,
quam
Sulla
omnes suos
divitiis
explevit, there was no end of murder until Sulla his henchmen with wealth.
satisfied
aU
CLAUSES WITH DUM, DONEC, ETC.
B.
I9I
With the
Subjunctive.
292.
Antequam and priusquam take the Subjunctive
to
denote an act as anticipated.
1.
Thus the Subjunctive may denote
a)
—
act takes place
est,
i.e.
;
An
act in preparation for
which the main
as,
—
priusquam dimicarent, foedus ictum
tion
in anticipa-
of the fight, a treaty -was struck.
this usage, the
By an extension of
truths,
Subjunctive
;
is
sometimes used of general
where the anticipatory notion has faded out
as,
—
tempest&s minatur antequam surgat,
6)
the tempest threatens before it rises.
;
An
act anticipated
and
forestalled
as,
^
priusquam telum adici posset, omnis acies terga vertit, before a spear could be hurled, the whole army fled,
c)
An act anticipated and deprecated animum omittunt priusquam
rather than quit their post.
;
as,
—
they
die
is
loop demigrent,
2.
After historical tenses the Imperfect Subjunctive
used, espe-
cially
by some
writers,
where the notion of anticipation has practically
vidlt
vanished; as,
sol
antequam se abderet fugientem it set saw Antony fleeing.
Clauses introduced by
Antonium, the sun before
Bnm^ Donee, Quoad
Indicative of
293.
I.
Dum,
wAiie, regularly takes the
the Historical Present ; as,
—
Alexander,
dum
inter primores pugnat, sagittS ictus est, Alex-
ander, while he
dum haec
II.
was fighting in the van, was struck by an arrow geruntur, in fines Venellorum perveuit, while these things were being done, he arrived in the territory of the Venelli.
Dum, donee, and quoad, as long
as,
take the Indica-
tive; as,
dum anima est, spes est, as long as there is life, there is hope Laoedaemoniorum gens fortis fuit, dum Lyciirgi leges vigebant, the race of the Lacedaemonians was powerful, as long as the
Oato,
quoad
laws of Lycurgus were in force; visit, virtiitum laude crevit, Cato, as long as he
increased in the
lived,
fame of
his virtues.
192
III.
1.
SYNTAX.
Dum, donee, and quoad,
rediit, fuit silentinm, there
until,
take
:
—
as,
.The Indicative, to denote an actual event ;
was
silence till he catne
—
donee
ferrum in eorpore
the Boeotians
a.
retiuuit,
vicisse, he kept the iron
quoad renuntiatum est Boeotida in his body until word was brought thai
had conquered.
In Livy and subsequent historians and donee in take the Subjunctive instead of the Indicative as,
;
dum
—
this sense often
trepidatlonls aliquantum edebant donee timer quletem fecisset, they showed some trepidation, until fear produced quiet.
2.
The
tancy; as,
—
Subjunctive,
to
denote anticipation or
expec-
ezspeetavit Caesar
dum
naves convenirent, Caesar waitedfor the
the letter to come.
ships to assemble
dum
litterae veniant,
morabor, I shall wait for
Substantive Clauses.
Substantive Clause is one which as a whole serves as the Subject or Object of a verb, or stands in some other case relation.
294.
A
A. Substantive Clauses developed from the Volitive.
295.
Substantive Clauses Developed from the Volitive
:
are used with the following. classes of verbs
I
.
—
With verbs
etc.
signifying
to
admonish, request, command, urge, per;
suade, induce,^
(conjunctions ut, ne, or ut ne)
as,
—
postulo ut
orat,
fiat,
/ demand that
let it
it
;
be
done (dependent form
of the
Jussive fiat,
be done .')
ne abeas, he begs that you will not go away; milites oohortatus est ut hostium impetum sustinerent, he exhorted his soldiers to withstand the attack of the enemy Helvetiis persuasit ut exirent, he persuaded the Helvetii to march
forth.
a.
Jubeo, command,
order, regularly takes the Infinitive.
1
Especially:
flaglto;
moneo, admoneo; rogo, oro, peto, postulS, precor, mando, impero, pr"eclplo- suade hortor, eohortor: per>,
auadeo, impello.
SUBSTANTIVE CLAUSES.
2.
I93
etc.
With verbs
;
junction ut)
as,
—
signifying to grant, concede, permit, allow^
(con-
huic
conoedo ut ea praetereat, / allow him
ent form of
tlie
to
pass that by (depend-
Jussive ea praetereat,
let
him pass
that by
.')
;
cousuli
permissum est ut duas legioues
to enroll
scriberet, the consul
was
permitted
3.
two
legions.
etc.
Witii verbs
;
of hindering, preventing^
s«,
quominus, quiu)
—
(conjunctions ne,
ne lustrum perficeret, mors prohibuit, death prevented him from finishing the lustrum (dependent form after past tense of ne
lustrum
prohibuit
perficiat,
let
him
not finish,
etc.")
;
quominus in unum
coirent, he prevented them from combe prevented
ing together
nee quin erumperet, prohiberi poterat, nor could he
from rushingforth.
a.
used only when the verb of hindering is accompanied by a a. question implying a negative it is not necessarily used even then.
is
Quin
negative, or stands in
;
4.
Witli verbs of deciding, resolving^
;
etc.
(conjunctions ut, ne, or
ut ne)
as,
constitueram' ut pridie Idus AquTni manerem, I had decided to remain at Aquirium on the 12th; decrevit senatus ut Opimius videret, the Senate decreed that Opimius should see to it convenit ut unis castris miscerentur, it was agreed that they should be united in one camp.
;
.
With verbs of striving,^ etc. (conjunctions
ut, ne, or
ut ne)
;
as,
—
eum exores, see to it that you prevail upon him I cura ut vir sis, see to it that you are a man laborabat ut reliquas oivitates adjungeret, he was striving the remaining states to him.
fac ut
u,.
to join
Conor,
try,
always takes the
Iniinitive.
Note.
poetry.
— Verbs of
:
all
the above classes also admit the Infinitive, especially in
1
Especially
2 Especially:
• <
Especially
:
Especially:
permitto, concedo, non patior. prohibeo, impedio, deterreo. constituo, decerns, censeo, placuit, convenit, paciscor. laboro, do operam, id ago, contends, impetro.
194
6.
SYNTAX.
With a few other
expressions, such as
;
est, sequitur, licet,
oportet
as,
—
necesse
to
est,
reliquum
sequitur ut doceam,
licet redeas, you
it
remains for me
shawi
may return oportet loquamur, we must speak.
i
On
the absence of ut with licet
and oportet, see paragraph
8.
7.
Here
;
also belong phrases of the type: nulla
quin
non
est cur,
etc. ;
nihil est cur,
etc. ; as,
—
causa est
cur,
nulla causa est cur timeam, tkere
(originally Deliberative
:
nihil est
8.
quin dicam, there
is
is no reason why J should fear why should Ifear ? There''s no reason) no reason why I should not say.
;
Many
of the above classes of verbs at times talce the simple Sub-
junctive without ut.
In such cases
we must not
recognize any omis-
sion of ut, but simply an earlier form of expression which existed
before the ut-clause arose.
est, licet,
and oportet
;
see 6.
This is regularly the case with necesse Other examples are
:
—
eos moneo deainant, / warn them to stop huic imperat adeat civitates, he orders him
to visit the states.
S,
Substantive Clauses developed from the Optative.
396. Substantive Clauses
Developed from the Optative
occur
1
:
With verbs
of wishing; desiring, especially cupio, opto, vol5,
;
malo
(conjunctions ut, ne, ut ne)
as,
opto ut in hoc judicio nemo improbus reperiatur, / hope that in this court no bad man may be found (here ut reperiatur represents a simple optative of direct statement, viz. reperiatur, may no bad man be found'.) cupio ne veniat, / desire that he may not come.
;
u.
The
this
class.
simple Subjunctive (without ut) sometimes occurs with verbs o) (See § 295, 8.) Examples are: velim scribas, / wish
written.
you would write ; vellem scripslsset, / wish he had
2.
With expressions of fearing (timeo, metuo, vereor, Here ne means that, lest, and ut means that not ; as,
—
etc.).
timeo ne veniat, I fear that he will come
come'.
(originally:
may
he not
Pm
afraid \he wiliy)
;
timeo ut veniat, I fear that he will not come
cornel
(originally:
may
lu
Pm afraid
\he won'i']^.
SUBSTANTIVE CLAUSES.
a.
195
Ne nou sometimes occurs instead of ut, especially where the verb of /taring has a negative, or where the writer desires to emphasize some particular word in the dependent clause as,
;
non vereor ne hoc non
happen ;
flat, [
am
not afraid thai this will not
that
vereor ne exercitum firmum habere non possit, I fear he is unable (non possit) to have a strong army.
C.
Substantive Clauses of Result.
ut,
297.
Substantive Clauses of Result (introduced by
ut non) are
a development of pure Result clauses, and
:
occur with the following classes of words
1
.
—
As
object clauses after verbs of doing, accomplishing (especially
facts, efBcio, conficiS).
Thus:
—
gravitas
morbi facit ut medicina egeamus, the makes us need medicine.
severity
of disease
2.
As
the subject of several impersonal verbs, particularly
fit,
effici-
tur, accidit, evenit, contingit, accedit, fieri potest, fore,
ttir,
relinquitur.
efficitur,
Thus
:
—
sequi-
ex quo
ita
fit,
ut voluptas non
sit
summum
bonnm,/n7»2 which
it follows
that pleasure is not the greatest good;
ut nemo esse possit beatus, thus it happens that no one can happy ; accSdebat ut naves deessent, another thing was the lack of ships (lit. it was added that ships were lacking')
be
3.
est,
As predicate or appositive afjer expressions like jus est, mos consuetudo est; ^so after neuter pronouns, hoc, illud, etc.
:
Thus
est
—
mos hominum ut
it is
nSlint
eundem
pluribus rebud ezcellere,
the
way of men
not to wish the same person to excel in
many
D.
298.
things.
Substantive Clauses introduced by
<^VLin.
Substantive Clauses introduced by quin (used sometimes as subject, sometimes as object) occur after negative and interrogative expressions of doubt, omission, and the
like,
particularly after
non dubits, / do not doubt ;
quia
ig6
"
SYNTAX.
dubitat,
doubt.
who doubts f ; non (haud) dubium est, there The mood is the Subjunctive. Examples
:
—
is.
no
quis dubitat quin in virtute divitiae Bint, who doubts that in virtm
there are riches f
aon dubium erat quin venturua esset, was about to come.
a.
there
was no doubt
that he
In Nepos, Livy, and post-Augustan writers an Infinitive sometimes takes the place of the quin-clause after non dubito as,
;
—
non dubitamus Inventos esse, we do not doubt that men were fount.
b.
Non
dubito, / do not hesitate, is regularly followed by the though sometimes by a qtun-clause.
Infinitive,
JE7.
Substantive Clauses Introduced by QvLod.
299.
tive
I.
Quod, the fact
that, that, introduces
Substan-
Clauses in the Indicative.
especially
—
This construction occurs
d) In apposition with a preceding demonstrative, as hoc, illud, ilia, ex eo, inde, etc. Thus
:
—
id,
illud est admiratione dignum,
quod captTvos
retinen-
dos censuit,
this
is
especially
worthy of admiration,
feris,
that he thought the prisoners ought to be kept
hoc uno praestamus vel mazime
mur
b) After
etc.
;
inter nos, in this one respect
quod coUoqui-. we are especially
facere, miror,
superior to the beasts, that
we
talk with each other.
fit,
bene
as,
—
fit,
bene
accidit,
'
male
bene
bene mibi evenit, quod mittor ad mortem,
for me that I am sent
to
it
is
well
death
bene
2.
fecisti
quod
mansisti, you did well in remaining.
Quod
at the beginning of the sentence
of as regards the fact that.
Thus
:
—
sometimes has the
force
quod multitudinem Germanorum in Galliam trtduco, id mei muniendi causa faoio, as regards the fact that I am transporting a multitude of Germans into Gaul, I am doing it for
the sake
of strengthening myself i
putSs, falleria, as regards yout
mistaken.
quod me Agamemnona aemulari
thinking that
I emulate Agamemnon, you are
SUBSTANTIVE CLAUSES.
F. Indirect Questions.
300.
I.
197
Indirect Questions are Substantive Clauses used
after verbs of asking, inquirmg, telling,
take their verb in the Subjunctive.^
(see § 162)
a)
they
may be
introduced
—
and the like. They Like Direct Questions
as,
By
Interrogative Pronouns or Adverbs
;
—
were,
fluat Arar,
die mihi nbi fueris, quid feceris,
tell
me where you
what you did;
oculis judicarT
it
n5n potest
in
utram partem
cannot be determined by the eye in which direction the
Arar flows bis bina quot assent, nesciebat, he did not
know how
many two
Note.
^
times two were.
— Care
:
should be taken to distinguish Indirect Questions
from Relative Clauses.
in the following
—
The
difference
between the two appears
clearly
effugere
is
nemo id
potest quod futurum est, no one can escape what
;
destined to come to pass
not even
but
but often
Baepe autem ne utile
it is
quidem est scire quid futurum sit, useful to know what is cojning to pass.
;
b)
By num or -ne, without distinction of meaning Epamlnondas quaesivit uum salvus esset
his shield
as,
—
clipeus, or
salvusne esset clipeus, Epaminondas asked whether
was
safe
disputatur
question
num
is
interire virtiis in
homine
possit, the
raised whether virtue can die in a
ez Socrate quaesitum
est
man nonne Archelaum beatum
putaret, the question was asked of Socrates whether he did not thi7ik Archelaus happy.
Note.
— Nonne in Indirect Questions occurs only
as,
after
quaero, asinthelasi
example above.
'2.
Often the Indirect Question represents a Deliberative Subjunctive
;
of the direct discourse
—
pi
to do.
neaoio quid ia-cinta, / do not know what
(Direct: quia'faciam,
what
1
shall
I do .')
sidera.
desires
Exclamations, also, upon becoming indirect, take the Subjunctive, as convariae sint hominum cupidlnes, consider how varied are thk
quam
of men.
(Direct
:
quam variae sunt hominum
oupidines I)
198
SYNTAX.
3. After verbs of exfectation and endeavor (exspeoto, conor, ezperior, tempto) we sometimes find an Indirect Question intro-
duced by
SI
;
as,
—
conantur
si
perrumpere possint,
they try whether they can break
through.
a.
Sometimes the governing verb
is
omitted
;
as,
permit ad
thither.
proximam speluncam
si
forte eo vestigia
fer-
rent, he proceeded
to the nearest cave (to see)
if the tracks lei
4.
Indirect Double Questions are introduced
particles as direct double questions (§ 162, 4)
;
in tlie
viz.
;
same
—
main by
tlie
utrum
-ne
.
.
.an;
an;
Examples
:
—
.... an .... ne.
sit,
quaero quaero quaero quaero
a.
utrum verum an falsum verumne an falsum sit, verum an falsum sit, verum falsumne sit,
'
I ask whether it is true orfalse?
second member of the double question is ordinarily neone, less frequently by an non as, di utrum slnt necne, quaeritur, // is asked whether there are gods
Or
not' in
tlie
expressed by
or not.
J.
;
—
Haud
scio an, nescio an, by omission of the
first
membpr
:
of
the double question, occur with the Subjunctive in the sense
inclined to think, probably, perhaps ; as,
—
/
am
haud scio an
6.
ita sit,
/ am
inclined to think this is so.
is
In early Latin and in poetry the Indicative
sometimes used
in
Indirect Questions.
CONDITIONAL SENTENCES.
301.
(§ 164)
Conditional Sentences
consisting of
are
compound
the
Protasis
sentences
(or con-
two
parts,
dition),
usually introduced
Apodosis (or conclusion). of Conditional Sentences
:
—
by si, nisi, or sin, and the There are the following types
CONDITIONAL SENTENCES.
First T3rpe. -r Nothing
I99
Implied as to the Reality of the Sup-
posed Case.
302.
I.
Here we regularly have the
Indicative in both
Protasis
81
and Apodosis.
Any
tense
may be
used
;
as,
—
hoc credis, erras, ifyou believe this, you are mistaken uaturam si sequemur, numquam aberrabimus, if we follow Nature, we shall never go astray 81 hoc di^sti, errasti, ifyou said this, you were in error.
*
2.
Sometimes the Protasis
as,
talces
the Indefinite Second Person Singu^
lar (§ 356,
3) of the Present or Perfect Subjunctive, with the force of
;
the Indicative
—
it.
memoria minuitur,
you
3.
nisi earn ezerceas,
memory
is
impaired unless
exercise
Here belong
also those conditional sentences in
;
which the Prot;
asis
denotes a repeated action (compare §§ 287, 2
288, 3)
as,
81
quis
equitum deciderat, pedltes circumsistebant,
if any one
of the horsemen'fell, the foot-soldiers gathered about him.
a.
Instead of the Indicative, Livy and subsequent writers employ the Subjunctive of the Historical tenses in the Protasis to denote repeated
action; as, si
dicendo quis diem eximeret,
in pleading ; si
if {ever) anybody consumed a day
sat by.
quando
adsideret, if ever he
it,
4.
Where
the sense
demands
tences of the First
Type may be an
the Apodosis in conditional senImperative or one of the Indeas,
pendent Subjunctives (Hortatory, Deliberative, etc.);
sT 81
hoc creditis, tacete, ifyou hoc credimus, taceamus, if we
believe this, be silent
believe this, let us keep silent.
Second Type. — Should '-' Would Conditions.
'
'
Here we regularly have the Subjunctive (of the Present or Perfect tense) in both Protasis and Apodosis as,—
303.
;
81 si
si
be mishoc die as, erres, taken. hoc dizeris, erraveris, J velim Hannibalis proelia omnia desoribere, dies mS defioiat, Hannibal, timi if I should wish to describe all the battles of would fail me
1
if you should say
this,
you would
200
SYNTAX.
mentiar, si negem, I should lie, if I should deny it; haec SI tecum patria loquatur, nonne impetrare debeat, if your country should plead thus -with you, would she not deserve to
obtain her request f
a.
The
is
Subjunctive in the Apodosis of conditional sentences of
this type
of the Potential variety.
b.
Sometimes we find the Indicative in the Apodosis of sentences of the Second Type, where the writer wishes to assert the accomplishment of a
result
more
positively ; as,
—
aliter si faciat, nailaiu habet auctorlt^tem, if he should otherwise he has no authority.
f
da,
Third
304.
Type.
— Supposed
Case
Represented
as
Contrary
to
Fact.
Protasis
time,
si
Here we regularly have the Subjunctive and Apodosis, the Imperfect referring to and the Pluperfect referring to past ; as,
I.
in
both
present
amicT mei adessent, opis non indigerem, if my friends were
here,
SI
I should not hoc dizisses,
erred;
lack assistance
errasses, zf
you had said
this,
you would have
would
not
sapientia
non expeteretur,
si nihil eiSoeret, philosophy
be desired, if it accomplished nothing;
consilium, ratio, sententia nisi essent in senibus, non summum consilium majores nostri appellassent senatum, unless deliberation, reason,
and wisdom
existed in old men, our ancesdeliberative
tors
would not have
called their highest
body a
senate.
2.
past, especially to
Sometimes the Imperfect Subjunctive is found referring to the denote a coiitintied act, or a state of things still exist-
ing;
as,—
Cato sT nihil litteris adjuvarentur, numquam se ad earum studium oontullssent, Laelius, Furius, and Cato would never have devoted themselves to the study of letters, unless they had been {constantly) helped by them igitur si ad centesimum annum vizisset, senectiitis eum suae paeniteret, if he had lived to his hundredth year, would M have regretted (and now be regretting) his old age ?
Laelius, Furius,
num
CONDTTIONAL SENTENCES.
3.
20I
sometimes
The Apodosis
in conditional sentences of this type
stands in the Indicative (Imperfect, Perfect, or Pluperfect), viz.
—
a) Frequently in expressions of ability, obligation, or necessity
as,
nisi felicitas in
socordiam vertisset, exuere jugum potuerunt, unless their prosperity had turned to folly, they could have thrown off the yoke;
this type,
Note.
Thus
— In sentences of
however,
it is
not
itie
possibility that is repre-
sented as-contTEiry-to-fact, but something to be supplied in thought irom the context.
in the foregoing
sentence the logical apodosis
it off\.
is
et exuissent tinderstood
itself is
(and they would have shaken
Subjunctive
is
When
ihe possibility
conditioned, the
used.
eum
patris loco colere debebas, si
uUa
in te pietas
esset, j/o» ought to revere
him as a father, if you had
as,
any sense of devotion.
b)
With both the Periphrastic Conjugations
61 Sestius ocoTsus esset, f uistisne
'
;
—
if
to
Sestius
had
been slain,
ad arma ituri, would you have proceeded
arms f
sT
Qnum diem morati
fnit, if
essetis,
moriendum omnibus
all
you had delayed one day, you would
have
had to
die.
Protasis expressed without Si.
305.
but
as,
I.
The
Protasis
is
not always expressed by a clause with
si,
may be implied
in a word, a phrase, or merely
by the context;
aliSqui haeo
non soriberentur,
otherwise
(i.e. if
matters were other-
would not be written non potestis, voldptate omnia dirigentes, retinere virtutem, you cannot retain virtue, if you direct everything with reference to
wise) these things
pleasure.
2.
Sometimes an Imperative, or a Jussive Subjunctive, serves as
Protasis.
Thus
:
—
eras petito, dabitur, if you ask to-morrow,
it
shall be given you (Ht.
ask to-morrow,
etc.)
haec reputent, videbunt, tf they consider this, they will see (lit. let them consider, etc.) ; /oges Zenonem, respondeat, if you should ask Zeno, he would
answer.
202
Use
306.
I.
SYNTAX.
of Nisi,
SI Non, Sin.
non
nega-
Nisi, unless, negatives the entire protasis; si
tives a single
word
;
as,
—
ferreus essem, nisi te
loved yote
;
but
—
amarem, / should
be hard-hearted unless 1
ferreus essem, si te
non amarem, /
it is
should be hard-hearted if I did
NOT
In the
love you.
first
example,
the notion of loving you that
is
negatived,
in the second, the notion of loving.
2.
ST non
a)
(si
minus)
is
regularly
employed
:
—
;
When
an apodosis with at, tamen, certe follows
si
as,
—
if
dolorem
b)
non potuero
frangere,
tamen occultabo,
I cannot crush
my sorrow, yet I will hide it.
When
as,
an
affirmative protasis is repeated in negative form
si feceris,
magnam babebo gratiam; si non feceris, ignoscam, if you do it, I shall be deeply grateful; ifyou do not do it, I shall pardon you.
sin
;
a.
if the verb is omitted in the repetition, only si minus or minus is admissible as, — boc si assecQtus sum, gaudeo; si minus, me consolor, have attained this, I am glad; if not, I console myself.
But
z/7
3.
Sin.
Where one
protasis
is
followed by another opposed
is
in
meaning, but affirmative in form, the second
introduced by sin
;
as,
hunc mihi timorem eripe
founded, that [
that
4.
;
si
virus
ut timgre desinam,
relieve
est, ne opprimar, sin me of this fear; if it
it is
falsus,
is
well
may
not be destroyed; but if
groundless,
I may
as,
cease to fear.
Nisi has a fondness
nihil)
;
—
for
combining with negatives (non, nemo
nihil cogitavit nisi
a. 5.
caedem, he had no thought but murder,
always separated in the best Latinity.
si,
Non and nisi are
Nisi forte, nisi vero, nisi
vero, quia
unless perchance, unless indeed
(often with ironical force), take the Indicative; as,
nisi
perfeota res non
est,
is
non videtur
punienda,
unless indeed, because
an
act
not consummated,
U
does not
seem
to
merit punishment.
CONDITIONAL CLAUSES OF COMPARISON.
Conditional Clauses of Comparison.
307.
I.
203
Conditional Clauses of Comparison are intro-
duced by the particles, ac si, ut si, quasi, quam SI, tamquam 81, velut si, or simply by velut or tamquam. They stand in the Subjunctive mood and regularly involve an ellipsis (see
§
374)
i)> 3-S
indicated in the following examples
:
—
tantus patres
metus
cepit, velut si
jam ad portas hostis
esset, as
great fear seized the senators as {would have seized them) if the enemy were already at the gates
sed quid ego his testibus utor quasi les dubia aut obscura sit, 6ui why do I use these witnesses, as (/ should do) if the matter were doubtful or obscure serviam tibi tam quasi emeris me argento, I -will serve you as
though you
2.
had bought me for money.
Note that in sentences of this kind the Latin observes the reguthe Sequence of Tenses. Thus after principal tenses the Latin uses the Present and Perfect (as in the second and third examples), where the English uses the Past and Past Perfect.
lar principles for
Concessive Clauses.
clauses
Concessive is best restricted to those developed from the Jussive Subjunctive which have the force of granted that, etc.; (see § 278) as,
308.
'
'
The term
—
Bit fur, sit
sacrilegus, at est
bonus imperator, planted
good commander
that he
is
a
thief and a robber, yet he is a
haec sint falsa, granted that this is false ne sit summum malum dolor, malum certe est, granted that pain is not the greatest evil, yet it is certainly an evil.
Adversative Clauses with
309.
Qnamvis, Qnamguam, etc
intro4uced by quamvis, quamquam, etsl, cum, although, while often classed as 'Concessive,' are yet essentially different from genuine Concessive clauses. As a rule, they do not grant or concede anyClauses
tametsi,
thing,
but rather state that something
is
true in spite of
204
something
sative
else.
SYNTAX.
They accordingly emphasize the adverand are properly Subordinate Adversative
different particles used to introduce these
idea,
Clauses.
The
clauses have different meanings
structions, as follows
:
—
and take
different con-
Quamvis, however much, although, does not introduce a state1 ment of fact, but represents an act merely as conceived. It is followedby the Subjunctive, usually of the present tense; as,
homines quamvTs
in turbidis rebus sint, tarn en
interdum animTs
non
relazantur, in however stirring events men may engage, yet at times they relax their energies; est potestas opitulandi rei publicae quamvis ea prematur
periculis, there
is
no opportunity
to succor the state, though
it
be beset by dangers.
2.
Quamquam,
etsi,
tametsi, although, introduce a statement
;
fact,
and are followed by the Indicative (of any tense)
virtus nos
allicit,
as,
—
of
quamquam omnis
efficit,
tameu
justitia id
mazime
espe-
although all virtue attracts us, yet justice does so
cially
;
Caesar, etsi nondum consilium hostium cognoverat, tamen Id quod accidit suspicabatur, Caesar, though he did not yet know
the plans
u..
of the enemy, yet was suspecting what actually occurred,
Etsi, although, must be distinguished from etsi, even if. The latter is a conditional particle and teikes any of the constructions admissible
for si.
(See §§ 302-304.)
is
,
3.
Cum,
although,
followed by the Subjunctive
petiit,
;
as,
—
seek.
Atticus honores non
cum
ei paterent, Atticus did not
honors, though they were open to him.
Licet sometimes loses its verbal force (see § 295, 6) and sinks to 4. the level of a conjunction with the force of although. It takes the Subjunctive, Present or Perfect as,
;
—
licet
omnes
terrores impendeant, succurram, though hang over me, {yet) I will lend aid.
aU
terrors
5.
Quamquam,
;
with the force
principal clauses
as,
—
and yet,
is
often used to introduce
quamquam quid
loquor, and yet why do
I speak f
CLAUSES OF PROVISO.— RELATIVE CLAUSES.
6.
2oS
Sub-
In post-Augustan writers
while
guamquam
Thus
:
is
freely construed with the
junctive,
quamvis
is
often used to introduce statements of fact,
either the Indicative
or the Subjunctive.
—
and takes
words;
quamquam moveretur his v5cibus,
although he was
moved by
these
quamvis multi opinarentur, though many thought; quamvis infesto anlmS perveneras, though you had come with
hostile intent.
Clauses with
Dum, Modo, Dumznodo,
or a Proviso.
particles are followed
denoting a AVish
310.
These
by the Subjunctive
:
(negative ne)
and have two
distinct uses
—
L They
entertained
are used to introduce clauses embodying a wish
by the subject
of the leading verb; as,
multi honesta neglegunt dummodo potentiam oonsequantur, many neglect honor in their desire to obtain power (^if only th^
may
attain)
;
omnia postposm, dum praeceptis patris parerem, I made everything else secondary, in my desire to obey the injunctions of my father ^ nil obstat tibi, dum ne sit ditior alter, nothing hinders you in your desire that your neighbor may not be richer than you.
n. They are used to express
tJmt'); as,
oderint,
a proviso
{'provided
dum metuant, let them hate, provided they fear ; manent ingenia senibus, modo permaneat studium et industria,
old
men
retain their faculties, provided only they retain their
interest
and vigor
fiat
nubant,
dum ne dos
it.
comes,
let
them marry, provided no dowry
goes with
Relative Clauses.
311.
Relative Clauses are introduced by Relative Pro-
nouns, Adjectives, or Adverbs.
312.
I.
Relative
especially clauses
clauses usually stand in the Indicative Mood, introduced by those General Relatives which aro
doubled or have the suffix
-cumque
;
as,
—
2o6
quidquid id
est,
SYNTAX.
timeo Danaos et dona ferentes, whatever
offer gifts;
it is, 1
fear the Greeks even when they
quidquid
oritur,
qualecumque
est,
causam a uatura habet, whatit is,
ever cotnes into being, of whatever sort
in Nature.
2.
has
its
primal cause
Any
simple Relative
may
introduce a conditional sentence
in §§
any of the thVee types mentioned
302-304
;
as,
—
of
qui hoc dicit, errat, he who says this is mistaken (First Type) qui hoc dicat, erret, he would be mistaken who should say this (Second Type) qui hoc dixisset, errasset, the man who had said this would have
;
been mistaken.
INDIRECT DISCOURSE {OUATIO OBLTQUA).
313. When the language or thought of any person is reproduced without change, that is called Direct Discourse The die is cast' When, (yOratio Recta) ; as, Caesar said, on the other hand, one's language or thought is made to
'
depend upon a verb of saying, thinking,
the
etc.,
that
is called
Indirect Discourse {Oratio Obllquci); as, Caesar said that
die
was
cast
;
Caesar thought that his troops wen
victorious.
a.
For the verbs most frequently employed to introduce
Discourse, see § 331.
Indirect
MOODS
314.
IN
INDIRECT DISCOURSE.
Declarative Sentences.
I.
Declarative Sentences upon becoming Indirect
change
tive
their
main clause
all
to the
Infinitive with Subject
Accusative, while
;
as,
—
subordinate clauses take the Subjunc-
Regulus dixit quam diu jure jurando hostium ten§retur non esse se senatorem, Regulus said that as long ns he was held by his pledge to the enemy he was not a senator. (Direct quam diu teneor non sum senator.)
:
INDIRECT DISCOURSE.
2.
207
The verb
of saying, thinking,
;
from the context
as,
—
etc., is
sometimes to be inferred
tum Romulus legates circa viclnas gentes misit qui societatem conubiumque peterent urbes quoque, ut cetera, ex luSiao nasci, then Romulus sent envoys around among the neighboring tribes, to ask for alliance and the right of intermarriage, {saying that) cities, like everything else, start from a
:
modest beginning.
3.
Subordinate clauses which contain an explanatory statement of
the writer
and so are not properly a part of the Indirect Discourse, or
;
which emphasize the fact stated, take the Indicative
as,
—
nuutiatum est Ariovistum ad occupaudum Vesoutionem, quod est oppidum mazdmum Sequanorum contendere, it mas reported that Ariovistus was hastening to seize Vesontio, which the largest town of the Sequani.
4.
is
Sometimes a subordinate clause
is
is
such only in
its
external form,
and in sense
Accusative.
principal.
,
It
then takes the Infinitive with Subject
hie,
etc. ; as,
This occurs especially in case of
qui
is
equivalent to et
Mo,
nam
—
relative clauses,
where
dixit urbem.
baris,
Atheniensium propugnaculum oppositum esse barapud quam jam bis classes regias fecisse naufragium, he said the city of the Athenians had been set against the barbarians like a bulwark, near which ( = and near it) the fleets of the King had twice met disaster.
refers
5.
The
it
when
Subject Accusative of the Infinitive is sometimes omitted to the same person as the subject of the leading
;
verb, or
can easily be supplied from the context
as,
—
cum
id nescire
this
Mago
diceret,
when Mago said he did
not
know
(for se nescire).
Interrogative Sentences.
Real questions of the Direct Discourse, upon becoming indirect, are regularly put in the Subjunc315.
I.
tive; as,
Ariovistus Caesari respondit
populum Romanum.
sessiones
veniret,
se prius in Galliam venisse quam Cur in suas possibi vellet? replied to Caesar that ht Ariovistus
:
Quid
2o8
had come
{Caesar)
SYNTAX.
into Gatd before the Roman mean 1 Why did he come into
people.
his
What
did
hi
quid
2.
tibi
domain ? vis ? cur in meas possessiones venis ?)
(Direct;
Rhetorical questions, on the other hand, being asked
effect,
merely for
course.
and being equivalent
in force to emphatic
Dis-
statements, regularly stand in the Infinitive in Indirect
Thus
:
quid est levius
direct.
3.
(lit.
what
is
more
trivial,
=
nothing
is
more
trivial)
of the Direct Discourse becomes
quid esse levius
in the In-
Deliberative Subjunctives of the Direct Discourse remain unin the Indirect: as,
changed in mood
qaid
fiLceiet, le/hai
was he
to
do ?
(Direct:
quid faciat?)
Imperative Sentences.
316.
Direct
All Imperatives or Jussive Subjunctives of Discourse appear as Subjunctives in the
the
In-
direct; as,
milites certiores fecit paulisper intermitterent proelium,
told the
soldiers to
he
stop
the
battle
for a
as,
little.
(Direct:
iutermittite.)
a.
The
negative in such sentences
let
is
ne
;
—
it to
ne suae virtuti tribueret,
valor
him not attribute
his
own
TENSES IN INDIRECT DISCOURSE.
A. Tenses of the Infinitive.
317.
These are used
The
in
accordance with the
§
regular
principles for the use of the Infinitive as given in
a.
270.
the
Perfect Infinitive
may
represent any past tense of
Indicative of Direct Discourse.
Thus
:
—
scio te haeo egisse
may mean
—
(Direct: (Direct:
/ know you were doing this. I know you did this. I know you had done this.
(Direct
:
haec agebas.) haeo egisti.) haeo egeras.)
INDIRECT DISCOURSE.
B. Tenses
318.
of the Subjunctive.
2o9
These follow the regular principle
being Principal
if it is if
for the
Sequence
is
of Tenses,
the verb of saying'
Princi-
pal; Historical
vividness,
after
Historical.
Yet for the sake
as,
of
we
often find the
Present Subjunctive used
;
an
historical tense {Repraesentatio)
si
—
Caesar respondit,
obsides dentur, sese
pacem
esse facturum,
Caesar replied that, if hostages be given, he would make peace.
a.
For the sequence
after the Perfect Infinitive, see § 268, 2.
CONDITIONAL SENTENCES IN INDIRECT DISCOURSE.
Conditional Sentences of the First Type.
319.
is
A. The Apodosis. Any tense of the Indicative changed to the corresponding tense of the Infinitive
(§§ 270; 317. «)•
B.
the
The
Protasis.
The
protasis takes those tenses of
Subjunctive which are required
by the
Sequence
of Tenses.
Examples
:
—
Indirect.
Direct.
dico,
si
SI
hoc credis, erras,
dixi, SI
(
hoc credas, te errare hoc crederes, te errare.
;
dico, si
,.
SI
hoc credes, errabis, ' '
J 1
.
., .
dixi, SI
hoc credas, te erraturum esse _, - .-^hoc crederes, te erraturum esse. hoc credideris, hoc credidisses,
-,.,.
-
f
dico, sl
te
.-
erraturum
esse
si
hoc credideris, errabis, '
•{
,.
_
-,_
dixi, SI
te
erraturum
-^-
esse.
Sl
hoc credebas, erravisti, '
a.
<,...,_ dixi, Sl hoc
[
f
dico, si
hoc crederes, te erravisse _ _, _ ^_
.
crederes, te erravisse.
Note that a Future Perfect Indicative of the Direct Discourse
regularly appears in the Indirect as a Perfect Subjunctive
after a principal tense,
and as a Pluperfect Subjunctive
after
an historical tense.
2IO
SYNTAX.
Conditional Sentences
of.
the Second Type.
320.
A.
The
Apodosis.
The Present
Subjunctive
of
the Direct Discourse regularly
tive of the Indirect.
becomes the Future
Infini-
B.
The
Protasis.
the Subjunctive
Examples
si
:
—
The Protasis takes those tenses demanded by the sequence of tenses.
dico, SI
of
h5c credas, erres,
dixl, SI
hoc credas, te erraturum esse hoc crederes, te erraturum esse.
Conditional Sentences of the Third Type.
321.
1.
A.
The
Apodosis.
of the Direct Discourse
The Imperfect Subjunctive
Infinitive.
a.
becomes the Future
But
sical Latinity
this construction is rare,
being represented in the
29. 2).
clas-
by a single example (Caesar, V.
Some
scholars question the correctness of this passage.
2.
The
:
becomes
d)
—
Pluperfect Subjunctive of the Direct Discourse
a) In the Active Voice the Infinitive in -urus fuisse.
In the Passive Voice
it
takes the form
futurum
fuisse ut
with the Imperfect Subjunctive.
B.
The
Protasis.'
The
protasis
in
Conditional Sen-
tences of this type ahvays remains unchanged.
Examples
SI
:
—
hoc crederes, errares,
h5c credidisses, erravisses,
dico (dixi),
sT
hoc orederes,
te er-
raturum esse
si
dico (dixT),
si hoc credidisses, erratiirum fuisse
te
SI
hoc dizisses, punitus esses,
dico (dixI), si hoc dixisses, futui
rum
322.
fuisse ut pumrSris.
When
Type
referring to the past
an apodosis of a conditional sentence of the Third is at the same time a Result clause, or »
INDIRECT DISCOURSE.
quin-clause (after
junctive in the
211
non dubito, etc.), form -urua fuerim; as,
it
stands in the Perfect Sub-
Ita territi sunt,
ut arma trSditurl fuerint,i nisi Caesar subito advenisset, they were so frightened that they would have given up their arms, had not Caesar suddenly arrived; non dubito quin, si hoc dixisses, erraturus f ueris,i / do not doubt
that, ifyou
had said this, you would have made a
is
mistake.
a.
This peculiarity
Passive,
such
confined to the Active Voice. In the sentences, when they become dependent,
;
remain unchanged
as,
—
non dubito
quin, si
do not doubt that,
been blamed.
b.
hoc dirzisses, vituperatus esses, / if you had said this, you would have
When
an Indirect Question becomes an apodosis in a con^ Third Type, -urus fuerim (rarely -urus f uissem) is used as,
ditional sentence of the
;
—
quaero, num, si hoc
fuisses)
c.
dixisses, erraturus
fueris
(01
Potui, when
it becomes a dependent apodosis in sentences of Type, usually changes to the Perfect Subjunctive ; as,
—
this
concursQ. totius civitatis defensi sunt, ut Irigidissimos quoque oratores populi studia excitare potuerint,
they were defended before a gathering of all the citizens, so that the
interest of the people would have most apathetic orators.
beeyi
enough
to excite
even the
IMPLIED INDIRECT DISCOURSE.
323.
The
Subjunctive
is
often used in subordinate clauses
Indirect character is merely implied by the context ; as,
—
whose
dSmonstrabantur mihi praeterea, quae Socrates d§ imxnortalidisseruisset, there were explained to me bearguments -which Socrates had set forth concerning the immortality of the soul {i.e. the arguments which, it was said, Socrates had set forth) Paetus omnes libros quos pater suus reliquisset mihi donavit,
tate
anlmSrum
sides, the
;
Paetus gave
1
me all the books which
(as he said) his father
had left.
repre-
senting tradlttiri
J
Tradituri fuerint and erraturus fueris are to be regarded as fuerunt and erratiiruB fulsti of Direct Discourse.
*0
(Sm
304- 3-
212
SYNTAX.
SUBJUNCTIVE BY ATTRACTION.
junctive
Subordinate clauses dependent upon the Sub. attracted into the same mood, especially when they do not express a fact, but constitute
324.
I.
are frequently
an
essential part
of one complex idea ;
est, cui,
as,
—
nemo avarus adbuc inventus
had;
quod haberet,
satisfied
esset
satis,
no miser has yet been found who was
with what he
cum
quod
diversas causas afferrent, dum formam sui quisque et animi et ingenii reddereut, as they brought forward different arguments, while each mirrored his own individual type of mind and natural bent ego f atear, pudeat ? should I be ashamed of a thing which I
adtnit f
2.
is
Similarly
put in the Subjunctive
as,
a subordinate clause dependent upon an Infinitive when the two form one closely united
whole;
mos
est
Athems quotannis
proeliis interfecti,
it is
in contione laudari eos qui sint in the custom at Athens every year for
killed in battle.
who have been (Here the notion of 'praising those who fell an inseparable whole.)
those to be publicly eulogized
in battle' form.s
NOUN AND ADJECTIVE FORMS OF THE
325.
VERB.
Infinitive, participle. Gerund, and All of these partake of the nature of the Verb, on the one hand, and of the Noun or Adjective, on the
These are the
Supine.
other.
Thus
:
—
As Verbs,
d)
^)
c)
—
tense.
They may be limited by adverbs They admit an object They have the properties of voice and
or Adjectives,
As Nouns
a)
b)
—
or Adjective constructions.
They They
are declined
take
Noun
NOUN AND ADJECTIVE FORMS OF THE VERB.
THE
326.
213
INFINITIVE.
Subject Accusative.
Infinitive 'without
This
is
used chiefly as Subject or Object but also as
was
Predicate or Appositive.
Note.
— The
Infinitive
originally
a Dative, and traces of
this are still to
be
seen in the poetical use of the Infinitive to express/w^^oj^ ; as,
uec dulces occurto snatch kisses.
rent oscula nati praeripere, and no sweet children imll run
A.
327.
I.
As
Subject.
The
Infinitive without
Subject Accusative
is
used as the Subject of esse and various impersonal verbs,
particularly
opus
est,
necesse
est, oportet, juvat, delectat,
placet, libet, licet, praestat, decet, pudet, interest, etc. ; as,
—
dulce et
decorum
est pro patria mori,
it is
sweet
and
noble to die
for one''s country virorum est fortium toleranter dolorem pati,
it is
the part of brave
endure fain with patience senatui placuit legates mittere, /^f Senate decided
to
men
(lit. it
pleased tht
Senate) to send envoys.
2.
Even though the
Infinitive itself appears without Subject,
;
take a Predicate
Noun
or Adjective in the Accusative
esse, aliud iratum,
it is
as,
—
it
may
aliud est
ble.,
iracundum
one thing to be irasci-
another to be angry;
esse, to do whatever
Impune quaelibet facere, id est regem
a.
you
please with impunity, that is to be a king.
But when licet
is
Noun
or Adjective with
followed by a Dative of the person, a Predicate esse is attracted into the same case; as,
licult esse otioso Themlstocli, lit. it was permitted to Themistocles to be at leisure. So sometimes with other Impersonals.
B.
328.
I.
'As Object.
The
Infinitive without
Subject Accusative
is
used as the Object of
of the
many
;
verbs, to denote another action
same
subject, particularly after
—
V0I6, cupio, malo,
nolo
cogito, meditor, purpose, intend',
debeo, ought; Statuo, constituo, decide
neglego, neglect; vereor, timed, fear
214
audeo, dare Btudeo, contends, strive paro, prepare (so paratus)
pergo, continue; desino, desisto, cease
SYNTAX.
mature, f estino, propero, oontendo, hasten asauesco, consuescS, accustom
;
;
incipio, coepi, instituo, begin
myself (so assuetus, insuitua, assuef actus)
;
disco, learn
scio,
possum, can
Conor, try
know how
soleo,
am
wont;
as,
—
tu hos intueri audes, do you dare to look on these men ? Demosthenes ad Suctus maris declamare solebat, Demostkene, used to declaim by the waves of the sea.
2.
A
Predicate
Noun
;
or Adjective with these Infinitives
is
attracted
into the
Nominative
as,
beatus esse sine virtute
virtue
nemo
potest, no one can be happy without
to be
Cats esse quam videri bonus malebat, Cato preferred
rather than to seem
so.
good
Infinitive writh Subject Accusative.
329.
This
is
used chiefly as Subject or Object but
also
as Predicate or Appositive.
A.
330.
As
Subject.
The
Infinitive with
is
Subject Accusative
(like the
used as Subject with ease and Impersonal verbs, particularly with aequum est, utile est, turpe est, fama est, spes eat, fas est, uefas est, opus est, necesse
simple Infinitive)
est, oportet, constat, praestat, licet, etc. ;
as,
—
nihil in bell5 oportet
contemn!, nothing ought
to be despised in war;
it is
apertum est
sibi
quemque natura
is
esse carum,
manifest that
by nature everybody
dear
to himself.
B.
331.
As
Object.
The
Infinitive
with Subject Accusative
is
used as
Object after the following classes of verbs
I.
ceivtng,
Most and
frequently after verbs of saying, thinking, knowing, perthe like {Verba Sentiendi et Declarandi).
This
is
th«
NOUN AND ADJECTIVE FORMS OF THE VERB. 21$
regular construction of Principal Clauses of Indirect Discourse.
that take this construction are,
Verbs
sentlo,
;
among
others, the following
:
audio, video, cognosco memini dioo, affirmo,
;
;
puto, jiidico, spero, confido
{say that
.
.
soio,
nego
.
not),
trado, narro,
fateoT,
certiorem facio (infortn),
respondeo, scribo, promitto, glorior. Also the phrases; memoria teneo (remember), etc.
:
Examples
Epiciirei
—
putant
cum
corporibu3 simul animos iuterire,
the Epi-
cureans think that the soul perishes with the body Thales dixit aquam esse initium rerum, Thales said that water was
the first principle of the tmiverse; Democritus uegat quicquid esse sempiternum, Democritus says
spero
II.
nothing is everlasting; eum venturum esse,
/ hope
that he will come.
With
jiibeo, order,
and
-veto, forbid; as,
soldiers to
Caesar milites pontem facere jussit, Caesar ordered the make a bridge.
u.
When
the
name
is
;
of the person
who
is
something
the Passive
III.
omitted, the Infinitive with
as,
ordered or forbidden to do jube5 and veto is put in
Caesar pontem
fieri Jussit.
With patior and sino,/«-w?z^, fl/^a',- as, QuUo se implioari negotio passus est, he did not permit himself be involved in any difficulty.
IV.
—
to
With volo, nolo, malo, cupio, when
the Subject of the Infini;
tive is different
from that of the governing verb
as,
—
neo mihi hunc errorem extorqueri volo, nor do I wish
be wrested from
this error to
me
was unwilling
that these matters should be
eUs res jactari uolebat, he
discussed;
te tut frui virtiite
a.
cupimus, we
desire that you enjoy your worth.
When the Subject of both verbs is the same, the simple Infinitive is occur, esregidarly used in accordance with \ 328. x. But exceptions
pecially in case of
esse and Passive
Infinitives
;
as,
—
esse clementem, I desire to he lenient; Timolson maluit se diligi quam metui, Timoleon preferred
cupio
me
to
be loved rather than feared.
6.
Volo
also admits the Subjunctive, with or without
(.See § 296. 1. a.)
ut
;
n51o
the
Sub
junctive alone.
2l6
SYNTAX.
V. With Verbs of emotion (Joy, sorrow, regret, etc.), especiallj gaudeo, laetor, doled aegre ferS, molests fero, graviter fero, am annoyed, distressed ; miror, queror, indignor as,
;
;
—
gaudeo
tS
salvum advenire, I rejoice
thai you arrive safely^
non molests ferunt se libidinum vinculis laxatos esse, they art not troubled at being releasedfrom the bonds of passion miror te ad me nihil scribere, I wonder that you write me nothing.
u..
Instead of an Infinitive these verbs also sometimes admit a guodclause as Object.
(See
}
299.)
Thus
:
—
miror quod non loqueris, / wonder that you
VI.
do not speak.
Some
verbs which take two Accusatives, one of the Person and
the other of the Thing (§ 178, i), second Accusative as,
;
—
may
substitute an Infinitive for the
cogo te hoc facere, I compel you to do this (cf. te hoc cogo) docui te contentum esse, /• taught you to be content (cf. te modestiam docui, I taught you temperance).
;
Passive Construction of the Foregoing Verbs.
332.
Those verbs which
ha the
Active are followed by
the Infinitive with Subject Accusative, usually admit the
personal construction of the Passive.
following and of
some others
;
:
—
This
is
true of the
d) jubeor, vetor, sinox
as,
—
milites
pontem
facere jussi sunt, the soldiers were ordered
a bridge jussus est, a bridge was ordered built niHites castris exire vetiti sunt, the troops were forbidden to go out of the camp ; Sestius Clodium accusare non est situs, Sestius was
to build
fieri
pons
not allowed to accuse Clodius.
6) MiAeor,
I am
seen,
I seem;
as,
videtur comperisse, he seems
c) dicor,
to
have discovered,
all
putor, existimor, judicor (in
is
persons)
;
as,
—
into
dicitur in Italiam venisse, he
Italy
said to have come
Romulus primus rek Romanorum
lus is thought to
fuisse putatur, Romuhave been the first king of the Romans.
NOUN AND ADJECTIVE FORMS OF THE VERB.
d)
fertur,
217
third
feruntur, trSditur, traduntur
;
person)
fertur
as,
—
(only in
the
Homerus caecus
fuisse,
Homer
is
said to have been
blind;
carmina Archilochi contumSliis referta esse traduntur, Archilochus''s poems are reported to have been full of abuse.
Note.
— In
verbs, «), <0i niore
compound tenses and periphrastic forms, the commonly take the impersonal construction
last
;
as,
—
two classes of
tradltuin est
blind.
Homerum caecum
fuisse, the story goes that
Homer was
Infinitive 'with Adjectives.
333.
etc. ;
The
;
Infinitive with Adjectives
(except paratus,
assuetus,
see § 328, i) occurs only in poetry
as,
writers
—
and
post- Augustan prose
oontentus demonstrasse, contented to have proved; audax omnia perpetT, bold for enduring everything.
Infinitive in Exclamations.
334.
The
Infinitive is
used in Exclamations implying scorn, indigis
nation, or regret.
An
intensive -ne
:
the clause.
Examples
—
often attached to
some word
in
huncine solem tarn nigrum surreze mihi,
rose with such evil
to think that to-day's
sun
omen for me!
to stay
sedere totos dies in villa,
whole days at the
villa.
Historical Infinitive.
335. The Infinitive
Imperfect Indicative.
is
often used in historical narrative instead of the
The
Subject stands in the Nominative
flagitare,
;
as,
—
interim cottidie Caesar
Haeduos frumentum
meanwhile
Caesar was daily demanding grain of the Haedui.
PARTICIPLES.
Tenses of the Participle.
336.
I.
The
tenses of the Participle, like those of the
Infinitive (see § 270),
express time not absolutely, but with
reference to the verb
upon which the
Participle depends.
2l8
2.
SYNTAX.
The
Present Participle denotes action contemporary with that
the verb.
Thus
:
—
ol
audio te loquentem =you are speaking and / hear you audiebam te loquentem =you were speaking and I heard you; ^udiam te loquentem = you will be speaking and I shall hear you.
a.
The
force
Present Participle as, —.
;
is
sometimes employed with Conative
the king
assurgentem regem resupinat, as rise, he threw him down.
3.
was
trying
to
The
Perfect Passive Participle denotes action prior to that
:
the verb.
Thus looutus taceo = / have spoken and am
—
of
silent;
looutus'tacui = / had spoken and then was silent locutus tacebo = / shall speak and then shall be
4.
silent.
is
The absolute time
Certain Perfect
of the action of a participle, therefore,
determined entirely by the
5.
finite
verb with whicli
Participles
;
it is
connected.
Passive
Deponent Verbs
are used as Presents
viz.
Deponent and Semiarbitratus, ausus, ratus,
of
gavisus, solitus, ubus, confisus, diffisus, secutus, veritus.
Use
337.
of ParticipleB.
As an
Adjective the Participle
may be
used either
as an attributive or predicate modifier of a Substantive.
1.
Attributive Use.
:
amples are
—
This presents no special
peculiarities.
Ex-
gloria est consentiens laus
bonorum,
glory
is
the
unanimous praise
walls
of the good; Coaon- murds a Lysandro dirutos
destroyed by Lysander.
reficit,
Conon restored the
2. Predicate Use. Here the Participle is often equivalent to a subordinate clause. Thus the Participle may denote
:
—
a)
Time
;
as,
omue malum nasceus
b)
facile opprimitur, every evil
is
easily crushed at birth.
A
Condition
uti
;
as,
—
mente
non possumus cibo et potione completi, if gorged with food and drink., we cannot use our intellects-
NOUN AND ADJECTIVE FORMS OF THE VERB.
c)
219
Manner; as, Solon senesoere se dicebat multa in dies addiscentem,
Solon said he grew old learning
as,
d) Means
;
—
diem
though ')
;
many new
things daily.
sol oriens
day.
«)
conficit, the sun, by
its rising,
makes
the
Opposition
('
as,
—
though he speaks the truth.
mendaci homini ne verum quidem dicentl credimus,
•we
;
do not believe a
/) Cause as, perfidiam veritus
3.
—
liar,
ad suos
recessit,
since he
feared
treachery, he returned to his
own
troops.
Video and audio,
the Predicate use
besides the Infinitive, take the Present Par;
ticiple in
as,
—
video te fugientem, I see you fleeing,
a.
So
frequently faclo, flngo,
induco,
etc.; as,
eis
Catonem respondentem faclmus, we
ing to them ;
represent Cato reply-
Homerus Laerteni colentem agrum
Laertes tillmg the field.
4.
faoit,
Homer
represents
The Future Active
it
fined to its
writers
Pajticiple (except futurus) is regularly conuse in the Periphrastic Conjugation, but in poets and later is used independently, especially to denote purpose ; as,
—
venerunt castra oppugnaturi, they came
5.
to assault the
camp.
The
Perfect Passive Participle
;
nate clause
as,
—
is
often equivalent to a coordi-
urbem captam
diruit, he captured
and
destroyed the city
(lit.
he de-
stroyed the city captured).
6. The Perfect Passive Participle in combination with a noun is sometimes equivalen* to an abstract noun with a dependent Genitive
as,—
post
urbem conditam, after the founding of the city Quinctius defensus, the defense of Quinctius quibus animus occupatus, the preoccupation of the mind with which.
7.
Habeo sometimes
;
cate construction
takes a Perfect Passive Participle in the Prediwith a force not far removed from that of the Perfect
as,
or Pluperfect Indicative
—
equitatus
collected.
quem coactum
habSbat,
the cavalry which he
had
220
8.
SYNTAX.
The Gerundive denotes obligation, necessity, etc. Like may be used either as Attributive or Predicate.
a) Less frequently as Attributive.
other Par-
ticiples it
Thus
:
—
liber legendus, a book worth readings
leges observandae, laws deserving of observance.
b)
More
i)
frequently as Predicate.
In the Passive Periphrastic Conjugation
etc.').
(amandus
In this use Intransitive Verbs can be used only impersonally, but admit their ordinary case-construction
est,
(Gen., Dat., Abl.)
;
as,
veniendum
est,
it is
necessary to come
off ensarnm, one
oblivTscendum est
numquam
proditori
credendum
est, you
must forget injuries must never trust
use his
a traitor
suo ouique utendum est judicio, every man must
own judgment.
2) Mtcr euro, provide for ; do, trado, give over ; zelinquo, leave; concedo, hand over; and some other verbs, instead of an object clause, or to denote purpose as, Caesar pontem in Arari faciendum curavit, Caesar providedfor the construction of a bridge over the Arar; Imperator urbem militibus diripiendam concessit, the general handed over the city to the soldiers to plunder.
;
9.
For the Gerundive as the equivalent of the Gerund,
see § 339,
i.
THE GERUND.
338.
As
a verbal noun the Gerund admits noun con:
structions as follows
I.
—
Genitive.
a)
The Genitive of the Gerund is used With Nouns, as objective or Appositional
§§ 200, 202)
;
—
Genitive (see
as,
oupiditas dominandi, desire of ruling; ars scribendi, the art of writing.
b)
With Adjectives
;
as,
—
c)
oupidus audiendi, desirous of hearing. With causa, gratia as,
;
—
discendi causa, /or the sake of learning.
NOUN AND ADJECTIVE FORMS OF THE VERB.
2.
221
Dative.
a)
The Dative
Adjectives
utilis est
;
of the
as,
Gerund
is
used
—
With
—
is
aqua
b)
bibendd, water
;
usefulfor drinking.
With Verbs
(rarely)
as,
adfuT scribendo,
3.
/was present
at the luriting.
Accusative.
Prepositions, chiefly
The Accusative of the Gerund is used only ad and in to denote purpose as,
;
—
with
homo ad ageudum
4.
natus
est,
man
is
is
born for action.
Ablative.
The
Ablative of the
Gerund
used
—
etc.
a) Without a Preposition, as
(see §§ 218, 219);
an Ablative of Means, Cause,
the
as,—
mind is nourished
mens discendo alitur et cogitando, by learning and reflection.
Themistocles maritimos praedones consectando mare tutum reddidit, Themistocles made the sea safe by following up the pirates.
b")
After the prepositions a, de, ex, in
;
as,
—
the keenest pleas-
summa
ure
voluptas ex discendo capitur,
is
derived from learning;
multa de bene beateque vivendo a Platone disputata
sunt, there -was m.tich discussion by Plato on the subject
of living "well and happily.
5.
As a
rule,
only the Genitive of the Gerund and the Ablative
(without a preposition) admit a Direct Object.
Gerundive Construction instead of the Gerund.
339.
I.
Instead of the Genitive or Ablative of the Gerund with a
Direct Object, another construction -may be,
and very
often
is,
used.
This consists in putting the Direct Object in the case of the Gerund (Gen. or Abl.) and using the Gerundive in agreement with it. This
is
called the
Gerundive Construction.
Thus
:
—
Gerund Construction.
Gerundive Construction.
'^«^>-''«n
)
cupidus
urbem videndi,
cupidus urbis videndae
;
of seeing the city. deleotor oratores legendo,
/
«»/
)
^.j^^^^^ .^.^.^^^^^ 1^^^^^^,^
charmedwithreadmgthe orators,
i
222
2.
SYNTAX.
The Gerundive
;
Construction
must
be used to avoid a Direct
Object with the Dative of the Gerund, or with a case dependent upon
a Preposition
as,
—
locus castris muniendis aptus, a place adapted to fortifying a camp; ad pacem petendam venerunt, they came to ask peace multum temporis consumo in legendTs poetis, / spend much time
in reading the poets.
3.
struction
In order to avoid ambiguity (see § 336, 2), the Gerundive Conmust not be employed in case of Neuter Adjectives, used
substantively.
Thus
regularly
—
philosophi oupidi sunt
verum
investigandi, philosophers are
;
eager
for discovering truth (rarely verT investigandi) Btudium plura cognoscendi, a desire of knowing more (not plurium
cognoscendonim)
4.
From
the nature of the case only Transitive Verbs can be used
;
in the Gerundive construction
inally transitive) regularly
but utor, fruor, fungor, potior
it
;
admit
as,
—
(orig-
hostes in
spem potiundorum castrorum veneraut,
Genitives mei, tui, sui, nostri, vestri,
the enemy had
conceived the hope of gaining possession of the camp.
5.
The
when used
in the
Gerundive Construction, are regularly employed without reference to Gender or Number, since they were originally Neuter Singular Adjectives used substantively. Thus
:
—
mulier sui servandi causa aufugit, the woman fled for
the sake of
saving herself; legati in castra venerunt sui purgandi causa, the envoys came camp for the purpose of clearing themselves. So nostri servandi cauaa, for the sake of saving ourselves.
6.
into
Occasionally the Genitive of the Gerundive Construction
to denote
purpose
;
as,
—
is
used
quae
ille
cepit legum ao libertatis subvertundae, -which he under-
took for the purpose of overthrowing the laws
7.
and liberty.
ex-
The Dative
of the Gerundive Construction occurs in some
;
pressions which have the character of formulas
as,
—
decemviri legibus scribundis, decemvirs for codifying the laws quindecimviri sacris faciuudis, quindecimvirs for performing
sacrifices.
the
COORDINATE CONJUNCTIONS.
223
THE
340.
I
•
SUPINE..
used
after
The Supine
in
-um
is
purpose ;
legati
as,
—
Verbs of motion
to express
ad Caesarem grStulatum couvenSrunt, envoys came
sar to congratulate him.
a.
to Cae^
The Supine in -um may take an Object as, pacem petitum oratores Romam mittunt, voys to Rome to ask for p)eace.
;
they send en'
b.
Note the phrase
:
—
nuptum, / give my daughter
in
do (coUooo)
riage.
2.
filiam
mar-
The Supine
in -u
is
facilis, difBcilis,
incredibilis, jucundus, optimus,
used as an Ablative of Specification with etc. ; also with
;
fas est, nefas est,
opus est
as,
—
haec res est facilis cognitu, hoc est optimum factu, this
a.
this
thing is easy to learn
is best to do.
Only a few Supines in -u are in cognitu, diets, factu, vTsu.
common
use, chiefly
auditu,
b.
The Supine
in
-ii
never takes an Object.
Chapter VI.
— Particles.
These join one word,
COORDINATE CONJUNCTIONS.
341.
Copulative Conjunctions.
phrase, or clause to another.
I.
a) et simply connects.
b)
-que joins more closely than et, and is used especially where the two members have an internal connection with each
other; as,
parentes liberique, parents and children cum homines aestu febrlque jaotantur, wken people art
tossed about with heat
andfever.
224
c)
SYNTAX.
— and of likeness and than. Thus —
connected,
:
atque (ac) usually emphasizes the second of the two
also,
thingii
and indeed, and in fact.
atque (ac) has the
After words
force of
as,
difference,
ego idem sentio ac tu, J think the same as you; haud aliter ac, not otherwise than, d) neque (nee) means and not, neither, nor.
a.
a) -que
is an enclitic, and is appended always to the second of two words connected. Where it connects phrases or clauses, but it is appended to the first word of the second clause when the first word of the second clause is a Preposition,' -que is regularly appended to the next following word as,—
;
;
Ob eamque rem, and on
b)
account of that thing.
;
atque
et
is
used before vowels and consonants
g,
ac never
before
vowels, and seldom before c,
c)
qu.
negative
,
non
is
used for neque when the emphasis of the
special
rests
upon a
word
;
as,
—
vetus et non ignobilis orator, an old and not ignoble orator.
d) For
said
3.
and nowhere, and
Copulative
never,
and
none, the Latin regularly
etc.
nee iisquam, nee umquam, nee uUus,
Conjunctions
are
Correlatives.
;
frequently used
•fflrrelatively
as,
.
et
.
.
et, both
.
.
.
neque (nee)
.
.
and neque (nee),
.
.
neither
.
.
.
nor;
"
cum
turn
.
.
.
.
turn, while
.
.
at the
. .
same time
.
.
tum, not only
.
but also.
Less frequently
et
1*.
.
. .
:
—
;
neque
neque
its
.
.
.
et.
Note that the Latin, with
tendency to emphasize antithetical relations, often uses correlatives, especially et neque, neque . et, et . . . et, where the English employs but a single connective. . .
. . .
4.
In enumerations
a)
—
—
odia, discidia, discordiae, seditiones,
The different members of a series may follow one another without connectives (Asyndeton; see § 346). Thus:
ez cupiditatibuB
bella
nascuntur, from, covetous desires spring up hatred, dissension, discord, sedition, wars.
COORDINATE CONJUNCTIONS.
d)
225
by et
The
different
(Polysyndeton).
members may Thus
:
—
severally be connected
horae cedunt et dies et menses et anm, hours and days and months and years pass away.
c)
The
connective
may be
omitted between the former members,
;
while the last two are connected by -que (rarely et)
as,
—
Caesar in Carnutes, Andes Turonesque legiones deducit, Caesar leads his legions into the territory of the farnutes, Andes, and Turones.
342.
1.
Disjunctive Conjunctions indicate an alternative.
a) aut must be used
clusive; as,
.
when the
alternatives are
mutually ex-
cita
mors venit aut victoria laeta, glad victory comes.
as,
{either')
swift death or
i) vel,
tives
-ve (enclitic) imply a choice between
;
—
the
alterna-
qm aether vel
or heaven.
2.
caelum nominatur, which
is
called aether
Correlatives.
Disjunctive Conjunctions are often used correla-
tively; as,
aut vel
sive
343.
sition.
I
.
.
.
.
aut, either
vel, either
.
.
.
.
or or
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
sive, if
.
.
.orif.
Adversative
Conjunctions.
These
denote
oppo-
a) Bed, but, merely denotes opposition.
b)
c)
verum, but, is stronger than sed, but is less frequently used. autem, but on the other hand, however, marks a transition.
It is
always post-positive.
Definition.
tence, but is
A
post-positive
word
is
one that cannot begin a sen-
placed after one or more words.
disputation, to introduce an £) at, but, is used especially in opposing argument.
e)
atqui means but yet.
not usually stands after the emphatic word, but
/) tamen, yet,
always. truth, i) vero, howevar, indeed, in
is
always post-positive.
226
2.
SYNTAX.
Note the
correlative expressions
. :
—
. . .
sed etiam, not only but also Hon solum (non mode) quidem, not only not, but sed ne nou modo non
. .
even
;
as,
—
.
.
.
.
.
.
not
non modo
tibi
non
irasoor,
tuum, / not only your action.
a.
am
not angry with you, but
sed ne reprehendo quidem factum I do not even blamt
But when the sentence has but one verb, and this stands with the second member, non modo may be used for non modo non; as, adsentatio non modo amico, sed ne libero quidem dlgna est, fiattery is not only not worthy of a friend^ but not even, of Ct free man,
344. Illative Conjunctions. These represent the state« ment which they introduce as following from or as in con-' formity with what has preceded.
1
d) itaque
b')
c')
= and so,
accordingly,
ergo
=
therefore, accordingly.
^)
igitur (regularly post-positive
is
=
therefore, accordingly.
2.
Igitur
never combined with at, atque, -que, or neque.
345. Causal Conjunctions. These denote cause, or give an explanation. They are nam, namque, enim (post-positive),
etenim, for.
346.
Asyndeton.
coordinate
The conjunction
is
sometimes omitted
lively
be-
tween
narration.
Thus
:
—
members, particularly
in
or
impassioned
d)
A
copulative Conjunction
infinita,
is
omitted
;
as,
—
is
avarltia
insatiabilis est, avarice
boundless
(and') insatiable^
Cn. Pompejo, M. Crasso consulibus, in the consulship of Gnaeus Pompey (and) Marcus Crassus.
The
b)
conjunction
is
regularly omitted between the names
of
consuls
when the praenomen (Marcus,
Gains, etc.) is expressed.
as,
An
Adversative Conjunction
may be
omitted;
—
rationes defuerunt, ubertas orationis non defuit, argU' ments were lacking, (but) abundance of words was not,
1
Except in Sallust and Silver Latin.
ADVERBS.
— WORD-ORDER.
227
ADVERBS.
347.
I.
The
Conjunctions, are
etiam, abo, even.
following particles, sometimes classed as more properly Adverbs
:
—
quoque (always post-positive), quidem (always post-positive)
It is
also.
lays stress upon the preceding word. sometimes equivalent to the English indeed, in fact, but more frequently cannot be rendered, except by vocal emphasis. quidem means not even ; the emphatic word or phrase always ne . stands between as, ne ille quidem, not even he. tamen and ver5, in addition to their use as Conjunctions, are often
. . ;
employed as Adverbs.
2.
Negatives.
Two
etc.,
affirmative as in English, as
nihil,
.
. .
numquam,
regularly equivalent to an some ; but when non, nemo, neque, non are accompanied by neque
negatives
are
non
. .
nullT,
.
.
.
take
quidem, the non, non modo, or ne up the negation and emphasize it as,
.
;
—
latter particles
simply
habeo bic neminem neque amicum neque cognatum, / have here no one, neither friend nor relative. non enim praetereundum est ne id quidem, /iir not even that must
be passed by.
a.
Haud
in Cicero and Caesar occurs almost exclusively as a modifier of Adjectives and Adverbs, and in the phrase haud scio an. Latei
writers use
it
freely with verbs.
Chapter VII.
— Word-order and SentenceStructure.
A.
348.
WOHD-ORDER.
In the normal arrangement of the Latin sentence the Subject stands at the beginning of the sentence, the
Predicate at the
end
;
as,
—
Darius olassem quingentarum
navium comparavit, Darius
got
ready a fleet offive hundred ships.
228
349.
SYNTAX.
ment
at
But for the sake of emphasis the normal arrange, often abandoned, and the emphatic word is put the beginning, less frequently at the end of the senis
;
tence
as,
—
magnus
in h5c bello Themistocles fuit,
other course
great was Themistocks in
war vliud iter habemus nullum,
this
we have none.
SPECIAL PRINCIPLES.
Nouns. A Genitive or other oblique lows the word upon which it depends. Thus
350.
I.
:
—
case regularly
fol-
a) Depending upon a
Noun
:
—
tribunus plebis, tribune of the plebs ; niius regis, son of the king; vir magni animi, a man of noble spirit.
Yet always senatus consultum, plebis scTtum.
V)
Depending upon an Adjective
:
—
ignarus rerum, ignorant- of affairs digni amioitia, worthy offriendship ; plus aequo, more than {what is) fair.
2.
Appositives.
Philippus, rex
An
Appositive
regularly
follows
its
Subject;
IS,-
Macedonum,
Philip, king
adsentatio, vitiorum
SL&\vXxix., flattery,
of the Macedonians; promoter of evils.
in
Yet flumen Rhenus, the River Rhine; and always urba Roma, the city Rome.
3.
good
prose
The Vocative
usually follows one or
more words
;
as,
—
posi-
audi, Caesar, hear, Caesar
4.
Adjectives.
of Adjectives.
it.
tion
No general law On the whole
can be laid down for the
they precede the noun
oftener
than they follow
a.
Adjectives of quantity (including numerals') cede their noun as,
;
—
regularly pre-
omnes homines, all men ; septingentae n^ves, seven hundred vessels.
WORD-ORDER.
b.
22g
:
Note the force of position
in the following
—
media urbs,
the middle of the city;
urbs media, the middle city eztremuta bellum, the end of the war bellum eztremum, the last war.
c.
Romanus and Latinus
People
regularly follow
the
;
as,
—
Senate and
senatus populusque Romanus,
ludi RomaiiT, the Roman games feriae Latinae, the Latin holidays.
d.
Roman
When a Noun
tive,
is
modified both by an Adjective and by a Geniis
:
a favorite order
Adjective, Genitive,
Noun
;
as,
—
summa omnium rerum
dance of all things.
abundantia,
the greatest abun-
Pronouns. a. The Demonstrative,
regularly precede the
Relative,
and Interrogative Pronouns
Noun
;
as,
—
hic
ille
homo, this 7na7t homo, that man erant duo itinera, quibus
routes, by which, etc.
itineribus,
etc.
,
there wire two
qui
b.
homo ? what sort
ille in the
its
of man
'
?
But
sense of
that well
;-as,
known^
'
tfiat
famous^
usually stands after
Noun
testula
ilia, ilia,
that well-known ciistotn of ostracism
that famous Medea.
Indefinite
;
Medea
c.
Possessive and
Noun
;
as,
—
Pronouns
usually follow
their
pater meus, tny father i
homo quidam, a
But
its
certain
man
;
mulier aliqua, some woman.
for purposes of contrast the Possessive often precedes
;
d.
Noun as, meus pater, my father (i.e. as opposed to yours, Ms, etc.). Where two or more Pronouns occur in the same sentence,
the Latin
is
—
fond of putting them
in close
proximity
;
as,
—
nisi forte
ego vobis cessare videor,
doing nothing.
unless perchance 1
seem
to you to be
230
6.
SYNTAX.
Adverbs and Adverbial phrases regularly precede the word
as,
they
modify;
valde diligens, extremely diligent i saepe dixi, I have often said; te jam diu hortamur, we have long been urging you; paulo post, a little after.
7.
Prepositions regularly precede the words they govern.
a.
But limiting words often intervene between the
and
its
case
;
as,
—
Preposition
de communi hominum memoria, concerning memory of men ad beate vivendum, for living happily.
b.
the
common
When
magno
a noun
is
modified by an Adjective, the Adjective
;
often placed before the preposition
as,
—
is
in dolore, in great grief
Eumma cum
laude, with the highest credit
thing.
is
qua de causa, for which cause ; banc ob rem, on account of this
c.
For Anastrophe, by which a Preposition
put after
its
case, see § 144,
3,
8.
Conjunctions.
the second place in the
Autem, enim, and igif-.ur regularly stand in sentence, but when combined with est or sunt
as,
they often stand third
;
—
ita est enim, for so
9.
it is.
Words
it,
or Phrases referring to the preceding sentence or to some
;
part of
regularly stand first
as,
—
id ut audlvit,
Corcyram demigravit,
w?ien he heard that (referring
to the contents of the preceding sentence), he
moved to
Corcyra,;
BO
cum
Caesar venisset, timentea connrmat, when Caesar had
(i.e.
come thither
timid.
10.
to the place just mentioned),
he encouraged
the
The
Latin has a fondness for putting side by side words which
;
are etymologically related
as,
—
at ad seuem senez de senectute, sic hoc libro ad amicum amicissimus de amicitia scrips!, as I, an old man, wrote to
an old man, on old age,
so in this book, as
a fond friend, I havt
written to a friend, concerning friendship.
WORD-ORDER.
11,
231
emphasis
are
Special
:
following
—
rhetorical
devices
for
indicating
the
a)
Hyp^rbaton, which
consists in the separation of words that
;
regularly stand together
as,
—
Septimus mihi Originum liber est in manibus, thi seventh book of my Origines is under way reoepto Caesar Orioo profiolscitur, having- recovered
'
.
'
Orictts,
Caesar
set out.
b)
Anaphora, which consists in the repetition of the same word or the same word-order in successive phrases as, sed pleni omnes sunt librl, plenae sapientium voces,
;
—
c)
plena exemplorum vetustas, but all books are full of it, the voices of sages are full of it, antiquity is full of examples of it. Chidsmus,! which consists in changing the relative order of words in two antithetical phrases as,
;
—
multos defendi, laesi neminem, many have I defended, I
have injured no one borribilem ilium diem
aliis,
nobis faustum, that day
dreadful to others, for us fortunate.
d) Synchysis, or the interlocked arrangement.
This is mostly confined to poetry, yet occurs in rhetorical prose, especially that of the Imperial Period ; as,
—
simulatam Pompejanarum gratiam partium, pretended' interest in the Pompeian party.
12.
Metrical Close.
;
At the end
of a sentence certain cadences
were avoided
others were
much employed.
as, as,
Thus
:
—
a) Cadences avoided.
— WW
b)
w
;
www;
;
esse videtur (close of hexameter). esse potest (close of pentameter).
Cadences frequently employed. as, auxerant. w
w
w
1
www
\j
w
;
as,
comprobavit.
esse videatur.
w
;
;
as,
as,
rogatu tuo.
to the strokes
laesi
So named from a fancied analogy
:
Thus
—
of the Greek letter
X
\chi\
multos
X
defendi
neminem
232
JB.
SYNTAX.
SENTENCE-STRUCTURE.
351.
I.
Unity of Subject,
— In
complex sentences the
Latiii
regularly holds to unity of Subject in the different
members; as,—
Caesar primum su5, deinde omnium ex oonspectu remStis equis, ut aequato periculo spem fugae toUeret, oohortatus suos proelium commisit, Caesar having first removed
his
own
horse
from
sight,
then the horses of
all,
in order, by
making
his
2.
the danger equal, to take
away hope offlight,
encouraged
men and joined battle.
serving as the
A word
common
Subject or Object of the main
;
clause
and a subordinate one, stands before both
as,
—
Haedui cum se defendere non possent, legates ad Caesarem
mittunt, since the Haedui could not defend themselves, they sent envoys to Caesar etsi flagrabat bellandi cupiditate, tamen paoi serviendum
putavit, although he
ille
was burning with a
desire to fight, yet he
thought he ought to aim at peace.
a.
The same
i)
is
true also
When
the
Subject
of the
main clause
;
(Direct or Indirect) of a subordinate clause
as,
—
is
Object
Caesar,
cum hoc
set
ei
proiicTsci,
,
when
this
nuntiatum esset, maturat ab urbe had been reported to Caesar he
city.
is at
hastened to
2)
out fro7n the
When
;
the Subject of a subordinate clause
Indirect)
the
same time the Object (Direct or
clause
as,
—
of the
main
L. Manlio,
cum
dictator fuisset,
M. Fomponius
tri-
biinus plebis
Pomponius, tribune of the people, instituted proceedings against Lucius Manlius, though he had been dictator.
dixit,
diem
M.
Of subordinate clauses, temporal, conditional, and adversative more commonly precede the main clause indirect questions and clauses of purpose or result more commonly follow as, postquam haec dixit, profectus est, after he said this, he iet out; 81 quis Ita agat, imprudens sit, if any one should act so, he would,
3.
clauses
;
;
—
be devoid of foresight accidit ut iina nocte omnes
Hermae
deicerentur,
it
happened
that in a single night all the
Hermae were thrown down.
SENTENCE-STRUCTURE.— HINTS ON STYLE.
4.
233
sub-
Sometimes in Latin
;
ordinate clause
SI
as,
—
tlie
main verb
is
placed within
tlie
quid est in me ingeni, quod sentio quam sit exiguum, if there is any talent in me, and I know how little it is.
5.
designates a
The Latin Period. The term Period, when strictly used, compound sentence in which the subordinate clauses are
main clause;
as,
inserted within the
Caesar etsi intellegeba!: qua de causa ea dicerentur, tamen, ne aestatem in Treveris consumere cogeretur, Indutiomarum ad se venire jussit, though Caesar perceived why this was
said, yet, lest
he should be forced to spend the
summer among
the Treveri, he ordered Indutiomarus to come to him.
In the Periodic structure the thought
the sentence
this
is
is
suspended until the end of
to
reached.
Many Roman
and
;
writers were extremely fond of
sentence-structure,
it
was well adapted
the inflectional
it.
character of their language
6.
in English
we
generally avoid
When
there are several subordinate clauses in one Period, the
Latin so arranges
them as
to avoid a succession of verbs.
Thus
:
—
At hostes cum misissent,
qui, quae in castrTs gererentur, cognoscerent, ubi se dSceptos intellezerunt, omnibus copiis snbsecuti ad flumen contendunt, but the enemy when they had sent men to learn what was going on in camp, after discovering that they had been outwitted, followed with all their
forces
and hurried to
the river.
Chapter VIII.
352.
— Hints
on Latin Style.
is
In this chapter brief consideration
given to
a few features of
style
Latin diction which belong rather to
than to formal grammar.
NOUNS.
353.
I.
Where
ie
a distinct reference to several persons or things
is
is
involved, the Latin
frequently
much more
exact in the use
of
tht
Plural ^zr:
the English; as,
234
domos
SYNTAX.
eunt, they go hoine
(i.e. to
their homes');
Germani corpora curant, the Germans care for the body; animos militum recreat, he renews the courage of the soldiers; dies noctesque timere, to be in a state offear day and night.
2.
In case of Neuter Pronouns and Adjectives used substantively,
the Latin often employs the Plural where the English uses the SingU'
lar; as,
omnia sunt perdita, everything is lost quae cum ita sint, since this is so ; haeo omnibus pervulgata sunt, this is very well known
3.
to all.
The
Latin
is
usually
more
concrete than the English, and espe-
cially less
9.
bold in the personification of abstract qualities.
Thus
:
—
puero, a pueris, /rozw boyhood; Sulla dictatore, in Sulla's dictatorship me duce, under my leadership Roman! cum Cartbaginiensibus pacem fecerunt = Rome made peace with Carthage; liber doctrinae plenus = a learned book prudentia Themistoclis Graecia servata est = Themistocles''s foresight saved Greece.
4.
The Nouns
of Agency in -tor and -sor (see § 147. i) denote a
permanent or
characteristic activity ; as,
—
accusatores (professional) accusers;
oratores, pleaders ;
cantores, singers
Arminius, Germaniae liberator, Arminius,
u.
liberator
of Germany.
are
To
denote single instances of an action, other expressions
;
commonly employed
as,
—
Numa, qui Romulo
qui qui
J.
sucoessit, Numa, succsssor of Romulus;
auditors.
mea leguut, my readers ;
me audiunt,
my
The
a Noun.
Latin avoids the use of prepositional phrases as modifiers of In English we say The war against Carthage ; ' a journey
:
'
'
through
GauV;
;
Cities on the sea''
;
'the book in
my
hands''; 'the fight
at Salamis'
etc.
mode
of expression.
The Latin Thus
:
;
—
in such cases usually employs another
a)
A
Genitive
as,
—
injuries.
dolor injuriarum, resentment at
-HINTS ON STYLE.
S)
235
An
Adjective
;
as,
—
urbes maritimae, cities on the sea pugna Salaminia, the fight at Salamis.
c)
A Participle A
;
as,
—
facta, the battle at Cannae.
as,
;
pugna ad Cannas
d)
Relative clause
—
est, the book in
liber qui in
meis manibus
certain limits
modifiers.
is
my
hands.
Note.
sitional
— Yet
within
the Latin does
employ Prepofollowing are
phrases as
Noun
This
is
particularly frequent
when the governing noun
typical
examples
:
—
derived from a verb.
The
transitus in Britanniam, the passage to Britain excessus e vita, departure from life;
odium erga Romanos,
liber
hatred of the
Romans
de senectute,
the book on old age
amor
in patriam, love for one's country.
ADJECTIVES.
354.
tives are
a)
I.
Special
Latin
Equivalents
for
English
Adjec-
A
Genitive
;
as,
—
=
moral virtues
virtutes animi
dolores corporis
b)
=
;
bodily
ills.
An
Abstract
rei
Noun
as,
—
;
no vitas
c)
asperitas
= the strange circumstance; viarum = rough roads.
as,
Hendiadys (see § 374, 4)
ratio et
—
ordo =
systematic order
ardor et impetus
=
eager onset.
;
d) Sometimes an Adverb
as,
—
modified
2.
omnes circa populi, all the surrounding tribes su5s semper Taostes,- their perpetual foes. Often a Latin Noun is equivalent to an English Noun
;
by an Adjective
as,
—
dootrlna, theoretical knowledge ;
prudentia, practical knowledge;
libellus,
little
oppidum, walled town
book.
236
3.
SYNTAX.
Adjectives are not used in immediate agreement with propel
;
names but an Adjective may limit vir, homo, ille, or some word used as an Appositive of a proper name as, Socrates, homo sapiens — the -wise Socrates;
;
—
other
Scipio, vir fortissimus
=
the doughty Scipio
Syracusae, urbs praeclarissima
4.
= famous
Syracuse.
An
;
Adjective
as,
Genitive
—
may
be equivalent to a Possessive or Subjective
1
pastor regius, the shepherd of the king;
tumultus
servilis, the uprising of the slaves.
PRONOUNS.
355.
I.
In
Compound Sentences
itself
the Relative Pronoun has a fondthe
ness for connecting
main one
a
;
as,
—
with the subordinate clause rather than
quo cum quaereretur, quid mazime ezpediret, respondit, when it was asked of him what was best, he replied. (Less commonly, qui, cum ab eo quaereretur, respondit.)
2.
Uterque, ambo.
Uterque means each of two ; ambo
of the two brothers departed
(i.e.
means
both; as,
uterque frater
rately)
;
abiit, each
sepa-
ambo
fratres abierunt,
a.
i.e.
the two brothers departed together.
The
i)
Plural of
uterque occurs With Nouns used only in the
—
Plural (see § 56)
;
as,—
in utris'que castris, in each camp.
2)
Where
there
;
is
a distinct reference to two groups
persons or things
as,
—
of
utrique duces clari fuerunt, the generals on each eral in number) were famous.
side (sev-
VERBS.
356.
supplied
:
I.
—
In case of Defective
and Deponent Verbs, a
Passive
is
a)
By
the corresponding verbal
;
esse, etc
as,
—
Nouns
in combination with
in odio sumus, we are hated; in invidia sum. I atn envied;
HINTS ON STYLE.
admirationi est, he is admired \ oblivione bbruitur, he is forgotten
oblivion)
237
(lit. is
overwhelmed by
in
b)
usu esse,
to be used.
By
the Passive of Verbs of related meaning.
Thus
:
— —
agitari as Passive of persequi
temptari as Passive of adoriri.
2.
The
a)
lack of the Perfect Active Participle in Latin
Participle
is
supplied
Sometimes by the Perfect Passive
nent; as,
of the Depo-
adhortatus, having exhorted veritus, having feared
^)'By the Ablative Absolute; as, hostium agris vastatis Caesar ezercitum reduzit, having ravaged the country of the enemy, Caesar led back
his
c)
army.
clauses
;
By subordinate
eo
as,
—
there,
cum
advenisset, castra posuit, having arrived
he pitched a camp hostes qui in urbem irruperant, the enemy having burst
into the city.
the
The Latin agrees with English in the stylistic employment of Second Person Singular in an indefinite sense (='one^). Cf. the English Vou can drive a horse to water, but you can't make him drink.'' But in Latin this use is mainly coniined to certain varieties of the Subjunctive, especially the Potential (§ 280) Jussive (§ 275), De3.
' ,
and the Subjunctive in conditional sentences of the Examples sort included under § 302, 2, and 303. videres, you could see utare vTribus, use your strength, quid h5c homine facias, what are you to do <wi'h this man? mens quoque et animus, nisi tamquam lumini oleum TnstillSs,
liberative (§ 277),
:
—
exstingttuntur seneotute, the
into the laM.p
intellect
tinguished by old age, unless, so to speak,
and mind too are exyou keep pouring oil
eis
tanto
amore possessiones suas amplexi tenebant, ut ab
divelli oitius posse diceres, they clung to their possessions -with such an affectionate embrace, that you would have
membra
said their limbs could sooner be torn from their bodies.
238
SYNTAX.
PECULIARITIES IN THE USE OF THE ACCUSATIVE
357.
I.
To
denote 'so
many years,
etc.,
afterwards or
before'' the
Latin employs not merely the Ablative of Degree of Difference with post and ante (see § 223), but has other forms of expression. Thus :^
post quinque aiinos, five years afterward; paucos ante dies, a few days before; ante qnadxienniuin, four years before; post diem quartum quam ab urbe discesseramus,/oar days
after
we had left
ante tertium
died.
2.
the city
annum quam
decesserat, three years before he had
The Latin seldom combines both
Infinitive
;
same
as,
—
Subject and Object with the
Romanos Hanniba^em
vTcisse constat.
Such a sentence would be ambiguous, and might mean either that the Romans had conquered Hannibal, or that Hannibal had conquered the Romans. Perspicuity was gained by the use of the Passive Infinitive
;
as,
—
Romanos ab Hannibale
that the
victos esse constat,
defeated by Hannibal.
it is
well established
Romans were
PECULIARITIES IN CONNECTION -WTITH THE USB OP THE DATIVE.
358.
I
.
The English for does
not always correspond to a Dative
notion in Latin, but
viz. in the senses
—
is
often the equivalent of
pro with the
Ablative,
a) In defense of; as,
—
to die for one's country.
as,
pro patria mori,
b) Instead
of, in behalf of ;
unus pr5 omnibus dixit, one spoke for all; haec pro lege dicta sunt, these things were said for
law.
c)
the
In proportion
to
;
as,
—
angusti,
pro multitudine hominum eSrum fTn.es erant for the population, their territory was small.
HINTS ON STYLE.
2.
239
motion
is
Similarly, English to
when
it
indicates
rendered in
Latin
by ad.
a.
Note, however, that the Latin may say either soribere ad aliquem, or scribere alicui, according as the idea of motion
is
or
is
not predominant.
So
in several similar expressions.
3.
In the poets, verbs of mingling with, contending with, joining,
to,
clinging
etc.,
sometimes take the Dative.
:
Grecism.
Thus
—
This Construction
is
a
se miscet viris, he mingles with the men oontendis Homero, you contend with Homer deztrae deztram jungere, to clasp hand with hand.
PECULIARITIES IN THE USE OF THE GENITIVE.
359.
I.
The
Possessive Genitive gives emphasis to the possessor,
;
the Dative of
Possessor emphasizes the fact of possession
as,
—
hortus patris est, the garden is my father'' s mihi hortus est, /possess a garden.
2.
The
as,—
foolish to say;
tive;
Latin can say either stulti or stultum est dioere, it is but Adjectives of one ending permit only the Geni-
sapientis est
haeo secum reputare,
it is
the
part of a wise
man
te
consider this.
Part VI.
PROSODY.
—
«
360.
Prosody
treats of metres
and
versification.
Latin Poetry was essentially different from English. In our own language, poetry is based upon accent, and poetical form consists essentially in a certain succession of accented and unaccented syllables.
361.
Latin Verse.
in character
Latin poetry, on the other hand, was based not upon
accent, but
cal
upon
quantity, so that with the
in
Romans
poeti-
form consisted
a certain succession of long andshori
syllables,
i.e. of long and short intervals of time. This fundamental difference in the character of English and Latin poetry is a natural result of the difference in
character of the two languages.
nate.
English
is
is
a strongly
accented language, in which quantity
Latin, on the other hand,
relatively subordi-
was a
quantitative lan-
guage, in which accent was relatively subordinate.
QUANTITY or VOWELS AND SYLLABLES.
GENERAL PRINCIPLES.
362.
The
general principles for the quantity of vowels
and
I.
syllables
peculiarities are to
have been given above be noted here
:
—
in § 5.
The
following
A
A.
vowel
is
usually short
when
24.0
followed
:
(§
5.
2), but the following exceptions occur
—
by another vowel
QUANTITY OF VOWELS AND SYLLABLES.
;
241
as, illius, a) In the Genitive termination -ius (except alterius) totius. Yet the i may be short in poetry as, illius, totius.
;
b)
In the Genitive and Dative Singular of the Fifth Declension But fidSi, rSi, sp6i (§ 52, i). as, diei, aoiei.
In £10, excepting
fit
c)
and forms where
fiunt
;,
i
is
followed by er.
Thus
:
flebam,
fiat,
but fieri, fierem.
the
d) In a few other words, especially words derived from Greek as, dius, Aeneas, Darius, heroes, etc.
;
2. A diphthong is usually long (§5. B. 2), but the preposition prae in composition is often shortened before a vowel as, praeacutus 3. A syllable containing a short vowel followed by two consonants long, even when one of the consonants is in the follow(§ 5. B. 2) is Occasionally the syllable is long ing word; as, terret populum.
;
when both consonants are in the following word;
Bpicas.
4.
first
as,
pro segete
etc.,
Compounds of jacio, though
syllable long, as
written inicit, adicit,
inj-, adj-.
have the
though written
ejus,
in major, pejor, j, S and 6 made a long syllablfe, e.g. ejusdem, Pompejus, rejecit, etc. These were pronounced, So also somemai-jor, pei-jor, ei-jus, Pompei-jus, rei-jeoit, etc. times before i, e.g. Pompe-i, pronounced Pompei-i; re-icio, pro5.
Before
nounced rei-ioio.
Quantity of Pinal Syllables.
A. Final
363.
I.
Syllables ending in
is
a Vowel.
:
Final a
is
mostly short, but
long
—
;
a) In the Ablative Singular of the First Declension
b) In the
c)
as,
porta.
Imperative
;
as,
lauda.
;
In indeclinable words (except itS, qui5) tra, postea, interea, etc.
is
as, triginta,
con-
2.
Final e
usually short, but
is
long
:
—
as, die, a) In the Ablative Singular of the Fifth Declension hence hodig, quare. Here belongs also fame (§ 59. re
;
;
2. i).
b) In the Imperative of the
Second Conjugation;
as,
mone,
habS,
c) In
etc.
;
yet occasionally cavS, valS.
sion,
Adverbs derived from Adjectives of the Second Declenalong with fere and ferme. BenS, malg, temerS,
se,
saepS have S. d) In e, de, me, te,
ne
{not, lest),
ne
{verily).
242
3.
PROSODY.
Final
i is
usually long, but
is
short in nisi and quasi.
i,
Mihi,
have regularly ibidem, ibique, ubique.
tibi,
sibi, ibi, ubi,
but sometimes i
;
yet always
4.
Final o
is
regularly long, but
is
short
:
—
;
a) In eg6, du6,
modS
{only), citS.
b) Rarely in the
c)
First Person Singular of the Verb, and in Nominatives of the Third Declension as, amS, le6. In a few compounds beginning with the Preposition pro, especially before f as prSfundere, prdficiaci, prSfugere.
;
5.
Final
u
is
always long.
,
B. -Final Syllables ending in a Consonant.
364.
short.
I.
The
Final syllables ending in any other consonant than Bare following words, however, have a long vowel sSl, sol,
:
Lar, par, ver, fur, die, due, en, non, quia, sin,
the adverbs hie, illic, istic.^
2.
sic,-
cur.
Also
Final syllables in -as are long
;
asj
terras,
amas.
:
3.
Final syllables in -es are regularly long, but are short
—
a) In the Nominative and Vocative Singular of dental stems (§ 33) of the Third Declension which have a short penult in
as, seggs (segetis), obsSs (obsidis), milSs, But a few have -es viz. pes, aries, abies, paries. b) In Ss {thou art), penSs.
the Genitive
;
divSs.
;
4.
5.
Final -os
Final -is
is
is
usually long, but short in 6s (ossis),
usually short, but
;
is
long
:
—
compSs, impSs.
a) In Plurals
b) In the
as,
as, portis, hortis, nobis, vobis, nubis (Ace). Second Person Singular Perfect Subjunctive Active; amaveris, monueris, audiveris, etc. Yet occasional
exceptions occur.
c)
In the Second Person Singular Present Indicative Active the Fourth Conjugation as, audis.
; ; ; ;
of
d) In vis, force ; is, thou goest ; fis sis velis thou wilt (mavis, quamvis, quivis, etc.).
6.
nolTs
;
vis,
Final -us
is
usually short, but
is
long
:
—
a) In the Genitive Singular and in the Nominative, Accusative, and Vocative Plural of the Fourth Declension as, fructfls.
;
The pronouns hie, hoe, and the adverb hue, probably had a The syllable was made long by pronouncing hicc, hoco, etc.
1
short vowel
VERSE-STRUCTURE.
S) In the
243
the Third Declension in which the
as,
Nominative and Vocative Singular of those nouns of u belongs to the stem palus (-udis), servitus (-utis), tellus (-uria).
retain in
365.
Greek Nouns
Latin their original
quantity
;
as,
Aenea, epitome, Deles, Pallas, Simois, Salamis, Didus, Faridi, Yet Greek nouns in -top (-or) regularly aer, aether, crater, bero&s. shorten the vowel of the final syllable as, rhetSr, HectSr.
;
VERSE-STRUCTURE.
GENERAL
366.
I.
PRINCIPLES.
is
The
metrical unit in versification
a short
syllable, tech-
nically called
lent
a mora (w)to two morae.
A
long syllable (_^)is regarded as equiva-
2.
A
Foot
is
a group of syllables.
:
important kinds of fundamental feet
—
The
following are the most
Feet of Three Morae.
Feet of Four Morae.
_
yj 3. 4.
tylic,
vj
Trochee.
_ww
feet.
Dactyl.
_
is
Iambus. a succession of
ww_
Anapaest.
A Verse
The
different kinds of verses are
named
Trochaic, Iambic, Dac-
Anapaestic, according to the foot which forms the basis of their
structure.
5.
Ictus.
ceives the greater
is
In every fundamental foot the long syllable naturally reprominence. This prominence is called ictus.i It
:
denoted thus
6.
Z.
ww
;
Z.
w
The
syllable
is
Thesis and Arsis.
thesis
;
which receives the
ictus is
called the
7.
the rest of the foot
called the arsis.
Elision.
are regularly elided before
reading,
we omit
Final syUables ending in a vowel, a diphthong, or -m a word beginning with a vowel or h. In the elided syllable entirely. This may be indicated
;
as follows:
corpora in un5
mult"" ill* et
;
m5nstr-'« horrendum
and
causae irarum.
a.
Omission of elision is called Hl&tus. It occurs as, O at praesidium. after monosyllabic interjections
;
especially before
1
Ictus
Dimply the quantitative
feet.
but was neither stress accent nor musical accent, was not accent, prominence inherent in the long syllables di fundammtaX
—
—
244
PROSODY.
8. The ending of a word within a foot is called a Caesiira {cutting). Every verse usually has one prominent caesura. The ending of a word and foot together within the verse is called a diaeresis.
Verses are distinguished as Catalectic or Acatalectic. A Cataone in which the last foot is not complete, but lacks one or more syllables an Acatalectic verse has its last foot complete.
9.
lectic verse is
;
10.
At
the end of a verse a slight pause occurred.
either long
Hence
the
final
syllable
may be
terminate in a vowel or
vowel.
1 1
m,
or short (syllaba auceps), and may even though the next verse begins with a
Iambic, Trochaic, and Anapaestic verses are further designated
as dimeter, trimeter, tetrameter, according to the
(pairs of feet) single feet,
number of
dipodies
which they contain.
Dactylic verses are measured by
tetrameter, pentameter, hexameter,
and are designated as
accordingly.
SPECIAL PECULIARITIES.
367.
I.
Syniz^sis (Syna^resis).
Two
successive vowels in the
;
interior of a
word are often united
into a long syllable
as,
aureis, deinde, auteire deesse.
2.
Diastole.
A
syllable usually short is
sometimes long
;
as,
videt, audit.
3.
Systole.
A syllable usually long
stetSrunt.
is
sometimes short
;
as,
a.
Diastole
usually represent
and Systole are not mere arbitrary processes. an earlier pronunciation which had
and u sometimes become
;
They
passed
out of vogue in the ordinary speech.
4.
After a consonant,
i
preceding syllable then becomes long
as,
—
j
and v.
The
abjete for abiete
5.
;
genva
for
genua.
Sometimes V becomes u
silua for silva
;
as,
;
dissoluo
for
dissolvo.
6.
Sometimes a verse has an extra
syllable.
Such a verse
is
called
is
an Hyp^rmeter.
united with the
The
extra syllable ends in a vowel or -m, and
Thus
:
—
initial
vowel or h of the next verse by Synaph^ia,
ignar'
hominumciue looorum""*
erramus.
VERSE-STRUCTURE.
7.
245
Tmesis
(cutting).
;
into their
elements
as,
—
Compound words
are occasionally separated
quo
8.
mS cumque
;
rapit tempestas, for
is
quocumque,
etc.
Syncope.
as,
consonants
—
A
short vowel
sometimes dropped between two
repoBtus
for repositus.
THE DACTYLIC HEXAMETER.
consists theoretically of six dactyls.
Hexameter, or Heroic Verse, But in all the feet except the fifth, a spondee ( ) may take the place of The sixth foot may be either a spondee or a the dactyl. trochee, since the final syllable of a verse may be either
368.
I.
The
Dactylic
long or short (syllaba anceps).
the
The
following represents
scheme of the verse
:^
—cxu, .j^oo, _^oo, —^yo-j S-^j^t
2.
_^'
Such verses are
;
Sometimes we find a spondee
Spondaic.
in the fifth foot.
called
fifth
A
dactyl usually stands in the fourth place, and the
and sixth
feet are generally
made up
of a quadrisyllable
as,
—
armatumo"^ auro circumspicit Oriona. cara deum suboles, magnum Jovis incrementum.
3.
Caesura.
a)
The
eter
favorite position of the caesura in the Dactylic
is
after the thesis of the third foot
||
;
as,
—
Hexam-
arma virumque cano
fourth foot, usually
foot; as,
Trojae qui primus ab
oris.
b) Less frequently the caesura occurs after the thesis of the
accompanied by another
sic orsus
in
the second
inde toro
c)
||
pater Aeneas
{{
ab
alto est.
syl-
Sometimes the caesura occurs between the two short
lables of the third foot
;
as,
—
O
passi graviora
is
||
dabit deus his quoque finem.
This caesura
after a
called Feminine, as opposed to the caesura
long
syllable,
which
is
called Masculine
(as under
a and
b)
246
d)
PROSODY.
A
pause sometimes occurs at the end of the fourth foot. This is called the Bucolic Diaeresis, as it was borrowed by the Romans from the Bucolic poetry of the Greeks. Thus
: ; {{
solstitium pecori defendite
jam venit
aestas.
DACTYLIC PENTAMETER.
369. I. The Dactylic Pentameter consists of two parts, each of which contains two dactyls, followed by a long
syllable.
Spondees may take the place of the
dactyls
but not in the second. The long syllable at the close of the first half of the verse always ends a
in the first part,
word.
The scheme
is
the following
:
—
2.
the Hexameter.
The Pentameter is never used alone, but only in connection with The two arranged alternately form the so-called EleThus
:
giac Distich.
—
Vergillum vidi tantum, nee amara TibuUo Tempus amicitiae fata dedere meae.
IAMBIC MEASURES.
370. I. The most important Iambic verse is the Iambic Trimeter (§ 366. ii), called also Senarius. This is an acatalectic verse. It consists of six Iambi. Its pure form is
:
—
W
The Caesura
2.
W
ille
W
\J
w
w
less fre-
Beatus
qui procul negotiis.
usually occurs in the third foot;
quently in the fourth.
In place of the Iambus, a Tribrach (kj <j w) In the odd feet (first, third, and
may
fifth)
stand in any
foot but the last.
may
stand a
Spondee, Dactyl, or Anapaest, though the last two are less Sometimes a Proceleusmatic (w w w o) occurs.
3.
frequent.
In the Latin comic writers, Plautus and Terence, great freepermitted, and the various equivalents of the Iambus, w>. the Dactyl, Anapaest, Spondee, Tribrach, Proceleusmatic, are freely admitted in any foot except the last.
dom
is
SUPPLEMENTS TO THE GRAMMAR.
I.
JULIAN CALENDAR.
:
371.
rius,
I. The names of the Roman months are Januarius, FetfruaMartius, Aprilis, Majus, Junius, Julius (Quintilis i prior to
46
in
B.C.),
•
ber,
Augustus (Sextilis 1 before the Empire), September, Octo. November, December. These words are properly Adjectives
Dates were reckoned from three points in the month
a)
b)
:
agreement with mensis understood.
2.
—
The Calends, the first of the month. The Nones, usually the fifth of the month, but
in
the seventh
March, May, July, and October.
Ides, usually the
c)
The
thirteenth of the month, but the
fif-
teenth in March, May, July, and October.
3.
all
From
these points dates were reckoned backward
;
consequently
days after the Ides of any
before
4.
month were reckoned the Calends of the month next following.
as so
many days
month is Ealendas, Nonas, Idiis. The second day before was designated as die tertio ante Kalendas Nonas, etc. Simi larly the third day before was designated as die quarto, and so on
before the Calends, Nones, or Ides of any
designated as pridie
The day
These designations are arithmetically
reckoned both ends of the series.
date
is
inaccurate,
but the
Romans
The Roman numeral
indicating the
before
5.
therefore always larger by one than the actual number of days Nones, Ides, or Calends.
In indicating dates, the
of an Adjective agreeing with
of expression occur, of
name of the month Ealendas, Nonas,
is
added
in the form
Idiis.
is
Various forms
:
which that given under d)
most common
—
quTnto ante Idiis Martias b) quinto ante Idiis Martias c) quTnto (V) Idiis Martias d) ante diem quintum Idiis Martias.
a) dig
; ;
' Originally the Roman year began with March. This explains the names Quintilis, Sextilis, September, etc., fifth month, sixth month, etc.
247
248
6.
SUPPLEMENTS TO THE GRAMMAR.
These designations may be treated
the prepositions in, ad,
ex
;
as,
—
as
nouns and combined
with
ad ante diem IV Kalendas Octobres, up to the 28tA of September. ex ante diem quintum Idas Oototrcea, from the nth of October.
In leap-year the 25th was reckoned as the extra day in February. diem VI Kalendas Martias, and the 25th as ante diem bis VI Kal Mart.
7.
The
24th was designated as ante
372.
Days
of the
CALENDAR.
month.
FIGURES OF SYNTAX.
II.
249
PROPER NAMES.
Roman
citizen regularly consisted of three
373.
parts
:
I
.
the
The name praenomen
of a
(or given name), the
nomen (name
of the gens
or clan),
and the
ex'emplied by
cognomen (family name). Such atypical name is Marcus TuUius Cicero, in which Marcus is the prae-
a second
Qomen, TuUius the nomen, and Cicero the cognomen. Sometimes cognomen (in later Latin called an agnomen) is added as, expecially in honor of military achievements
—
;
—
Gaius Cornelius Scipio Africanus.
2.
Abbreviations of Proper Names.
App.
= Aulus. = Appius. C. = Gaius. Cn. = Gnaeus. D. = Deoimus. K. = Kaeso. L. = Lucius. M. = Marcus. M'. = Manius.
A.
III.
Mam. = Mamercus.
= Numerius. = Publius. Q. = Quintus. Sex. = Sextus. Ser. = Servius. Sp. = Spurius. T. = Titus. Ti. = Tiberius.
N.
P.
FIGURES OF SYNTAX AND RHETORIC.
A. Figures
of
Syntax.
;
374.
I.
Ellipsis
is
the omission of one or more words
?
as,
quid multa, -why (should I say) much
2.
Brach^logy
is
at ager sine cultara
a brief or condensed form of expression as, fructuSsus esse non potest, sic sine doo;
tion, so the
trina animus, as a field cannot be productive without cultivamind {cannot be productive') without learning.
Special varieties of
Brachylogy are
in
—
;
a)
Zeugma,
which one verb is made to stand for two as, minis aut blandimentis corrupta = (terrified) by threats
or corrupted by flattery.
—
b)
Compendiary Comparison, by which a
object
is
modifier of an
mentioned instead of the object
itself;
as,—
dissimilis erat Chares
eorum et factis et moribua, lit. Chares was different from their conduct and character^
Chares's conduct and character were different,
etc.
i.e.
25o
3.
FIGURES OF SYNTAX AND RHETORIC.
Pleonasm
is
an unnecessary fullness of expression
lit.
;
as,
prius praedicam,
/ ivill first say
in advance.
4. Hendiadys (Iv Stot Svoiv, one through two') is the use of two nouns joined by a conjunction, in the sense of a noun modified by a Genitive or an Adjective as,
;
—
f ebris et aestus, the heat offever celeritate cursuque, by swift running.
5. Prol^psis, or Anticipation, is the introductior^ of an advance of the action which makes it appropriate as,
;
in
—
epithet
Bubmersas obrue puppes,
i.e.
lit.
overwhelm their submerged
ships,
overwhelm and sink
their ships.
a.
The name
it
Prolepsis
is
also applied to the introduction of a noun
or pronoun as object of the main clause where
we should expect
Thus
:
to stand as subject of a subordinate clause.
—
nosti
Marcellum quam tardus sit, you know how slow Marcellus is (lit.you know Marcellus, how slow he is).
varieties of Prolepsis are chiefly confined to poetry.
is
Both
6.
Anacolilthon
a lack of grammatical consistency in the con;
struction of the sentence
as,
—
turn
Anci
filii
.
.
.
ija-peasias eis inda^cataa oresceie, then the sons
.
of Ancus
7.
.
.
their indignation increased all the more.
Hysteron Prdteron
et in
consists in the inversion of the natural
;
order of two words or phrases
as,
—
moriamur
media arma ruamua =
let
us rush into the midst
of
arms and die.
S. Figures of Rhetoric.
375.
I.
Litotes
(literally softening) is
;
by the denial of its opposite
as,
—
the expression of an
idea
baud parum laboris, no little toil (i.e. much toil) non ignoro, I dm not ignorant (i.e. I am well aware).
;
2.
as,
—
3.
Oxymdron
Alliteration
is
the combination of contradictory conceptions; sapiens Tnsania, wise folly.
is
the
employment of a succession of words
letter
presenting frequent repetition of the same
as,
(mostly
initial)
sensim sine sensu aetas senescit.
4.
Onomatoptieia
is
the suiting of sound to sense
sonitii quatit
;
as,
quadrupedante putrem
ungula campum, 'And shake
with horny hoofs the solid ground.''
INDEX OF THE SOURCES OF THE H^LUSTRATIVE EXAMPLES CITED IN THE SYNTAX.'
p. ii8,
nonne
videtis, Sesi. 47.
num
exspectas,
PhU.
30.
15.
ii,
ii,
86.
videsne,
Vatm.
sensistine, Cat. i, 8.
non te, Fam. ii, 16, 3. omnes artes, Ljti. 25, 37. rogatus, de Dom. 16. multa, N. D. ii, 166.
milites,
a rebus, de Sen.
p. iig,
B. C.
i,
54.
visne locum, Leg.
estisne, Liv.
i,
i,
p. 127, tremit, Lucr.
'
iii,
489.
38, 2.
jam
p. 120,
ea, Ter. Phor. S2Sestne frater, Ter. Ad. 569.
p. 121,
decorum est, Hor. Od. iii, 2, 13. opportune acddit, Alt. i, 17, 2. Nimia, Eut. i, 3. philosophia, Tusc. Disp. ii, i6.
assentatio, Lael. 8g.
p. 122,
Corinthi, Tac. E.ii, audi tu, lAvy, i, 24.
nate,
1.
mea, Aen.
est, Ter.
ij
664. 185.
rumor
p. 123,
And.
galeam, Aen. ii, 392. ductus, Ov. Am. iii, g, 61.
nuda, Aen. i, 320. manus, Aen. ii, 57. hie locus, B. G. i, 49. indomum, Ac. i, 13. p. 128, Thalam, SaU. Jug. 75, 1. Thurios in, Nep. Ale. 4. cum Acen, Nep. Dat. 5. Italiam venit, Aen. i, 2. p. 130, amids, Sail. C. 16, 4. Orgetorix, B. G.i, 2. p. 131, munitioni, 5. G. i, 10. mihi ante, Verr. v, 123. illi, Tac. Ag. 9. intercludere. Pi. JW. G. 223.
p. 124,
nodo sinus, Aen. i, 320. idem gloriari, de Sen. 32. eadem peccat, N. D. i, 31. multa egeo, Gell. xiii, 24. multum valet, 'Hor. Epp. i,
nihil peccat, Stat. 161.
oppidum, .B. tumihi, Verr.
p. 132, erit ille. Eel.
6, 52.
C
iii,
80.
3, 213.
i,
quid mihi, Hor. Epp.
i,
3, 15.
7.
quae ista. Par. 41. honorem, Verr. iv,
Caesar,
Dii).
ii,
25.
minitaritem vana, SU. i, 306. acerba tuens, Lucr. v, 33. dulce loquentem, Hor. Od. i, 22, 24 multum sunt, B. G. iv, 1, 8. servitutem, PI. Pers. 34 a. vitam, Ter. Ad. 859.
stadium, Qff. iii, 10, 42. Olympia, de Sen. 14.
p. 125, pisds,
79.
i,
sdntillam, Aen.
174.
ii,
disputatio, Tusc. Disp.
2.
honesta, Off. iii, 38. p. 133, castris, B. G. vii, 16.
legiones, B. C.ii, 22.
receptui, B. G. vii, 47.
fortunae,
Fam.
vi, s, i.
Sen. N. Q. iii, 18, 2. orationes, Brut. 82. homines, Rose. Am. loi; otium, Hor. Od. ii, 16, i.
quibus, Flac. 19.
hos
tibi, iVe^.
Paus.
2.
me
p.
duas, Att.
te,
ii,
7, x.
gerendo, ijii. i, 23. noxiae, Leg. iii, 11. p. 134, it clamor, Aen. v, 451.
p. 137,
me
126, te litteras, Pis. 73.
hoc
Ter. Hec. 766.
me
id, PI.
Tr. 96.
dum Latio, Aen. i, 6, magni, Nep. Cat. i, 2. tantae molis, Aen. i, 33.
p. 257-
•
For explanation of the abbreviations, see 251
252
INDEX TO THE EXAMPLES.
ii,
p. 138, viri, Tusc. Disp.
43.
memoria, Or. 54.
Epicuri, i''. V, 3. praeteritorum, Div. i, 63. nomina, PI. Foen. 1062. reminiscere, B. G. i, 13. reminlscens, Nep. Ale. 6.
p. 139,
sunt specie, B. G. vi, scopuUs, Aen. i, 166. Helvetii, B. G. i, 2, z.
28, 1.
me
p. 149,
dignor, Aen. i, 335. Cn. Pompeio, B. G. iv,
virtutes. Fin.
ii,
1.
omnes
117.
perditis,
Fam.
vi, i, 4.
2.
mihi patriae, Stdl. 19. te veteris, ad Her. iv, 24, 33. me admones, ad All. v, i, 3.
nuUo adversante, Tac. A.i,
passis palmis, B. C.
p. 150, stant litore,
Stella,
iii,
98.
7.
audito eum, Liv. xxviii,
pecuniae, Flacc. 43. p. 140, miseremini, Verr. i, 72. p. 141, desine, Hor. Od. ii, 9, 17. operum, Hor. Od. iii, 17, 16.
p. 142, curis,
caret,
Aen. vi, 901. p. 151, a Gergovia, 5. G. vii, 59,
1.
N. D.
ii,
52.
Marc. 34.
s, 51.
i,
P- IS3,
3, 66.
biennjo, Tac. Agr. 14. prima et, Tac. A. i, 37.
Caesar, B. G.
omnium
eadem
12, 9.
Hor. Sat.
alacritas,
rerum, Fam. vi, B. G. iv,
5.
21, i.
24, 4.
p.
urbem, Nep. Thras. 1. 143, abstinere, Plin. Epp. i, hostes, B. G. i, 1, 4.
praedones, Verr. dissentio, Plane,
secernaiitur. Cat.
iv,
res operae, B. G. v, 11,
p. 154,
144.
32.
g.
i,
stultitia, F. iii, 39. domus, (^ !or, Ter. j4»i. 891. pars, Sail. Jug. 14, 15. sencctus, de Sen. 55. p. 156, exercitus, lAvy, xxxix, 1.
ab Ulixe, Liv. i, 49, 9. a fortuna, B. G.v, 34, 2. a multitudine, B. G. iii, 2,
p. 144, melle dulcior, de Sen. 31. patria. Cat. i, 27.
p. 157, virtus, Lael. 100. p. 158,
1.
me me
oravit, Phil,
ii,
45.
2.
suum genium,
p. 159,
oraverunt, Div. Caec. Tae. Dial.
9.
amplius, 3. G. vii, ij, i. opinione, B. G. ii, 3, i.
Hannibalem, Sest. 142. suus quemque, Rose. Am. Belgae, B. G. ii, i, 1.
B. G. vi, 8, i. Themistodes, Nep. Them.
Galli,
67.
munere, Aen. vi, 885. came, 5aW. Jus. 89. castris, B. G. ii, ,26, 4. opus est properato. Mil. 49. p. 145, nititur, Aen. vi, 760.
uervis, JV.
9.
5.
illud intellego. Sail. Jug. 85, hie est, PI. Tr. 697.
p. 160,
D.
ii,
59.
mortali, Lucr. v, 65. quid hoc, Sest. 29.
de Sen. 10. non is sum, B. G. v, 30, non suspicabatur, Verr.
vincula, Co/, iv,
7.
ii,
Maximum,
2.
i,
36.
quid mea, Fom. xiv, 4, 3. fossas, B. G. iii, 18. vinum, /»». vii, 121. p. 146, militibus, B. G. i, 8, i. victoria, B. G. i, 14, 4. natura lod, B. G. iii, 9, 3.
p. 147, nulla est. Brut. 164. exstinguitur, Tae. A.ii, 72. longo, Aen. v, 320.
quod idem, 4c.
bonus
valvae
p. 161, ipso terrore,
se,
32.
vir, Lael. 63.
B. G.
i,
iv, 33, 1.
Div.
74.
Persae, Nep. Ale. 5. ea molestissime, Q. Pr.
i,
i, i.
p. 162, career quae, Verr. v, 143.
Belgae, B. G. ii, nostra qui. Cat.
servili,
1, i.
i,
cum febri, de Or. iii, 6. improbitas, de Or. ii, 237. aer calore, N. D. ii, 27.
assuetus, de Or. iii, 58. p. 148, puella, PI. Merc. 13. vir singulari, PI. Vid. 41.
7.
B. G.
i, i,
40.
6.
erant, B. G.
quam
41-
quisque,
Tusc.
Disp.
i,
non
longe, B. G. i, 10, i. Themistodes, Nep. Them.
4, 3.
INDEX TO THE EXAMPLES.
p. 163,
253
numquam
mors
est,
digne, de Sen,
2.
i,
2.
ne
sint,
(2e
Sen. 34.
i,
cognatio. Arch.
p. 164. justitia,
fuerit, Fcr*-.
37.
Tusc. Disp.
27.
di istaec, Ter.
H. T.
1038.
F. i, so. si quisquam, Lael. g. potestne, Tiisc. Disp.
si ullo,
falsus utinam, Liv. xxi, 10, 10.
p. 179, dicat aliquis, Ter.
iv, 54.
And. 640.
xiii,
fortunam, Pub. Syr. 193.
velira mihi,
Alt.
xii,
23,
1,
Fam.
75,
1.
taetrior, Verr. iv, 123.
nolim putes, Fam.
dies deficiat,
ix, is, 4.
iii,
quod cuique,
Off.
i,
21.
ii,
N. D.
i,
81.
quinto quoque, Verr.
139.
p. 180, egredere. Cat.
20.
nemo Romanus,
alteri se,
Liv. viii, 30, 3.
26, 1.
i,
rem
si
vobis, Verr. iv, 1.
alter exercitum, Plane. 86.
B. G.
i,
p. i6S, causidicus, de Or.
p. 166,
202.
bene, de Sen. 3. consules, Leg. iii, 8. hominem. Twelve Tables.
Tarquinii, Liv.
non duo
34, 7. oimiis, Div. ii, 90.
i,
amidtia, Liv. 38, 38, i. quin equos, Liv. i, S7i 7p. 181, adjuta, Ter.
Coiioli, Liv.
ii,
33, 8.
iii,
Eun.
ii,
iso.
milia. Curt,
iii,
2, s-
portas, B. G.
33, i.
temeritas, F.
p. 167, si tu,
72.
xiv, s, ivelatus, On. Met. v, no.
Fam.
haec. And. 472. ut ne, Of. i, 103.
tunica,
Aen.
viii,
457.
i,
p. 168, virtus, Lael. 100. p. 169.
dum
vitant. Ear. Sat.
Att.
2,
24.
Caesar, B. G.
vii, go, 2.
ii,
ut non. Cat. i, 23.^ ut earum, B. G. iv, 17, 10. p. 182, Helvetii, B. G. i, 7, 3. haec habui, de Sen. 85. non habebat, B. G. iv, 38,
idoneus,
Fer;'.
iii,
2.
jam pridem,
5,
*
41.
p.
Duilium, de Sen. 44. hostes, B. G. v, 9, 6. domidlium. Arch. 7. 170, Regulus, Of. iii, 100. Caesar, B. G. iv, 17, i.
dignus. Leg.
iii,
S-
multa, Tusc. Disp. i, 80. p. 183, sunt qui, Inv. ii, 144.
nemo, Fam.
i,
4, 2.
i,
sapientia, F»«.
43.
p. 171, nihil
habebam,
Alt. ix, 10, 1. 72.
p. 172, videor, iV. Z).
ii,
B. G. vii, '4, 4. honestum, F. ii, 49. si solos, Tusc. Disp. i, 9. rex tantum, Nep. Con. 4.
Gallos,
P- 173,
quae, Lael. 23. non is sum, B. G. v, 30, 2. non longius, 5. G. ii, 21, 3. o fortunate. Arch. 24.
ut qui, Phil, xi, 30. egomet, lie Or. i, 82.
Verres, Verr. Act. Pr. 12.
ardebat. Brut. 302.
P- 174, p. I7S,
Caesar, B. G. hoc jam. Cat.
iii,
i,
24, i.
nemo est, Verr. iv, 115. nemo fuit, B. C. iii, S3i 3quem audierim, NepfAr. 1,
p. 184, quis
a.
5.
tam, Tusc. Disp.
iii,
71.
dico me, StM. 27.
P- 177.
quare. Cat. 1, 32. isto bono, de Sen. 33. ne repugnetis, Cluent. 6. tu vero, Tmjc. Disp. i, 112.
Sidliam, Verr. Act. Pr. 12. mons, B. G. i, 6, i.
non
is.
Cat.
i,
22.
nemo
est,
de Sen. 24.
habetis. Cat. iv, 24.
nihil, Ter.
impii ne. Leg. ii, 41. cave ignoscas, Lig. 14. P- 178, quid fadam, Pi. Cure. 589. ego redeam, Tef. Bun. 49. huic cedamus PhU. xiii, 16. quid facerem, Ter. Eun. 831.
I
B. T. 675.
5. G.
,
nemo
est,
vi, 39, 3.
8, 3.
p. i8s, Themistocles,
Nep. Them.
7, s.
neque, de Sen. 84.
quoniam, iVe^. MUt.
hunc
ego. Arch. 18.
noctu, ruse. Disp. iv, 44. Bellovaci, B. G. vii, 73.
254
Crasso,
INDEX TO THE EXAMPLES
trepidationis, Liv. xxi, 28, 11.
p. i86, id feci, Caec. loi.
Fam.
xiii, i6, 3.
exspectavit, B. G. iv, 23,
4.
hocita, Leg' "i, 3iHaeduos, B. G. i, 16, 6. id omitto, Sail. Jug. no,
p. 187, id ut,
dum
7.
litterae,
Fam.
xi, 23, 2.
postulo, Ter.
orat, Ter.
milites,
And. 550. Ad. 882.
Epaminondas, Nep. Ep. Nep. Them. 8, 3.
Caesar, B. G.
iii,
g, 4.
£.
C
ii,
21, z.
i,
Helvetiis, 5. G.
p. 193, huic. Rose.
2, i.
g, 2.
Am.
54.
ubi de, B. G. i, 7, 3. ut qiiisque, Ferr. v, 143. hostes, B. G. iv, 26, 2.
id ubi, Liv.
p. 188,
i,
consuli, Liv. xxxv, 20, 4. ne lustrum, lAv. xxiv, 43, 4.
prohibiut,
iiji.
xxv, 35,
6. 4.
i.
32, 13.
nee quin, Liv. xxvi, 40,
Liv. xxiv,
decrevit. Cat.
28,
i,
postquam occupatae,
35, 4-
constitueram, 4«. xvi, 10,
4.
postquam Romam, SoH. Jug.
2.
couvenit, iiu. x, 27, 2. fac ut, P;. JJ«(i. 1218.
postquam
an
stnicti, Liv.
ii,
i,
23, 6.
I)osteaquam, Leg.
turn, Pis. 26.
64.
credo turn, Fej'r. iv, 46. eo tempore, ijg. 20. illo die. Mil. 38. p. 189, Lysander, Dio. i, 96. Pythagoras, JV. Z). iii, 88. jam Galli, B. G. vii, 26, 3. Treveri, B. G. vi, 7, i.
cura ut. Cat. iii, 12. laborabat, 5. G. vii, 31, i. p. 194, sequitur, iV. D. ii, 81. eos moneo. Cat. ii, 20. huic imperat, B. G. iv, 21,
opto, Verr. Act. Pr. so.
p. 19s, vereor ne, Att. vii, 12,
z.
8.
ex quo, F.
ita est
ii,
24.
ii,
fit, Tusc. Disp. mos. Brut. '84.
16.
cum cum
cum
6.
ad, Verr. v, 27.
p. 196, quis, Par. 48.
2.
equitatus, B. G. v, 19,
4, 2.
iU.
saepe cum, Nep. Cim.
procucurrissent,
tua. Ear.
C.
ii,
41,
p. 190,
tum cum
Epp. i, 18, 84. videbis, PI. Bacch. 145. stabilitas, Lael. 82.
tacent. Cat.
te, Alt. xiv,
i,
p.
cum cum
21.
17 A, 4.
prius, PI.
Merc. 456.
OS. iii, in. hoc uno, de Or. i, 32. bene mihi, Tusc. Disp. i, 97. quod, B. G. i, 44, 6. quod me, Nep. Ep. 5, 6. 197, oculis, B. G. i, 12, I. bis bina, N. D. ii, 49. effugere, N. D. iii, 14. saepe autem, N. D. iii, 14. Epaminondas, F. ii, 97.
illud,
nihil contra. Place. 51.
non
prius. Sail.
C 51.
i,
ex Socrate, Tusc. Disp.
nescio, PI.
p. 198, conantur,
6.
v, 34.
Amph.
B. G.
i, i,
1056.
8, 4.
p. 191, priusquam, Liv.
24, 3.
tempestas. Sen. Ep. 103, 2. priusqu'am telum, B. C. ii, 34,
pergit, Liv.
7, 6.
animum,
sol
PI.
Amph.
Quint.
iii,
240.
xiv, 27. p. 199,
6,
quaeritur, N. D. i, 61. haud sdo, Tusc. Disp.
ii,
41.
antequam, Phil,
Alexander,
17-
Curt,
17, 1.
iv,
dum
naturam. Off. i, 100. memoria, de Sen. 21. si quis, B. G. i, 48, 6.
si
haec, 5. G.
dicendo, Tac. Dial. 19.
si.
dimi anima, Att.
loi.
ix, 10, 3.
i,
p. 200, mentiar, Lael. 10.
Lacedaemoniorum, Tusc. Disp.
Cato, Nep. Cat. 2, 4. 0. 192, donee, ijs. xxiii, 31, 9. ferrmn, iVe#. £^. 9, 3.
haec
Cat.
i, i,
19.
42. consilium, de Sen. 19. Laelius, Arch. 16.
sapientia, F.
num
igitur, de
Sen. 19.
IJNJJiiA
lU
IJtlJi
JiJi.Ajyj.Ji'l^JiS.
255
p. 201, nisi felicitas,
eum
si si
Tac. Agr. 31paths, Phil, ii, 99.
Sestius, Sest. 81.
unum, Liv. ii, 38, Snon potestis, F. ii, 71.
eras, Fl. Merc. 770. haec reputent, Tusc. Disp. roges, F. iv, 69. p. 202, ferreus,
i,
virorum, Tusc. Disp. ii, 43. aUud est, Tusc. Disp. iv, 27. impune. Sail. Jug. 31, 26. licuit, Tusc. Disp. i, 33. p. 214, Demosthenes, F. v, 5.
beatus,
Si-
N. D.
i,
48.
Cato, Sail. Cat. 54, 5. apertum est, F. v, 34.
P- 215, Epicurei, Lael. 13.
Fam.
xv, 21,
3.
dolorem, Phil. 12, 21.
si feceris,
Thales,
^.
N. D.
i,
23.
i,
hoc
si,
Fam. v, 19, Fam. vii, i, 6.
i,
Democritus, N. D.
nullo
se,
29.
hunc mihi, Cat.
nihil, Cat.
nisi. P- 203,
ii,
18.
10.
Lig. 3. nee mihi, de Sen. 85. eas res, B. G. i, 18. te tua. Brut. 331. cupio. Cat. i, 4.
p. 216,
Mil. 19sed quid, Div. Caec. 14. serviam, PI. Men. iioi. sit fur, Verr. v, 4.
ft.
haec sint, Ac. ii, 105. ne sit, Tusc. Disp. ii, 14. 204, homines, Phil, ii, 39. non est. Rep. i, 10.
Timoleon, JVe^. Tim. 3, 4. gaudeo, PZ. Bacch. 456. non moleste, de 5e». 7.
Sestius, Sest. 95.
p. 217, traditum, Tmsc. Disp. v, 114.
quamquam.
Atticus,
licet,
Off.
i,
56.
1.
.1.
Caesar, £. G. iv, 31,
Nep.
Alt. 6,
Rose.
Am.
31.
i,
quamquam
t).
quid, Cal.
22.
audax, ffor. Od. i, 3, 23. hundne, Hor. Sat. i, 9, 72. interim, B. G. i, 16, i. p. 218 assurgentem, Liv. iv, 19. gloria, Tusc. Disp. iii, 3. Conon, Nep. Con. 4, 5.
20s,
quamquam,
quamvis
i»». xxxvi, 34, 6. quamvis, multi, Tac. Dial. 2.
infesto, Liv.
ii,
omne, Phil,
v, sr.
mente, Tmsc. Disp. v, 100.
p. 219, Solon, ie Sen. 26.
sol, iV.
;
40, 7.
multi. Off. iii, 82. omnia postposui, Fam. rvi, 2
nil obstat,
D.
ii,
102.
6-
Hor. Sat.
i,
i,
40.
mendaci, Div. ii, 146. perfidiam, B. G. vii, s,
eis
S-
oderint, Ace. 204.
p. 206,
manent, de Sen. 22. nubant, P/. Aid. 491. quidquid, 4e«. ii, 49. quidquid oritur, Div. ii, 60.
Regulus, Off.
iii,
Catonem, (Ze Sen. 3. Homerus, ie 5e». 54urbem, Liv. xxii, 2f equitatiun, 5. G. i, iS, i.
-
p. 220, obliviscendum, Tac. ffis*.
ii, i.
100.
i,
numquam,
9, 2.
i.
Verr.
i,
38.
p. 207,
tum Romulus,
Liv.
t).
p.
nuntiatum, B. G. i, 38, dixit, Nep. Them. 7, SAriovistus, 5. G. i, 44, 208, milites, B. G. iii, s, 3209, Caesar, 5. G. i, 14, 6.
suo cuique, N. D. iii, 1. Caesar, B. G. i, 13, ip. 221
scribendo,
Fam.
i,
xv,
6, 2.
7.
mens, 0/.
multa, P.
p. 222,
105.
2,
Themistocles, Nep. Them.
i,
3
S.7
p. 211,
concursu, Tac. Dial. 3^. demonstrabantur, de Sen. 78.
ad pacem, Liv. xxi, ij hostes, B. G. iii, u, i,
legati,
Paetus, Alt.
p. 212,
ii,
1,
12
i, 4.
5. G.
iv, 13, 5i,
nemo, Par. 52.
quae
ille,
Sail. Fr.
77,
"•
cum
diversas, Tac. Dial,
mos est, Oro/. 151. quod ego, PI. Capt. 961.
P- 213, dulce,
p. 223, legati, B. G.i, 30, ido (colloco), PI. Tr. 73S-
hoc
est, Att. vii, 22, 2.
Hor. Od.
iii,
2, 13.
cum
homines. Cat.
i,
31.
256
INDEX TO THE EXAMPLES.
p. 232, Caesar,
p. 224, discidia, F. i, 44. p. 22s, horae, de Sen. 69.
Caesar, B. G.
cita,
ii,
i,
35, 3.
1, 8.
ii,
Hor. Sat.
qui aether, N. D.
41.
p.
p. 226, adsentatio, Lael. 8g.
p. p.
p.
Cn. Pompeio, B. G. iv, 1, 227, Darius, Nep. Milt. 4, i. 228, magnus, Nep. Them. 6, 1. 22g, erant duo, B. G. i, 6, i.
nisi forte, de Sen. 18.
j..
p.
p.
B. G. i, 25, 1. Haedui, B. G. i, 11, 2. Caesar cum, B. G. i, 7, 1. accidit, Nep. Ak. 3, 2. 233, si quid. Arch. 1. Caesar, 5. G. v, 4, i. 237, hostium, B. G. iii, 29, 3. mens quoque, de Sen. 36. tanto, 5mS. S9. 238, pro multitudine, B. G. i, 2,
ii,
j.
p. 249, ut agar, Tusc. Disp.
13.
p. 230, id ut,
Nep. Them. eo cum, B. G. vii,
8, 3. 7, 4.
minis, Tusc. Disp. v, 87.
dissimilis,
Nep. Chab.
i,
3, 4.
ut ad, Lael. 5. p. 231, Septimus, de Sen. 38. recepto, B. C. iii, 12, 1. sed pleni. Arch. 14. horribilem, Tusc. Disp. i, 118. simulatam, Tac. A. i, 10.
p. 250, febris. Cat.
31.
i,
submersas, Aen.
nosti,
69.
Fam. viii, 10, 3. tum And, Liv. i, 40, 2.
moriamur, Aen. quadrupedante,
ii,
353.
vle». viii, sg6.
ABBREVIATIONS USED IN INDEX TO THE ILLUSTRATIVE EXAMPLES.
Ac, Gcero, Academica. Ace, Acdus. ad Hei., ad Herennium.
Aen., Virgil, Aeneid.
Arch., Cicero, pro Archia.
Att., Cicero,
Cbab. Chabrias.
Cim., Cimon. Con., Canon. Dat., Datames. Ep., Epaminondaj. Milt., MUtiades.
Paus., Pausamas. Them., Themistocles. Thras., Thrasybuhis.
Episiulae ad AtUcum.
Bella Civili.
B.
C, Caesar, de
B. G., Caesar, de Bella Gallia).
Brut., Cicero, Brutus. Caec, Cicero, fro Caecina.
Cat., Cicero, in
Tim., Timoleon.
0£E., Cicero, de Officios. Or., Cicero, Orator.
CatUinam.
Cluent., Cicero, pro Clitentio.
Curt.,
^
Quintus Curtius;
Ov., Ovid.
de Dom., Cicero, de Doma Sua. de Or., Cicero, de Oratore. de Sen., Cicero, de Senectute. C, Cicero, de Divinatione.
Div.
Am., Amores. Met., Metamorphoses.
Par., Cicero, Paradoxa.
Phil., Cicero, Philippics.
Cicero, Caec, CaeciHum.
Divinatia
in
Eel., Virgil,
Eclogues.
Eut., Eutropius.
i» Pisonem. Plane, Cicero, i>ro Plancit. PL, Plautus. Amph., Amphitruo.
Pis., Cicero,
de Finibus. Fam., Cicero, Epistulae ad Familiares. Fkc, Cicero, pro Placco.
F., Cicero,
Gell.,
Aul., Aulularia.
Bacch., Bacchides.
Capt., CapHvi.
Aulus Gellius.
Epp., Epistles.
Od., Odes.
Sat., Satires.
Hor., Horace.
Cure, CurcuUo. Men., Menaechmi.
Mere, Mercalor.
M.
G.,
Afj/e* Gloriosus.
Pers., Persa.
Inv., Cicero,
de Inventione.
Juv., Juvenal.
Lael., Cicero,
Poen., Poemihis. Rud., Rudens.
Tr.,
LaeUus, de AmicHia.
Trinummus.
Leg., Cicero, de Legibus.
Vid., Vidtdaria.
pro Ligario. Livy. Lucr., Lucretius.
Lig., Cicero,
Liv.,
Marc, Cicero, pra Marcello.
Mil., Cicero, pro Milone. N. D., Cicero, de Natura Deorum. Nep., Nepos. Ale, Alciiiades.
Younger, irftefi. Pub. Syr., Publilius Syrus. Q. F., Cicero, od Quintum Fratrem. Rose Am., Cicero, ^o Roscio Amerint.
Plin. Epp., Pliny the
Sail., Sallust.
C,
Fr.,
Catiline.
Fragments,
Jug., Jugurtha.
Sen., Seneca.
Ar., Aristides.
Att., Atticus.
Ep., Epistles.
Cat., Cato.
N.
257
Q.,
Naturaks Quaestiones.
2S8
Sex.
Sil.,
ABBREVIATIONS IN THE EXAMPLES.
And., Andria. Eun., EuniKhus. Hec, Eecyra. H. T., Bautontimoroumenos. Phor., Phormio. Tusc. Disp., Cicero, Tusculan Disputations.
Sest., Cicero, pro SesHo.
Rose, Cicero, pro Sexto Roscio.
Silius Italicus.
Stat.,
Caedlius Statius.
pro Sulla.
Sull., Cicero,
Tac, Tacitus.
A., Annals.
Agr., Agricola.
Dial., Dialogus de Oratoribus.
Ger., Germarda.
H., Histories. Ter., Terence. Ad., Adelphoi.
of the Twelve Tables. Vatin., Cicero, in Vatitimm. Yen., Cicero, in Verrem. Verr., Act. Pr., Cicero, AcUo Prima in C.
Twelve Tables, Laws
Verrem.
INDEX TO THE PRINCIPAL PARTS OF THE
MOST IMPORTANT VERBS.
Note.
— Compounds axe not given unless they present
some
special irregularity.
The
references are to sections.
A.
abdo, 122,
1, 2.
ascends, 122,
1, 4.
coUigS, 122,
1, 3.
aspicio, 122, III.
cols, 122, 1, s.
abido, 122, III. abnuo, 122, II.
aboleo, 121, 1,
assentior, 123, VII. assuefacio, 122, III.
assueflo, 122, III. audio, 123, 1, aufero, 129.
comminlscor, 122, V. comperiS, 123, V. compleo, 121, I.
concutio, 122, III.
abstergeo, 121,
in.
absum, 125.
accendo, 122,
accidit, 138,
1, 4.
condS, 122,
2.
1, 2.
m.
N.
augeo, 121, in. aved, 121, II, a, N.
cSnferS, i2g.
cSnfiteor, 121, VII.
accio, 121, 1,
accipio, 122,
m.
1, 6.
congruS, 122, II. consenesco, 122, IV,
cads, caedo, 122,
122, 1, 2.
1, 2.
2.
acqmro, 122,
acuo, 122, II.
cSnsero, 122, consero, 122,
1, 5.
1,
6 {plant)
adds, 122,
1, 2.
cSnsido, 122,
1, 4.
adhaeresco, 122, IV, 2.
adiplscor, 122,
calefaciS, 122, III.
calefio, 122, III.
V.
consists, 122, 1, 2. cSnspicio, 122, III.
adolesco, 122, IV, i.
caleo, 121, II, a.
adsum, 125.
advenio, 123, IV.
aSero, i2g.
afficio,
calescS, 122, IV, 2.
constat, 138, III. cSnstltuS, 122, II.
cans, 122, 1, capessS, 122,
2.
I, 6.
122, III.
122, 1, I, a.
i.
capio, 122, III.
cares, 121, II, a.
consuesco, 122, IV, consuls, 122, 1, s. contineo, 121, II, b.
contingit; 138, III.
1.
affligo,
agnSsco, 122, IV,
ago, 122, 1, 3. algeS, 121, III.
alo, 122, 1, 5.
carpo, 122, 1, I, u. caveS, 121, V. cedS, 122, 1, I, b.
censeo, 121, II, b,
coquS, 122,
1, I, a.
crepS, 120, II.
crescS, 122, IV, 1.
cubs, 120, II.
cupiS, 122, III.
cuiro, 122, 1,
:i.
amicio, 123, III.
cams, 122,
1, 6.
amo, 120,
1.
cieo, 121, 1.
unplector, 122, V. ango, 122, 1, 7.
aperio, 123, II.
cingS, 122, 1,
I, a. 1, 2.
circumsistS, 122,
appeto, 122, 1, 6, arceo, 121, II, n.
arcesso, 122, 1, 6.
claudS, 122, Clauds, 122,
D.
debeo, 121, II, a. decerns, 122, 1, 6.
decet, 138, II.
1, I, b. 1, 7.
I, 3.
coemS, 122,
coepl, 133.
ardeo, 121, III.
aresco, 122,
coerceo, 121, II, a.
j.
IV,
arguo, 122,
n.
cognosco, 122, IV, cogo, 122, 1, 3.
I.
dedecet, 138, II. dedo, 122, 1, 2. defends, 122, 1, 4,
2S9
26o
deled, 121, 1,
INDEX TO THE PRINCIPAL PARTS
The
references are to sections.
feriS, 123,
VI.
induS, 122,
Infers, 129.
n.
2.
deligo, 122, I, 3.
ferS, 129.
demo, 122,
1, 3.
1, 5.
ferveo, 121, VI.
figo, 122, I, 1, b.
ingemisco, 122, IV,
desero, 122,
insum, 123.
intellego, 122, 1, 3. interficio, 122, III.
desino, 122, 1, 6.
finds, 122, 1, 2, N.
fingo, 122, 1, i,
fIS,
it.
desum, 125.
dico, 122, 1, 1, u,
differs, i2g.
131.
121, 1.
fleets, 122, I, I, b.
fleo,
dlligo, 122, 1, 3.
intersum, 125. invado, p. 87, footnote, inveniS, 123, IV.
irascor, 122,
dimico, 120, dirimo, 122,
H.
I,
flSreo, 121, II, o, N. I.
V.
3.
flSresco, 122, IV, z.
fluS, 122, II.
diripio, 122, III.
diruo, 122, II.
fodiS, 122, III.
I, 6.
discerno, 122,
foveS, 121, V.
jaceo, 121, II, a.
jacio, 122, III.
disco, 122, IV, I.
dissero, 122, 1, 5.
frangS, 122,
1, 3.
I, 5.
fremS, 122,
fries, 120,
distinguo, p. 87, footnote, divido, 122, I, I, 6.
n.
n,
V.
ii,
jubeo, 121, III. jungo, 122, 1, 1, N. 2. juvo, 120,
14.
frigeS, 121,
m.
do, 127.
fruor, 122,
b.
doceo, 121, II,
fugiS, 122, III.
doles, 121, II, a.
fuldS, 123, III.
fnlgeo, 121, III.
fulget, 138, 1,
domo,
120, II.
I, 1, iz.
labor, 122, V.
lacesso, 122, 1, 6.
dues, 122,
E.
edo, 122,
edS, 122,
efifero,
funds, 122, 1, 3. fungor, 122, V.
furS, 122, 1, 7.
laedS, 122, 1,
I, t,
lambs, 122,
lateS, 121,
1, 7.
largior, 123, VII.
I,
:i.
n,
ii,
N.
1.
I, 3.
lavS, 120, III.
lego, 122, 1, 3.
129.
eflfuglS, 122, III.
gemS, 122,
i.
1, s.
I, a.
libet, 138, II.
egeo, 121, II, a, N.
eUciS, 122, III.
gero, 122, I,
liceor, 121,
licet, 138,
VII.
glgno, 122,
</,
I, 5.
n.
emineS, 121,
II,
N.
j..
gradior, 122, V.
loquor, 122, V.
luceo, 121, III.
emo, 122,
eS, 132.
1, 3.
esurio, 123,
VI.
H.
habeS, 121, II, a. haereo, 121, III. haurio, 123, III. horreS, 121, II, li, N.
ludS, 122,
1, I, b.
luges, 121, III.
luS, 122, II.
evadS, p. 87, footnote. evanescS, 122, IV, 3.
excolo, 122,
I, 5.
excudo, 122,
1, 4.
M.
1.
exerceS, 121, II, a. experior, 123, VII.
expleo, 121,
I,
maereS, 121, malS, 130.
I.
II, a, N.
2.
N.
maneS, 121,
i.
III.
3.
explico, 120, II.
ignosco, 121, IV,
illicio,
exstinguo, p. 87, footnote. extimescS, 122, IV, i.
122, III.
matQrescS, 122, IV, medeor, 121, VII.
n. a.
imbuS, 122, II. immineo, 121, II,
impleo, 121, 1, N. implies, 120, n.
incipiS, 122, III.
ij,
memini, 133. mereo, 121, II,
a.
F.
facie, 122, III.
falls, 122, 1, 2.
mereor, 121, VII. mergS, 122, 1, i, b. metior, 1.23, VII.
incolS, 122, I, 5.
metuS, 122,
mico, 120,
I
II.
fateor, 121,
VII. faveo, 121, V.
incumbS, 122,
I, $.
n.
II.
indulges, 121, III.
minus, 122,
OF THE MOST IMPORTANT VERBS.
The references
misceo, 121,
are to sections,
261
n,
b.
patefado, 122, III.
pateflo, 122, III.
miseret, 138, II.
misereor, 121, VII.
mitto, 122,
1, I, b.
1, 5.
pateo, 121, II,
patior, 122,
o, N. I.
rado, 122,
1, I, 6.
V.
rapio, 12 2, III.
molo, 122,
paveo, 121, V.
pellido, 122, III.
pello, 122, 1, 2.
moneo, 121, II, a. mordeo, 121, IV.
morior, 122,
redds, 122, I, 2. redimo, 122, I, 3.
referdo, 123, III. refers, I2g.
rSfert, 138, II.
V. moves, 121, V.
pendeo, 121, IV. pendS, 122, I, :i.
perago, 122,
1, 3.
I, 2,
regS, 122,
1, i, a.
N.
nandscor, 122, V.
lulscx)!,
percello, 122,
N.
percrebresco, 122, IV, 3. perdo, 122, I, 2.
perfido, 122, III.
perfringo, 122, 1, 3. periruor, 122, V.
perlego, 122, 1, 3. pennulceS, 121, III.
relinquS, 122, 1, 3. reminlscor, 122, V.
reor, 121,
VII.
122,
V.
necto, 122, 1, I, b.
reperis, 123, repS, 122, 1,
V.
I, a.
neglego, 122, 1, 3.
ningit, 138, 1.
niteo, 121,
nitor, 122,
resists, 122, 1, 2.
n,
V.
a,
N. 1.
respuS, 122, II. restinguS, p. 87, footnote.
retineS, 121, II, b.
rides, 121,
perpetior, 122, V.
noced, 121, II, a.
nolo, 130.
pervado, p. 87, footnote,
peto, 122,
1, 6.
in.
I, 1, b.
rSdo, 122,
nosco, 122,
IV,
I.
piget, 138, II.
rubeo, 121, II,
a,
N. i.
nubo, 122,
1, I, a.
pingo, 122,
1, I, a.
rumps, 122,
ruS, 122,
1, 3.
places, 121, II, a.
n.
S.
O.
obduiesco, 122, IV, 3.
oblino, 122, 1, 6.
obfiTascor, 122,
plaudo, 122,
pluit, 138, 1,
1, i, 6.
polleo, 121, II, a, N. a.
polliceor, 121, VII.
saepiS, 123,
HE.
saliS, 123, II.
V.
obmutesco, 122, IV, 3.
obraS, 122,
n.
rv,
i.
obsolesco, 122,
obsum, 125.
obtineo, 121, II, b.
odi, 133.
poUuo, 122, II. pono, 122, 1, 6. posco, 122, IV, pos^do, 122, 1, possum, 126.
sands, 123, III.
saplo, 122, III.
I.
sarciS, 123, III.
4.
sdndo, 122,
scisco, 122,
1, 2,
N.
IV,
2.
poto, 120, 1, praebeo, 121, II, a.
praestat, 138,
1.
scnbs, 122,
1, I, a.
I,
ofiero, 129.
HI.
sculps, 122, 1, sees, 120, II.
a.
oleo, 121,
operio, 123,
oportet,
H, a, N. n. 138, n.
praesum, 123.
prandeo, 121, VI. prehendo, 122, 1, 4.
sedeS, 121,
V.
sentio, 123, III.
sepeliS, 123, 1.
opperior, 123, VII.
ordior, 123,
orior,
premo, 122,
prodo, 122,
1, i, b.
sequor, 122, V.
serS, 122, 1, 6.
VII. 123, VII.
1, 2.
P.
paenitet, 138, II.
palleo, 121, 11, a, N. 1.
promo, 122, 1, 3. piosmn, 125. prostemo, 122, 1,
pudet, 138,
serpS, 122, 1,
sileS,
I, a.
121, II, a, N.
6.
sinS, 122, 1, 6.
n.
1, z.
pungS, 122,
solvS, 122, 1, 4. sonp, 120, II.
spargo, 122, sperno, 122,
1, I, b. I, 6.
pando, 122,
1, 4.
parco, 122, 1, 2. pareo, 121, 11, «.
pario, 122,
Q.
quaero, 122,
1, 6.
splendeo, 121, II, 0, N. | spondee, 121, IV.
status, 122, II.
in.
quatio, 122, III.
pasco, 122, IV, I.
tascor, 122, IV, i.
queror, 122, V.
quiescS, 123, IV, 1.
stems, 122,
1, 6.
-stinguo, 122, 1, I, a,
262
sto, 1 20,
INDEX TO THE MOST IMPORTANT
The
IV.
references are to sections,
I, Sli,
VERBS.
V.
tex5, 122,
strepo, 122, 1, 5. strtdeo, 121, VI.
strings, 122,
1, I, a.
times, 121, II,
tingo, 122, I,
tolls, 122, 1, 2,
s.
I.
1,
a.
vado, 122,
veho, 122,
I, I, b.
N.
vales, 121, II, o.
I, I,
li.
struo, 122, II.
tonat, 138, I.
studeo, 121, II, a, n. 1.
suadeo, 121, III.
subigo, 122,
1,
tondeS, 121, IV. tons, 120, II.
torpeS, 121,
veils, 122, I, 4.
3.
n,
0,
N.
I.
subsum, 125. sum, 100. sums, 122, 1,
suo, 122, II.
torques, 121, III.
torreS, 121, II, b.
3.
veniS, 123, IV. vereor, 121, VII. vergo, 122, I, 7.
verrS, 122,
I, 4.
trado, 122, I,
2.
supersum, 125.
sustineS, 121, II, b.
traho, 122, 1, i, a. tremo, 122, I, 5. tribuS, 122, II.
verts, 122, 1, 4. vescor, 122, V.
vets, 120, II. videS, 121, V.
vigeS, 121, II, a, N.
vincio, 123, III.
I
trudS, 122, 1, I, tueor, 121, VII.
b.
tundS, 122,
taceo, 121,
1, z.
vines, 122,
I. 3.
i.
n,
u.
vireo, 121, II, a, N.
visS, 122, I, 4.
taedet, 138, 11.
tango, 122,
tego, 122,
1, 2.
U.
uldscor, 122, V.
vivo, 122,
1, I,
il.
1, I, a. 1, i, a.
temno, 122,
tends, 122, 1, 2. teneo, 121, II, b.
tero, I22i I, 6.
unguo, 122,
1, I,
a.
vols, 130. volvS, 122, 1, 4. vomS, 122, 1, 5.
urges, 121, III. urS, 122, I, I, u,.
utor, 122, V.
voveS, 121, V.
terreo, 121, II, a.
GENERAL INDEX.
The
references are to sections
and paragraphs.
Abl., ablative; ace, accusative; adj., adjective; adv., adverb, advercompare; comp., comparison or comparative; conj., conjunction or conjugation; const., constr., construction; dat., dative; decL, declension; gen., genitive; ind., indicative; indir. disc., indirect discourse; loc, locative; n., note; nom., nominative;
bial,
Abbeevutiohs.
—
or adverbially;
c£.,
plu., plural;
prep., preposition;
subject; subjv., subjunctive ;
pron,, pronoun -or pronunciation; voc, vocative; w., with.
sing., singular; subj.,
i,
pronundation, 3, i ; development of o; before a single consonant, 7, i,a; before two consonants, & as ending of nom. sing, of 7, I, 4;
vowel,
2,
I
;
Abbreviations of proper names, 373. Ablative case, 17 ; 213 f.
m-dbus,
•
21, 2,
e.
ist decl.,
20;
in voc. sing, of Greek
;
in -d in prons., 84, 3 ; 85, 3. -formation of sing, of adjs. of decl., 67, a; 70, 1-5.
3d
nouns in -es of ist decl., 22
sing, of
in
nom.
Greek nouns in -e of ist decl., 22, 3; termination of nom. and ace. plu. of neuters, 23 ; 35 ; 48 ; termina-
nouns of 3d decl., 3d decl., 43, 3; ending of ace. sing, of Greek nouns of 3d decl., 47, i regular quantion of
sing, of
nom.
37 ——genuine abl. uses, 214 —— absolute, 227. —— of agent, 216. —— of accompaniment, 222.
;
of i!-stems,
38.
f.
28 ; gender of nouns in -i of
— —-of association,
of cause, 219.
of accordance, 220, 3. 222, A.
;
;
of attendant circumstance, 221
227,
tity of final a, 363,
i;
exceptions to
d,
quantity of final a, 363, i, a-c. pronunciation, 3, i ; arising
traction, 7, 2
decl.,
;
by
con-
of comparison, 217.
as ending of stem in ist 18; a-stems inflected, 20 ; in voc.
of degree of difference, 223. of fine or penalty, 208, of manner, 220. of material, 224, 3.
J, 4.
Greek noims of ist decl., 22 in voc. sing, of Greek noims in -as of 3d decl., 47, 4; distinguishing vowel
sing, of
of means, 218.
of ist conjugation,
perative act. of ist conj., loi long by exception, 363, i, a-c.
a, ab,
98; ending of imfinal a ;
—— of place where, 228.
of price, 225.
of penalty, 208,
2, b.
of place whence, 229. of quality, 224. of separation, 214 ; with
ahs, use, 142, i
;
with town names,
229, ^.
a to denote agency, 216. to denote separation, 214. place from which, 229.
'
compounds
of dis- and se-, 214, 3. of source, 215-. of specification, 226.
b.
with town names, 229, 2. with abl. of gerund, 338, 4,
a-stems, 20; g8;
of time at which, 230.
of time during which, 231,
x.
loi.
363
264
The
GENERAL INDEX.
references are to sections
and paragraphs.
Ablative case of time witJiin which, 231. Ablative case, of way by which, 213, 9. with conlmeri, cSnsistere, cSnslare,
218, 4.
with impersonal verbs, 175, a, c. with intransitive verbs, 175, 2, a. with passive used as middle, 175,
2, d).
with special phrases, 218, 7. with jungere, miscere, mulire, tk.,
222,
with verbs of remembering and
getting
for-
(memni, oHimscor,
;
reminis-
A.
cor), 206, I
2.
with facid, fid, 218, 6. with prepositions, 142; 213 f. with verbs of filling, 218, 8. with verbs and adjs. of freeing, 214,
j:,
with verbs expressing emotion,
2, 6.
175,
with verbs of tasting and
176, S.
smelling,
a,
and N.
i.
with verbs _ of making,
calling, regarding, etc., 177.
ves-
choosing,
with adjs. of plenty, 218, 8. with Utor, fruor, fungor, potior,
cor, 218, I.
with verbs of asking, requesting, demanding, teaching, concealing, 178,
i-S-
with opus and asus, 218, 2. with nltor, mnixus, and fretus,
abs, 142, 1.
2 1 8, 3
3-
with adjs. (propior, ^oximus), with adverbs
141, 3
;
141,
ahsens, 125.
(propius,
2.
proxime),
Absolute, ablative, 227. time, of participles, 336, 4. use of verbs, 174, o. ^ Abstract nouns, 12, 2, b) ; plural
,
clam, prtdie, 144,
Genavam ad oppidum,
of, 55,
182,
2, a.
4, c).
cognate ace, 176, 4. Greek ace, 180. synecdochical ace, 180.
-abus, 21,
ac,
2, e).
two
aces., direct obj.
and pred. ace,
as, than, 341, i, c). 341, 2, 6); Acatalectic verses, 366, 9.
=
accHit
ut, 297, 2.
177 ; person affected and result produced, 178 ; with compounds of trans, 179; with other compounds, 179, 2.
Accent, 6;
in gen. of nouns in -ius
and
ium,
^cidit
25, I
and
2.
ut, 297, ^•
; 179 f. retained in pass., 178, 2. Accusing, verbs of, constr., 208 f.
with prepositions, 141
accidit quod, 299, t, i.
accuso, constr., 178,
deer, decl.,
i, d).
Accompaniment,
abl. of, 222.
Accordance, abl. of, 220, 3. Accusative case, 17; in -an and -en, of Greek nouns, 22; in -om in 2d decl., 24 ; in -on and -on in Greek nouns, 27 in -S in sing, of Greek noims, 47, i
in -Ss in plu., 47, 3; in and -is in t-stems, 37 ; 38 ; ace. sing. neut. as
adv., 77, 3 ; 176, 3 ; 172 f. of duration of time, 181.
of result produced, 173, of extent of space, 181. of limit of motion, 182
4m
68; compared, 71, 3. Acquitting, verbs of, constr., 208 f ac si, with subjv., 307, i. ad, 'toward,' 'in vicinity of,' 182, 3; ad with ace alternating with dat., 338, 2. compounds of ad governing dat., 187, III; 188, 2,d. with gerund denoting purpose, 338,
3.
-ades,
patronymic ending,
3.
148, 6, a.
B;
176.
adg- = agg-, 9, Adjectives, 62
f.;
354;
derivation
of,
f.
of neut. prons. or adjs., 176, 2. of person or thing affected, 173,
,175-
A
;
— —
—
isof.
in exclamations, 183. as subj. of inf., 184.
of ist and 2d dec!., 63 ff. in -MM, gen. sing., 63, 0. of 3d decl., 67 ff. in abl., 70, 5. -comparison of adjs., 71 f. ; in -er, 71, 3; in -«7m, 71, 4; comparative
—
73
;
with admoneo, commoneo, with adv. force, 176, 3. with compounds, 175, 2.
etc.,
207.
lacking, 73, 3;
;
defective comparison,
not admitting comparison, 75 comparison by magis and maximl, 74-
GENERAL INDEX.
The
Adjectives, numerals, 78
references are to sections
f.
26s
aequum
;
and paragraphs.
est
aequum
and
7.
=
syntax,
233
ff.
;
attributive
2.
aes, in plu., SS, 4, *
271, i, h). lacks gen. plu., 57,
sit,
predicate adjs., 233,
agreement, 234, f used substantively, 236 f denoting part of an object, 241, with force of adverbs, 239.
force of
aetds, decl., 40,
r, e)
;
id aetatis, 185,
z.
-aeus, suffix, 152, 3.
i.
aevom, decl., 24.
Affected, ace. of person or thing, 175. Agency, dat. of, r89; abl., 216.
comp. and
superl., 240, i.
not followed by infinitive, 333. not used with proper names, 354, 3. equivalent to a poss. gen., 354, 4. special Latin equivalents of Eng.
adjs., 354, i.
Agent,
abl.,
216; with names of animals,
216, 2.
ager, decl., 23.
Agreement, nouns, 166; 168; 169,2; 3;
4-
equiv. to rel. clause, 241, 2. as pred. ace, 177, 2.
adjs. 234; niunber, 23s,
A;
in gender, 235, prons., 250 ;
B;
in
verbs,
position of adj., 350, 4. pronominal adjs., 92.
with one
subj.,
254, i;
with two or
ist
decl.,
more
-ai,
subjs., 255, i.
governing gen., 204. governing dat., 192. governing ace, T4T, 3. construed with abl., 214, i, d; 217, i; 218,8; 223; 226,2; 227, i. with supine in -u, 340, 2.
ail-
case-ending,
13s, N.
gen.
sing.,
poet., 21, 2, b).
am,
<5/o>
^35 ; quantity of first syllable, 362, -al, declension of nouns in, 39. alacer, decl., 68, i ; comp., 73, 4.
aliqua, gi, 2.
aliqui,
3.
= = =
all-, g, 2.
admoned, constr., 207. Admonishing, const, of verbs
airadsarr-, 9, 2. ass-, 9, 2.
91
; ;
91, 2.
of, 207.
aliquis, gi
252, 2
;
aliquis dicdt, dixerU,
280, I.
-SUs, suffix, 151, z.
z, c;
ai
4-
sensum, constr., 23s, B,
254,
aUter ac, 341,
alius,
i,
66 ;
g2,
used correlatively.
i, c).
aiuliscens, spelling, 9, 2.
aiulter, decl., 23, 2.
2S3, ' alius ac, 'other than,' 341,
Allia,
aiultus, force, 114, z.
gender
of, 15, 3,
N.
Adverbs, defined, 140; formation and comparison, 76 f. ; 140, 157.
allicio, conj., log, 2, 6).
Alliteration, 37s, 3.
from adjs. in -^us, in -tus and -tim, 77, Sin and -0, 77, 2.
in -dter
77, 4-
Alphabet,
alter, decl.,
i.
66; g2, i; used correlatively,
indirect,
.2S3, I.
numeral, 79.
as preps., 144, z. derivation of, 157.
Alternative questions, 162, 4;
300, 4.
alteruter, decl., g2, 2.
with gen., 201, 2 ; 3 ; and special meanings, 347.
position, 350, 6. Adversative clauses, 309.
a.
alvus,
gender
of, 26, i, b.
amandus sum,
conj., 115.
conjunctions, 343.
adversus, prep,
ae,
with ace, i4r.
3,
how pronounced,
7, i, d.
2;
phonetic
amatarus sum, conj., 115. amb- (ambi-), 159, 3, N. ambo, 80, 2, a; usage, 355, 2. amo, conj., loi. ampUus = ampUas quam, 217,
amussis, -4m, 38,
fl»,
3.
changes,
i.
;
aedes, plu., 61.
162, 4,
and
a)
300, 4;
6-
Aowd
JC»S o»i
aequSHs, abl. sing, of, 70, 238.
eequor, dec!., 34.
s,
o; as subst.,
nescio an, 300, J.
Anacoluthon, 374. Anapaest, 366, 2.
266
The
GENERAL INDEX.
references are to sections
and paragraphs.
Anaphora, 350, 11, i). Anastrophe of prep., 141, 2;
144, 3. anceps (syllaba
10.
142,
3;
ArckiaSj declension of, 22. -ar, declension of nouns in, 39. arguS, constr., 178, i, d).
-dris, suffix, 151, 2.
anceps),
defined,
366,
-drium,
suffix, 148, 3.
Androgeds, •dec!., 27. animal, decl., 39. Animals, as agents, 216, 2. animi, locative, 232, 3. annSn, in double questions, 162, 4.
-drvus, suffix, isi, 2.
Arrangement
armiger, decl., 23, ^. of words,
clauses, 351.
348-350;
of
Arsis, defined, 366, 6.
artHs, dat.
Answers, 162, 5. as adv., 144, i ante, prep. w. ace, 141 dat. w. verbs compounded w. ante,
;
and
in
abl. plu. of, 49, 3.
arx, decl., 40.
-Ss, ace. plu.
Greek nouns,
in expressions of time, 357, i; 371,5; ante diem, 371, s; 6.
187, III;
-as,
old gen. sing.,
47, 3. ist decl., case-end-
ing, 21, 2, a).
Antecedent of
rel.,
251.
251, 4.
4.
ending
sing, in, 22.
of
Greek
nouns,
nom,
attraction
of,
-incorporated with rel., 251, Antecedent omitted, 251, i. repeated with rel., 251, 3.
Antepenult,
6, 2. 2.
gender of noims in -as, 43, 2 45, i. voc. of Greek nouns in -as, anUs,
;
47,4aHs, abl. of patrials in, 70,
s, c).
antepSno, with dat., 187, III,
Asking, case const, with verbs
c; subst. clauses w., 29s, I tions, 300, I.
;
of, 178,1,
antequam, with
2g2.
ind.,
2gi;
with subjv.,
ind. ques-
Anticipation,
denoted by subjv., w. antequam and prmsquam, 292 by subjv. with dum, donee, quoad, 293,
; ;
Aspirates,
2, 3, c.
Assimilation of consonants, 8, 4 Association, abl. of, 222, A.
f.
;
9, ».
III, 2 ; 374, s. -anus, suffix, 151, 2 152, i ; 3. Aorist tense, see Historical perfect.
Asyndeton, 341,
at,
4, a)
;
346.
343. I, <^). -atim, suffix, 157,
Atlas, decl., 47, 4.
2.
Apodosis, 301 ff. in conditional sent, of ist type, 302, 4 ; result clauses as apodoses, 322 qumclauses as apodoses, 322; ind. questions as apodoses, 322, b; potuerim in apodosis, 322, c apodosis in indir. disc, 319-321; in expressions of obligation, ability, etc., 304, 3,0; with periphrastic conjugations, 304, 3, b. Apposition, i6g; agreement, 169, 2;
; ;
atomus, gender
atqtie,
of, 26, i, c),
;
341,
2, 6)
1, e).
=
as,
341,
I, e).
atqui, 343,
Attendant circumstance,
227,
2, e).
abl.
of,
221:
Attraction of demonstratives, 246, 5 ; of relatives, 250, s; subjunctive by attraction, 324;
of adjectives, 327,
2.
2,
a;
328,
2.
partitive, 169, 5;
with voc. in nom.,
Attributive adjs., 233,
auddr.ter,
171, 2
;
genitive w. force of appositive,
-atus, its force as suffix, 151, 4.
202;
i,
b;
id as appositive of clause, 247, inf. as appositive, 326; 329;
282,
i,
formation
and
comparison,
76, 2.
subst. clauses as appositives,
/; 294;
297, 3.
;
audeo, conj., 114, i. audio, conj., 107; with
337, 3aulal, archaic gen., ?i,
pres.
partic,
Appositive of locative, 169, 4 with ace. of limit of motion, 182, 2, a with town names, in abl. of place whence, 229,
;
2, b. 5.
2.
position of, 350, n. aptus, w. dat., 192, 2.
ausus, force as participle, 336, aut, 342, 1, a). autem, 343, i, c) ; 350, 8.
apud, prep. w. ace, 141.
Auxiliary omitted in finite forms, 166, 3.
infin.,
116, 5;
in
GENERAL INDEX.
The
auxiHum, auxiUa, 61. 4x, sufSx, ISO, 2.
rftferences are to sections
267
and paragraphs.
conjunctions, 345.
Cause, abl.
cave, cave
-ce, 6,
of,
219; 227,
2, d).
cavi, 363, 2, b).
B.
balneum, balneae, 60,
barbiios, decl., 27.
2.
3
f.
ne in prohibitions, 376, 87, footnote 2.
;
b.
Believing, verbs of,
belli,
with
dat., 1S7, 11.
cedo, cette, 137, 3. cedo, with dat., 187, II.
celeber, decl., 68, 1.
celer, decl., 68, 2.
locative, 232, 2.
bellum, decl., 23.
comparison, 77, 1. Benefiting, verbs of, w. dat., 187, II. benevolus, comparison, 71, 5, a).
bene,
-ber,
celo, constr., 178, i, e).
cenatus, force, 114, 2.
celera,
adverbial ace, 185,
n.
declension of
month names
in, 68, i.
celeri, use,
-bilis, suffix,
150, 4.
;
233, 4. Characteristic, clauses of, 283
ionu^, decl., 63
bos, dec!.,
comparison, 72.
2.
; denoting cause or opposition {'although'), 283,
41.
3
;
gen.
of, 203, I
;
abl., 224.
Brachylogy, 374,
Bucolic diaeresis, 368, 3, d. -btdam, suffix, 147, 4. -bundus, suffix, 150, i.
Charge, gen. of, 208, i ; 2. Chiasmus, 350, 11, c). Choosing, const, w. verbs of, 177, 1-3. circa, circiter, circum, preps, w. ace,
141. circum,
J«m,
decl., 38, i.
compounds
of,
w. dat., 187, III.
C.
circumdd, const., 187,
i, a.
C,
for
G. as abbreviation of Gams, 373.
caedes, decl., 40.
Circumstance, abl. of attendant, 221. CM, prep. w. ace, 141. citerior, comparison, 73, i.
cito, 77, 2, a.
Caesura, 366, 8; in dactylic hexameter,
368, 3.
citrd,
prep. w. ace, 141.
edcar, decl., 39.
civitds, decl., 40, i, c.
Calendar, 371 ; 372. Calends, 371, 2, a), campesler, decl., 68, i.
canis, decL, 38, 2.
clam, with ace, 144, 2. Clauses, coord, and subord., 164, 165. purpose, Clauses of characteristic, 283
;
capio, conj.,
no.
of, 26, 1, 6).
carbasus,
gender
career, carceres, 61.
Cardinals, defined,
decl.,
78,
i
;
list
'
of,
79
282; result, 284; causal, 285; temporal with postquam, tit, ubi, simul ac, with cum, 288 substantive etc., 287 clauses, 294 f ; condition, 301 f ; conditional comparison, 307; concessive,
; ;
.
.
80; with and without
et,
81, i;
3; expressed by subtraction, 81, 2; replaced by distributives in poetry, 81,
4, d.
308 ; adversative, 309 ; wish or proviso, 310; relative, 311 f.; 283 f.
cldvis, decl., 38, i.
Clinging, construction of verbs of, 258, 3.
j.
care,
comparison, 76,
carrum, 60,
i.
clipeus,
cHpeum,
60, i.
card, decl., 42.
Close of sentences, cadences used, 350,
12.
carrus,
Cases, 17; alike in form, 19;
170
ff.
coepi, conj., 133;
coeptus
4.
est,
133, i.
Case-endings, 17, 3.
eastrum, castra, 61.
Cognate ace, 176,
cognomeri, 373.
cago,
Catalectic verses, 366, 9.
causa,
w. ace, 178,
i,
d);
2,
w.
infin., 331,
with gen., 198, i nulla causa est cur, with subjv., 29s, 7. clause of Causal clauses, 285; 286; characteristic with accessory notion of
;
VI.
Collective nouns, verb, 254, 4colus,
12,
a);
w.
plu,
gender
of, 26, 1, b).
cause, 283, 3.
com-,
compounds
of,
w.
dat., 187, III.
268
The
comedo, conj., 128,
comiies, decl., 22.
2.
GENERAL INDEX.
references are to sections
and paragraphs.
trary-to-fact apodoses, 304, 3 ; praasia omitted or implied, 305, i; protasis
conUHa, as time expression, 230, i. Commanding, dat. w. verbs of, 187, II; subst. clause w. verbs of, 295, i commands expressed by jussive subjv.,
contained in imperative,
subjv., 30s, 2
;
or jussive
of nisi,
si
employment
nSn, sm, si mirms, 306; relative sentences, 3T2, 2.
cSnfido,
conditional
Common
27s; by imperative, 281. gender, 15, £, N. i. nouns, 12, I.
syllables, s, jB, 3.
w.
abl., 219, i, a.
;
Conjugation, 11
93
f.;
the four conju-
gations, 98; periphrastic, 115; peculiarities of conj., 116.
commonefacio, w. gen. and ace, 207. commoneo, w. gen. and ace, 207. communis, w. gen., 204, 2; with dat.
204,
2, a.
commHtS, w. abl., 222, A. Comparatives, decl., 69; w. abl., 217; w. qnam, 217, 2; occasional meaning,
240.
341 f. ; with inf., 295, s, a. Consecutive clauses, see Result clauses. consistere, with abl., 218, 4. Consonant stems, nouns, 29 f.; adjs.,
Conor,
70, 1.
Conjunctions, 14s, r
partially adapted to i-stems, 40.
Consonants,
,
2, 2 f . 2, 9.
;
pronunciation,
of,
3, 3.
two required in Latin, 240, 4. Comparison of adjs., 71 f.; of adverbs,
,
double,
combinations
syllables, 4, 2 f
in division into
76; 77participles as adjs., 71, 2.
adjs. in -dicus, -ficus, -vohts, 71, 5.
Consonant changes, 8
8,
;
omission of
f
finals,
defective, 73.
abl. of, 217.
3 ; assimilation of, 8, 4 following stems, 29; {-stems, 40.
conspicio, conj., 109, 2, i).
constdre,
analogy of
Comparison, conditional, 307. Compendiary comparison, 374, 2, 6); w. result clauses, 284, 4 ; w. clauses of
characteristic, 283, 2, a.
Completed
action,
tenses
expressing,
of, 9, a.
w. abl., 2r8, 4. Construction ace to sense, 254, 4; 235, B, 2, c). consuetudd est, with subjv. substantive
cdnstievl
262-4; 267, 3. Compounds, 158 f.; spelling
clause, 297, 3. pres., 262,
=
A.
with
dat., 338, 3.
Compound
sentences, r64.
consularis, abl. sing, of, 70, s, a.
verbs governing ace, 175, 2, o ; governing dat., 187, III; 188, 2, d. Conative uses of pres., 259, 2 ; of imperf ., of pres. partic, 336, 2, u. 260, 3 Concessive clauses, 308; 'although' as accessory idea to clause of character;
Contending, verbs
of,
contentus, w. abl., 2T9, i.
contmerl, with abl., 218, 4. canUngit ut, 297, i.
contra, prep.
Continued action, tenses for, 257, w. ace, 141 ; as adv.,
Contraction,
,
i, h.
144,
1.
istic,
283, 3.
7, 2.
of, s.
subjunctive, 278. Conclusion, see Apodosis. Concrete nouns, 12, 2, a). Condemning, verbs of, constr.,208, f. Conditional clauses of comparison, 307. sentences, ist type (nothing implied), 302; in indir. disc, 319; 2d type ('should'-' would'), 303 ; in indir. disc, 320; 3d tyjie (contrary to fact), 304; in indir. disc, 321; abl. abs. equivalent to, 227, 2, 6); introduced by relative pronouns, 312; general conditions, 302, 2 ; 3 ; indicative in con-
length of vowel as result
A,
,,b).
Contrary-to-fact conditions, 304. Convicting, verbs of, constr., 208
f.
Coordinate clauses, 165. conjunctions, 341 f
copia, copiae, 61.
Copulative conjunctions, 341.
cor, lacks gen. plu., S7. 7-
cornu, decl., 48. Correlative conjunctions, 341, 3 adverbs, 140.
coltidie, spelling, g, 2.
;
342, a
GENERAL INDEX.
The
Countries, gender of, 26,
references are to sections
i,
269
and paragraphs.
of reference, 188. of separation, 188, of the gerund, 338,
a.
Crime, gen.
of, 208, i
;
2.
2, i). 2.
-crum, sufSx, 147, 4.
-culum, suffix, 147, 4.
-cuius (a,
um),
suffix, 148, i.
cum, appended, 142, 4. cum (conj.), 'when,' 288-290;
ever,' 288, 3.
'wlien-
adversative, 309, 3.
causal, 286, 2.
with adjs., 192 ; with proprms, communis, 204, 2; similis, 204, 3. with compound verbs, 187, III. with intrans. verbs, 187, n. with nomen est, 190, i. with impersonal pass, verbs, 187,
II, J.
explicative, 290.
to denote
289, u.
a recurring action, 288, 3
z.
with trans, verbs, 187, 1. with verbs of mingling, 338,
ethical dat., 188,
de, prep.
2, b).
;
3.
inversum, 288,
. .
.
w.
abl.,
142
with abl. instead
turn, 290, 2. cum cum primum, 287, i.
of gen. of whole, 201, i,a; with verbs of reminding, 207, a; compounds of
cum, spelling
of, 9, 1.
,
cum
(prep.)
with abl.
with abl. of manner, 220; of accompaniment, 222; ap4.
de governing dat., 188, 2, d;de m, with verbs of accusing and convicting, 208, 3; with gerund and gerundive, 338, 4,6.
dea, dedbus, 21,
2, e).
pended to prons., 142,
-cundus, suffix, 150, 1.
cupiS,
conj.,
109,
2,
o);
with subst.
clause developed
w.
cur,
inf.,
331, IV,
from and 0.
optative, 296;
7.
dgbebam, debui in apodosis, 304, 3, a). debeS, governing obj. inf., 328, i.
nuUa causa
est cur,
w. subjv., 295,
euro,
with gerundive const, as
i
;
obj., 337,
with pres. inf., 270, 2. decemvir, gen. plu. of, 23, 6, b). dlcernd, w. subst. clause developed
debut,
volitive, 29s, 4.
decet,
from
8, J, 2.
Customary action, 239,
260, 2.
w. ace, 17s, 2, c). Declarative sentences, defined, 161, i;
in indir. disc, 314. Declension, 11; heteroclites, 59. , stems and gen. terminations, 18.
D, changed to
3
;
j, 8, 2 ; assimilated, 8, 4. Dactyl, 366, 2.
d
final
omitted,
8,
Dactylic hexameter, 368. pentameter, 369.
iapis, defective, 57, 6.
2d decl., 23-27; 28-47; 4th decl., 48-30; 3th decl. 31-53; of Greek nouns, 22; 27; 47 ; of adjs., 62-69 of prons., 84-90. Decreeing, verbs of, w. subjv., 295, 4.
,
ist decl., 20-22;
3d
decl.,
,'
Daring, verbs of, with obj. inf., 328, i. Dates, 371, 2-s; as indeclinable nouns,
371, 6; in leap year, 371, 7. Dative, 17; irregular, ist decl., 21, i, c)
dedecet, 175, 2, c).
Defective verbs, 133 f ; nouns, 54 f ; 32, 4; 57; comparison, 73. Definite perfect, see Present perfect.
.
.
3d decl., 47,
decl., 52, I
s
;
4th
;
decl., 49, 3
;
3
;
Sth
and 3
186
fE.
Degree of difference, abl. of, 223. Degrees of comparison, 71 ff.
inf. as subj., 327, i. w. abl. of cause, 219. Deliberative subjv., 277; in indir. ques-
in the gerundive const., 339, 7. of agency, 189. ^
delectat, dilector,
w.
of direction
of
and limit of motion, 193
of indir. obj., 187.
tions, 3i50, 1
;
in indir. disc, 315, 3.
advantage or disadvantage, so Demanding, verbs of, w. two aces., 178, w. subst. clause, 295, i. I called, 188, 1. Demonstrative pronouns, 87; 246; of of local standpoint, 188, a, a). position of ist, 2d, and 3d persons, 87 of person judging, 188, 2, c).
; ;
of possession, 190; 339, iof purpose or tendency, 191
demonstratives, 3S0,
;
5,
•'•
339, 7-
Denominative verbs, 136.
270
The
Dental mutes,
stems, 33.
^, 4.
GENERAL INDEX.
references are to sections
and paragraphs.
do, conj., 127.
doeed,
with ace, 178,
232, *.
i,
ft);
with
inf,
Dependent clauses, 282 S. 331, VI. Deponent verbs, 112; forms witl\ passive domi, locative,
meanings,
114.
112,
b);
semi-deponents,
abl., 214, i,
ft.
domo, 229, i, ft). domes, 182, i, ft.
Depriving, verbs of, w. Derivatives, 147 f
-des,
domwm,
N.
182,
i,
ft) ;
'house,' in ace, 182,
patronymics
in, 148, 6.
domus,
of,
Description, imperf. as
I, a.
tense
260,
decl., 49; 4 ; gender, 50. donee, with ind., 293; with subjv., 293,
III, 2.
Desideratives, 155, 3. Desire, adjs. of, w. gen., 204, of, w. subst. clauses, 296, i.
deterior, 73, 1.
i
;
verbs
dono, constr., 187, dos, gender, 44, 3.
i, u.
Double consonants,
2, 9.
deus, decl., 25, 4.
devertor, 114, 3.
dexter, dec!., 65, i.
dl-, 159. 3,
N.
questions, 162,4; indirect, 300, 4. Doubting, verbs of, w. quin, 298. Dubitative subjunctive, see Deliberative. dubito, dubiitm est, nSn dubito,- non dubiwn est, with gain, 298 ; non dubito w. inf.,
298, a. due, 116, 3. dued, accent of 116, 3.
Diaeresis, 366, 8; bucolic d., 368, 3, d).
Diastole, 367,
die, 116, 3.
2.
compounds
of, in imper.,
dicitur,
died,
dictum est, w. inf., 332, note. accent of compounds of, in impera-
tive, 116, 3.
-dicus,
comparison of adjs.
gender, S3.
in, 71, 5.
duim, duint, 127, 2. -dmn, 6, 3. dum, temporal with
293, III, provisos, 310.
subjv.,
ind.,
293;
with
Dido,
decl., 47, 8.
;
2;
in wishes and
dies, decl., 51
Difference, abl. of degree
diffieUe est
difficilis,
of,
223.
i, ft).
dummodo, 310.
duo, decl., 80, z.
=
Eng. potential, 271,
2.
comp., 71, 4. Mgnor, with abl., 226,
;
dignus, 226, 2
282, 3.
in rel. clauses of purpose,
Duration of time, 181, 2. Duty, expressed by gerundive, 189; 337, 8; verbs of duty in conclusion
cond. sentences contrary-to-fact, subst. clauses dependent 3, a; on verbs of, 29s, 6 inf. w. verbs oi duty, 327, i; 328, i; 330; 'it is th? duty of,' 198, 3; 'I perform a duty,'
of
Dimeter, verses, 366, 11. Diminutives, 148, i. Diphthongs, 2, i ; 3, 2 diphthong stems, 41 ; diphthongs shortened, 362, z. diphlkongus, gender of, 26, i, e).
;
304,
;
218, I.
' Dipodies, 366, 11. Direct reflexives, 244, i.
duumvir, gen. plu.
dux, decl., 32.
of, 25, 6,
ft).
object, 172.
quotation, 313.
discourse, 313. questions, 162.
dis-, in
e,
compounds, 159,
3,
N.
Disjunctive conjunctions, 342. dissimdUs, comp., 71, 4. Distributives, 63, 2 ; 78, i ;
4-
as vowel, 2, i ; as second member of diphthongs, 2, i ; sound of, 3, i change, to i, 7, i, 0; for S, 7, i, c; in voc. sing, of 2d decl., 23; in abl.
sing, of
3d
decl.,
31
;
dropped in nom.
39 ;
-i for
79 ;
81,
of neuters of
abl.
3d
decl.,
4
in
»
of
mare,
39;
alternating w.
dia,
compared,
77, i.
;
dives, decl., 70, i
dixfi, 116, 4, e.
compared, 71,
6.
in abl. sing, of )f-stems, 37,38; for e in in abl. gen. sing, of 5th decl., 52, i
;
sing, of adjs. of
3d
decl., 70, i
;
3 ; in
GENERAL INDEX.
The
beni
references are to sections
;
271
and paragraphs.
and mail,
vowel of 3d
77, conj.,
i
distinguishing
,
erga, prep.
w. ace, 141.
g8;
before
j,
i,
S ; for -l in imperatives, 363, 2, temeri and saepl, 363, a, c. pronundation, 3, i ; by contraction, 2;
362, b; in
ergo, 344, I, 6).
7,
-errms, suffix, 154. -fa, gender of nouns in, 43, i ; exception, 44, s ; in nom. plu. of Greek nouns of
as ending of
;
Greek nouns, 22;
decl.,
3d
-es,
decl., 47, 2.
e-stems, 51
ending of dat. of 5th
ending of Greek nouns, nom. sing.
,
distinguishing vowel of S2, 3; conj., 98; -I in Jame, 363, 2, a; adverbs, 363,
S,
2d in
in, 22.
gen.
-is,
decl. of
nouns
;
in, 40, i, a).
of,
2, c.
;
ex, use, 142, 2
see ex.
ecqnis, gi, 6.
edic, 116, 3.
conjugation of, 100 compounds 12s; 126; e;.se omitted, 116, 5. est qui, with subj., 283, 2. et, 341, I, a; in enumerations, 341, 4,
esse,
c).
Editorial 'we,' 242, 3.
edd, 128.
edec, 116, 3.
efficiB ut,
247, 4. neque, 341, 3. Ethical dative, 188, 2, b).
et
.
et is,
.
.
2g7, i.
etiam, in answers, 162, 5.
et
297, a. Effort, subjv. w. verbs of, 295, 5.
efficitur ut,
nSn, 341,
2, c).
etsi,
etsi,
'although,' 309, 2;
'even
if,'
egeo,
w.
abl., 214, i, c.
ego, 84.
309, i, a. -etum, suffix, 148, 3.
-eus, inflection of
egomet, 84, 2.
Greek nouns
in, 47,
6
diphthong, 2, i ; 3, 2. -«, gen. of 5th dec!., 52,
ei,
adj. suffix, 151, I.
i.
iienitut, 297,
ex, 142, 2
;
2.
-Us, 148, 6, 6).
e/»j,
with
1,
as poss., 86,
i
;
quantity, 362,
S-
whole, 201,
dat.,
Elegiac distich, 369, 2.
Elision, 266, 7.
Ellipsis, 374, I.
188, .2,
abl., instead of gen. of a; compounds of, with d; with abl. of source,
215, I.
Exchanging, verbs
1.
of,
with
183.
abl. of asso-
um), 148, Emphasis, 349.
-ellus
(fi,
ciation, 222,
A.
of,
Exclamation, ace.
Enclitics,
accent of preceding syllable,
;
6,3.
,
Exclamatory sentences, 161, 3. Expectancy, clauses denoting, in subjv.,
292, I ; 293, III, 2. exposed, constr., 178, j., a),
exsisto, spelling, 9, 2.
-met, 84, 2
-fte, 86,
3
;
cum
as en-
clitic,
142, 4.
End
of motion, see Limit. Endings, case endings, 17, 3; personal, of verb, 96 ; in formation of words, 147 f. enim, 345. -ensimus {-ensumus), 79, N.
-insis, 151, 2;
exspecto, spelling, 9, 2.
exteri, exterior, 73, 2.
extremus, use, 241,
exuo, w. abl., 214,
1.
i, b.
152, 3.
Envy, verbs
eo,
of,
with
dat., 187, 11.
' 132; cpds., 132, I. Epexegetical genitive, 202. Epistolary tenses, 265.
f,
pronunciation,
3,
3;
»/,
quantity of
5.
epislula, spelling, 9, 2.
vowel before, s, i, a. with subjv., 295, fac, 116, 3
;
epitome, decl., 22.
facile, 77, 3.
i.
epuhim, epulae, 60,
equdbus, 21, 2, e).
Jacio, 109,
,
facUis, comp., 71, 4. 2, o) ; pass, of, 131.
equester, decl., 68, i.
in imper., 116, 3.
2, J).
equos, decl., 24.
-er, decl.,
falsus, comparison, 73, 3.
in,
of
nouns
23
;
adjs., 63
;
64
fame, 59,
6s;
68;
adjs. in -er
compared,
71, 3.
Familiarity, adjs. of, w. gen., 204, i.
272
The
famUias, 21,
fori, 136.
2, a).
GENERAL INDEX.
references are to sections
and paxagrapha.
fratide, abl. of
manner, 220,
2.
i.
fas, indeclinable, 58.
Free, abl. w. adjs. signifying, 214, i, Freeing, abl. w. verbs of, 214, i, a.
fauces, decl,, 40,
frenum, plu. of, 60, 2. i, d). Favor, verbs signifying, with dat., 187, II. Frequentatives, iss, 2. fretus w. abl., 218, 3. Fearing, verbs of, constr., 296, a.
Fricatives, 2, 7.
febris, decl., 38, i.
felix, 70.
Friendly, dat. w. adjs. signifying, 192,
frOcUis, decl., 48.
3,
c-.
i,
Feminine, see Gender.
Feminine caesura, 368,
femur,
fero,
decl., 42, 4.
-fer, decl.
frUgi,
compared, 72;
70, 6.
frilgis, 57, 6.
and
its
of nouns in, 23, 2 ; adjs. 6s, i. compounds, 129.
in, 71, 5.
fruor,
with
abl.,
218,
i;
in gerundive
-ficits,
comparison of adjs.
;
constr., 339, 4. fugio, conj., 109, 2, a).
fidel, s^t I.
fui, fiiisti, etc., for
i, u.
sum,
es, etc.,
in comp. 61,
with abl., 219, fidus, compared, 73, 3.
fidl, 114, I
pound
tenses, p. 60, footnote;
footnote.
Fullness, adjs. of, w. abl., 218, 8; w. gen.,
204, X.
fierem, fieri, 362,
298, 2.
i,
c;
fieri potest ut,
Fifth decl., 51 f. Figures of rhetoric, 375. of syntax, 374.
flH, 25, 3.
filia, ftiidbus, 21, 2, e).
fungor, w.
abl.,
218,
i
;
in gerundive
constr., 339, 4. fur, decl., 40, I, d).
fUrto, abl. of
manner, 220, 2. Future tense, 261 ; w. imperative
261, 3.
perfect, 264;
133, 2
;
force,
w. abl., 218, 8. Final clauses, see Purpose clauses. Final consonant omitted, 8, 3.
Filling,
verbs
of,
time in the subjv., 269. with future meaning,
inf.,
Final syllables, quantity, 363, 364.
finis, fines, 61.
270, 4.
1.
imperative, 281,
inf.,
Finite verb, 95. fiS, conj., 131.
fid,
infinitive, 270, i,c; periphrastic fut.
270, 3,
and
a.
with
abl., 218, 6.
;
First conj., loi
of,
principal parts of verbs
conj.,
;
participle, 337, 4. futarum esse ut, with subjv., 270, 3.
120;
deponents of ist
.
113.
First decl., 20 f
;
peculiarities, 21
Greek
nouns
fit ut,
of ist decl., 22.
G.
gaudeS, semi-deponent, 114,
gerrio,
i.
297, 2.
fldgitS, constr., 178, i, a),
fodio, conj., 109, 2, a).
Foot, in verse, 366, 2. Tor,' its Latin equivalents, 358, fore, page 57, footnote 3.
fore ut, 270, 3
;
i.
w. ace, 175, 2, 6. Gender, 13-15 in ist decl., 20, 21 ; in 2d decl., 23; exceptions, 26; in 3d decl., 43 f. ; in 4th decl., 50; in 5th decl., 53 ; determined by endings, 14
;
297, a.
by
57, footnote 2.
signification, 15,
A
;
heterogeneous
forem, fores,
etc.,
page
noims, 60.
gener, decl., 23, 2.
foris, 228, I, c.
Formation
of words, 146 f
fors, forte, 57, 2, u.
fortior, decl., 69.
fortis, decl., 69.
General relatives, 312, i; general truths, 259, 1 ; 262, B, I ; 'general' conditions,
302, 2; 3. Genitive, 17
;
in -4 for
-t,
-ii,
;
25, i
and
;
2
;
of
-», -8,
fort&na, fortunae, 61.
4th
decl., in
49, i
of 5th decl. in in
Fourth Fourth
conj., 107.
decl.,
;
52, 2;
of 5th decl. in -M, 52, i
48; dat. in
in -i, 49, i
-U, 49, 2 ; gen. dat. abl. plu. in -nhus, 49, 3.
52, 3; of ist decl. in -di, 21, 2, h); of ist decl. in -is, 21, 2, a) ; gen. plu. -H9I
GENERAL INDEX.
The
for -arum,
2S.
273
21, i.
of,
leferences are to sections
and paragraphs.
21,
2
;
2,
d);
-um
for-
drum,
;
Hadria, gender,
6 ; 63,
-«»» for -»««», 70, 7
;
gen.
f.
Happening, verbs
w.
ind., 299, i> 2;
plu. lacking, 37, 7
syntax
of,
194
of characteristic, 203, i. of charge with judicial verbs, 208.
of indefinite price, 203, 4.
w. subjv., 297, 2. Hard consonants, 2, Hardening, 367, 4.
hatul,
3, o),
footnote
i.
use,
347,
2,
a;
haud
scio
an,
of indefmite value, 203, 3. of material, 197.
of measure, 203, 2.
300, 5.
have, 137, s-
Help,
verbs
signifying,
w.
dat.,
187,
of origin, 196.
of possession, 198. of quality, 203. of the whole, 201.
U.
Hendiadys, 374,
Heteroclites, 59.
4.
2.'
heri, locative, 232,
appositional, 202.
objective, 200.
of separation, 212, 3.
Heterogeneous nouns, 60. Hexameter, dactylic, 368.
Hiatus, 366, -7, a.
hie,
subjective, 199.
87;
246, i;
246, 2;
hie, 364, foot-
with
adjs.,
204;
with
participles,
note.
204, I, a.
hiems, 35, footnote.
with causa, gratia, 198, i. with verbs, 205 f. ; of plenty and want, 212 ; with impers. verbs, 209.
position of gen., 350, 1. genus, decl., 36; id genus, 185,
-ger, decl.
Hindering, verbs
3-
of,
with subjv., 295,
Historical tenses, 258; historical present2SQ, 3 ; 268, 3 ; historical perfect, 262. historical infinitive, 335. honor, decl., 36.
i.
B;
of
nouns
I
;
Gerund, 95,
103;
in, 23, 2 ; adjs., 65, i. ist conj., loi ; 2d conj.,
3d
conj.,
los;
4th
conj.,
107;
Hoping, verbs of, w. inf., 331, Hortatory subjv., 274.
hortus, decl., 23.
1.
.
sjTitax, 338; with object, 338, 5. Gerundive, 95, i ; ist conj., 102 ; 2d conj., 104; 3d conj., 106; 4th conj., 108; in periphrastic conj., 115; 337,8. Gerundive, const., 339, 1-6; in passive gen. deperiphrastic conj., 337, 8 f. noting purpose, 339, 6; with dat. of
;
hoseine, 87, footnote i.
hostis, decl., 38.
hHjusce, 87, footnote i. humi, locative, 232, 2.
humilis, comp., 71, 4.
humus, gender
of, 26, i, J).
i.
purpose, 191, 3
gnarus, not
;
339, 7.
z.
himcine, 87, footnote
1.
compared, 75,
i;
t-.
Gnomic present, 2S9,
gradior, conj., 109, 2,
perfect, 262,
Hyperbaton, 350, 11, a). Hypermeter, 367, 6. Hysteron proteron, 374, 7.
Srafjo,
Grammatical gender, 15. with gen., ig8, i ;
61.
gratia, gratiae,
Greek nouns, ist
decl.,
decl., 22 2d decl., 27 exceptions in gender, 26, i, c) ; 3d
;
?,
I,
I
;
in diphthongs,
J, 7, 1,
2, i
;
pron., 3, *
;
from
a
;
from
4
;
5, 7, i, 6
dropped
47
;
Greek ace, 180; Greek nouns
by
syncope,
7,
for
e,
»
in
some words,
j, 367,
in verse, 365.
gfus, decl., 41, 2.
9, i;
changes to
39; dropped, 39;
;
final i short, 363, 3
42,
becomes
J.
S« = gv, 3, 3Guttural mutes,
stems, 32.
4.
J-stems, 37; 39; not always ending
38, 3-i,
m -M,
.
•
H.
h,
pron.,
3,3; ph,
.
ch, th, 2, t^;
3,3-
gen. and voc. of 2d decl. nouns m -tus and -ium in, 25, i and 2. gen. of 4th decl. nouns in -us, 49, i.
Meo, with
perf pass, partic, 337, 6.
gen. of sth decl. nouns, 52,
2.
274
The
i-stem, vis, 41.
»,
GENERAL INDEX.
references are to sections
and paragraphs.
61.
-im, -is in subjv., ii6, 4, d.
;
in abl.,
3.
3d
decl., 38, i
39
;
in adjs., 67,
;
impedimentum, impedimenta,
;
«; 70. S; participles, 70, 3 7o< S, <:) ; nom. plu., of is, 87 acteristic of 4th conj., 98. ia, 149.
patrials,
;
as char-
Imperative, 281 ; tenses in, 94, 3 ; 281, future indie, with force of, 261, 3. I as protasis of a conditional sent.,
305,
2
;
as apodosis, 302, 4.
Iambus, 366, 2. Iambic measures, 370.
trimeter, 370.
sent, in indir. disc, 316.
Imperfect tense, 260; conative, 260, 3; inceptive, 260, 3 withiom, etc., 260, 4
;
HSnus,
suffix, 152, I.
epistolary imp., 265.
-ias, suffix, 148, 6, b).
Imperfect
subjv.
in
conditional
sent.
•ibam, in imperf., 116, 4, ft). -ibo, in future, 116, 4, b).
Ictus, 366, 5.
-icus, suffix, 151, 2
ti2
;
referring to the past, 304, 2. Impersonal verbs, 138; gen. with, 209;
dat. with, 187, II, 6 ; in passive, 256, 3
152, 2.
aeHUs, 185,
2.
Ai ^enjtf, i8s, 1. id quod, 247, i, ft.
with substantive clauses developed from volitive, 29s, 6 ; of result, 297, 2 with infin., 327, i ; 330.
impetus, defective, S7> 4. Implied indir. disc, 323. imus, ' bottom of,' 241, i.
in, prep.,
id temporis, 185, 2. Ideal 'you'; see Indefinite second person.
idem, 87
;
248.
idem
ac, 248, 2.
143 ; verbs compounded w. in governing ace, 17s, 2, o, 2; verbs compounded w. in governing dat.,
187, III.
Ides, 371, 2, c).
-jdej, suffix, 148, 6, o).
ri!(j&s,
suffix, 148, 6, a).
in with abl. of place, 228; with abl. of time, 230, 2 ; 231.
-ina, suffix, 148, 5.
-idd, suffix, 147, 3, c).
idSneiU, not compared, 74, 2; w. dat., 192, 2; vr. ad and ace, 192, 2, and N.
Inceptives, iss. i. Inchoatives, 155, 1.
with
rel.
clause of purpose, 282, 3.
^w,
-ie,
suffix, 150, 3.
IdHs, fem.
by exception, so. in voc. sing, of adjs. in -ias, 63,
Incomplete action, 257, i, ft; 267, IndecUnable adjs., 70, 6 ; 80, 6. nouns, 58; gender of, 15, 3.
1.
3.
tens, pres. partic.
-tens,
from eo, 132. as ending of numeral adverbs, 97
ending, 116, 4, u.
in, 51.
Indefinite price, 225, i ; 203, 4. Indefinite pronouns, 91; 252;
ditions, 302, 3.
in con356, 3
and N.
-ier, inf.
-iej,
nouns
Indefinite second person, 280, 3 302, 2. Indefinite value, 203, 3.
;
igitur, 344, I, c).
Indicative,
271.
2.
equivalent to Eng. subjv.,
sent, of
»g»M, decl., 38. -ti, in gen. sing, of ti-stems, 25,
its,
in dat.
and
abl; plu. of is, 87.
-in apodosis of conditional 3d type, 304, 3, 0) and ft).
indiged, constr., 214, i, N.
2.
-t2e, suffix,
148, 3.
lUon,
decl., 27.
-ilis, suffix, 151, 2. -ilis, suffix,
150, 4. 246,
ille,
Illative conjunctions, 344. 87; 'the following,'
indignus, with abl., 226, 2; with rel. clause of purpose, 282, 3. Indirect discourse, defined, 313 f. : mood in, 313 fit. ; tenses in, 317-18; declara2;
'the
tive sentences in, 314;
interrog. sen-
former' 246, i; 'the well-known,' 246,
3
;
tences
position, 350, s.
ft-
t//*;, 87,
-illus (a,
footnote 3. um), diminutive
decl., 38, i.
imperative sentences in, 316; conditional sentences in, 319-22; verbs introducing, 331, t; verb of
in,
31S
;
suffix,
148,
1.
saying,
4m, in ace, 3d
ind. in etc., implied, 314, 2; subord. clauses of indir. disc, 314, 3i
GENERAL INDEX.
The
sab},
ace. omitted,
references are to sections
275
and paragraphs.
inf. for subjv. in indir. disc, 314, 4;
314,
$',
implied
indir. disc, 323.
ing, 300,
questions, 300; partides introducI, a; deliberative subjv. in
indir. quest,
indir.
Interlocked order, 330, 11, d. Interrogative pronouns, 90. sentences, 162; particles, 162, 2; omitted, 162, ^, d); in indir. disc,
31Sintra, prep.
indir. quest., 300, 2;
si,
w.
w. ace, 141.
verbs,
300.
3;
double
questions,
Intransitive
with cognate ace,
in indir. quest., 300, 6; 4; in conditional sents. of 3d type, 322, b.
300,
reflexives, 244, 2.
176, 4; in passive, 256, 3; 187, II, 6; impersonal intransitives, 138, IV.
object, 187.
vnferum, inferior, 73, 2. infimus, 241, x.
Infinitive,
gender
a;
116,
4,
£f.
oi, t.%. A, 3; in -ier, force of tenses in, 270;
^nus, suffix, 151, 2 ; 132, i ; 152, 3. •id, verbs of 3d conj., 109. -ior, ius, comparative ending, 71. ipse, 88; 249; as indir. reflexive, 249, 3. ipsUis and ipsorum, with possessive pronouns, 243, 3.
-»r,
326
fut. perf. inf., 270, 4; periphrastic future, 270, 3. without subj. ace, 326-328; 314,
S-
decl. of nouns in, 23. Irregular comparison, 72 verbs, 124 f.
ff. ;
noims, 42
is,
with subj. ace, 329-331. asobj., 328; 331. as subj., 327 ; 330! with adjs., 333. denoting purpose, 326, N.
in abl. abs., 227, 3. in exclamations, 334.
historical inf., 335. mfilias, constr., 182, 5.
Inflection, 11.
Inflections, 11
£E.
87; 247; as personal pron., 247, 2. is, as patronymic ending, 148, 6, 6); nouns in -is of 3d decl., 37 f. ; adjs. in
-is,
69.
plu.,
——
iste,
-Is,
ace
,
3d
decl.,
37
;
40.
-ttis,
abl. of partials in, 70, s, c).
istaec, 87,
footnote
246, 4.
2.
87
;
istic, 6, 4.
istUc, 6,
ita,
4 ; 87, footnote 2. in answers, 162, 5.
42, I.
itaque, 344, i, a).
iter,
mfra, prep. w. ace, 141. ingms, comp., 73, 4.
injuria, abl. of
-itia,
-ito,
149.
manner, 220,
i;
2.
injttssu, defective, 57,
2.
the
abl., 219,
frequentatives in, iss. ', "• ium, gen. of nouns in, 25, 2 ; ending of gen. plu., 3d decl., 37 f.; 39; 40; 147,
inl-
=
ill-,
9, 2.
'
3,6); 148, 2. -MM, gen. and voc. sing, of nouns
I
in, 25,
innixus, w. abl., 218, 3.
inofs, decl., 70, i.
2; of adjs., 63,0; 151,2; 152,2; -ius for ins, 362, i, a), 152, 3
;
and
inquam, conj., 134, Inseparable prepositions, 139, 3, N.
insidiae, plu. only, s6. 3ittslar,
-ivus, suffix, 151, 2.
58.
abl.,
Instrumental uses of
Intensive pron., 88.
213
;
218
ff.
J, I, 2.
jacio, conj., 109, 2, o)
;
compounds
of, 9,
Intensives (verbs), iss> 2. 3; 362, 5. compounded jam, etc., with present tense, 259, 4 ; with inter, prep. w. ace, 141 ; imperfect, 260, 4. w. verbs, governing dat. 187, III; to jecur, decl., 42, 3. express reciprocal relation, 245.
interdicS, const., 188, i, a.
interest, constr.,
joco, abl. of
manner, 220,
2.
210;
i.
211.
jocus, plu. of, 60, a.
\jubeo, constr., 295,
interior,
comp., 73,
Interjections^ 145.
Joining, verbs of, construction, 358, 3. i, a; 331, 11.
276
The
w. inf., 332, jugerum, S9, i.
judicor,
c.
GENERAL INDEX.
leferences are to sections
and paragraphs.
Us, decl., 40, J, d). Litotes, 375,. I.
litter a, litter ae,
JuKan calendar, 371. jungo, w. abl., 222, A. Juppiter, decl., 41.
juratus, 114, 2. jure, abl. of manner, 220,
2.
61.
jus
est,
with substantive clause, 297,
3.
Locative, 17, i; in -ae, 21, 2, c); in -^ 25, S; syntax, 232; apposition with, 169, 4; loc. uses of abl., 213 ; 228 f. loco, locis, the abl., 228, i, b, locus, plurals of, 60, 2.
syllables, 5, B, 1. vowels, 5, .4, I. longius = longius quam, 271, 3.
jussu, 57, I ; the abl., 219, 2. Jussive subjv., 27s; equiv. to a protasis,
30s. 2.
Long
jmat, w. ace, 17s,
2, c)
;
with inf., 327,
;
i.
longum
lildis,
est
=
Eng. potential, 217,
i, b.
JuvenSle, abl., 70, s, b. juvenis, a cons, stem, 38, 2
lubet, hibidS, spelling, 9, i.
comparison,
the
73,4juvo, with ace, 187, II, N.
-Uis, -la,
abl., 230, i. -lum, diminutives in, 148,
«
i.
lux, 57, 7.
juxtd, prep. w. ace, 141.
M.
K.
k, I, I.
m, pron.,
8, 5, c;
3,
3
;
changed to » before
d, c,
Knowing, verbs of, w. inf., 331, 1. Knowledge, adjs. of, w. gen., 204.
ffj-stem, 35, footnote;
m-fimal
L.
I,
pron., 3, 3.
2, 4.
Labial mutes,
in poetry, 366, 10. maereo, w. ace, 175, 2, 6. magisj comparison, 77, i; comparison with, 74. magni, gen. of value, 203, 3. magnopere, compared, 77, i.
x.
stems, 31; gender of, 43, 3; 46,
lacer, decl., 65, i.
magnus, compared, 72. Making, verbs of, w. two accusatives,
177. male, comparison, 77, i. maledicens, comparison, 71, 5, a), malim, potential subjv., 280, 2, a.
locus, decl., 49, 3. laedo, w. ace, 187, II, N.
laetus,
w. adverbial force, 239.
ia#M, decl., 33.
largior, 113.
Latin period, 351,
5.
mallem, potential subjv., 280, 4. mold, 130 with inf., 331, IV, and a with
; ;
Length Length
of syllables, s, B. of vowels, s, A.
subjv., 296,
I, a.
malus, comparison, 72.
-lenius, suffix, 151, 3.
led, decl.,
mane, indeclinable, 58.
35.
Manner,
abl. of, 220.
i, c).
Liber, decl., 23, 2.
KS«»', adj., decl., 65, i.
mare, decl., 39, 2 ; mari, 228, mas, decl., 40, i, d).
libero, constr., 214, i, N. i.
liberta, libertdbus, 21, 2, e).
MascuKne, see Gender. Masculine caesura, 368,
a;
3, t.
liberum, gen. plu., 25, 6, c).
licet,
with subjv., 295, 6 and 8; 308, with inf., 327, I 330.
;
Material, abl. of, 224, 3. mdteries, materia, 59, 2. a). mature, compared, 77, i.
Meet, adversative, 309, 4.
matHrus, compared, 71, 3.
i.
Likeness, adjs. of„w. dat., 192, Limit of motion, ace of., 182.
maxime, adjs. compared with, maxirm, as gen. of value, 203,
74.
3.
Lingual mutes,
Unter, decl., 40.
2, 4.
maxumus, 9, Means, abl.
1.
of,
218, abl. abs. denoting,
Liquids,
•
2, 5.
stems, 34.
227, 2 ; denoted med, for me, 84, 3.
by
partic, 337,
2, d.
tiKlNERAL INDEX.
The
Mediae (consonants),
medius, 'middle
of,'
277
;
references are to sections
and paragraphs.
2, 3, b), i.
footnote
2.
muUus, compared, 72
241. 3mils decl., 40,
i,
with another
adj..
241,
met, as objective gen., 242, 2.
d).
mdior, comparison, 72.
mUtdre, with abl., 222, A.
i, b).
mdius
est
=
Eng. potential, 271,
Mutes,
2, 3.
memini, 133; constr., 206, 1, o; memor, decl., 70, 2. -men, -mentum, sufiSxes, 147, 4. mmsis, 38, 2, footnote i.
2, a.
Mute
stems, 30.
N.
pronunciation, n adulterinum, 2,
n,
3, 3
;
mentem
{in
mentem
;
venire), 206, 3.
»-stems, 3s.
2, d.
met, enditic, 6, 3 84, 2. Metrical close of sent., 350, 12. metuo, w. subjv., 296, 2.
mi, dat., 84, i. mi, voc. of mens, 86, 2.
6.
-nam, appended to quis, go,
Names, Roman, 373. Naming, verbs of, w. two
177, I.
accusatives,
Middle voice, verbs
miles, decl., 33.
in, 175, i, d).
Nasals,
nMta,
'
2, 6.
Nasal stems, 35.
S7,
I
;
miliUae, locative, 232, 2.
mille,
maximus
natu,
minimus
1.
mUia, decl., 80, minime, comparison,
162, s, J).
5.
77,
i
;
in answers,
natu, 73, 4, footnotes 4, s; Natural gender, 14.
natus, constr., 215.
ndvis, ded., 41, 4. nd, vowel short before, 5, 2, a,
226,
minimus, comparison, 72. minor, comparison, 72.
mindris, gen. of value, 203, 3
203, 4.
;
of price,
-ne, 6, 3
f.
;
162,
2, c)
;
300, i,b); -ne
.
.
.
an, 162, 4; in indir. double questions,
i
;
minus, comparison, 77,
217, 3 306, 2
J
= minus quam,
si
300,4.
ne, in prohibitions,
QUO minus, 295, 3;
a.
minus,
276 ; vith hortatory
and
Bisfor, conj.,
113.
subjv., 274 ; with concessive, 278 ; with optative, 279; in purpose clauses, 282;
mirus, comparison, 75, 2. miscere, with abl., 222, yl ; with dat., 358,
3-
in substantive clauses, 295 f ., 296 provisos, 310.
ne,
'
;
in
lest,'
282, i
fit
;
296, 2.
with gen., 209, a. miseresco, with gen., 209, 2.
misereor,
miseret, constr., 209.
ne ndn for
2, u.
.
after verbs of fearing, 296,
Mixed stems,
40.
modium, gen. plu., 25, 6, o). modo, in wishes and provisos, 310.
moneo, 103; constr., 178, i, d). months, gender of names of, 15,
68, 1
;
guidem, 347, i ; :a. ne . . Nearness, adjs. of, w. dat., 192, 1. nee, 341, I, d); nee usquam, 341, 2, d). necesse est, w. subjv., 29s, 8. necne, in double questions, 162, 4.
decl.,
i
;
nefas, indeclinable, 58.
abl., of
i.
month names,
70, 5, a)
names, 371,
Moods,
in
94, 2. in independent sentences, 271
Negatives, 347, 2 ; two negatives strengthening the negati-n, 347, 2. nemo, defective, 57, 3 ; use, 252, 6.
f.
nequam, indeclinable, 70, 6;
72.
compared,
dependent
I.
clauses, 282 f
Mora, 366,
neque,
341,
i,
d);
i, e. 1.
neque in purpose
morior, conj., 109, 2, c). mos, ded., 36; mores, 61.
clauses, 282,
nequeo, conj., 137,
mos est, with subjv. clause, 297, 3. muUebre secus, constr., 185, i. Multiplication, distributives used to
dicate, 81, 4, c.
ne quis, use, 91, 5. nequiter, compared, 77,
in.
i.
mulhm,
77, 3
;
compared,
77, i.
nesciB an, 300, 5. nesciS quis, as indef pron., 253, 6, Neuter, see Gender.
278
The
neuter, decl., 66;
GENERAL INDEX.
references are to sections
and paragraphs.
use, 92, 1.
neve {neu), in purpose clauses, 282, i, d. nf, quantity of vowel before, s, i, a.
nihil, indeclinable, 58.
nihU
est cSr, quin, 295, 7.
nom, as pres., 262, A. nomis, compared, 73, 3. ns, quantity of vowel before, s, -ns, decl. of nouns in, 40, i, c). nt, quantity of vowel before, s,
nilbes, decl., 40, i, a.
i,
<fc
2, a.
ningit, 'it snows,' 138, i.
nisi, 306, I
and
s.
4.
nulla causa
est cUr,
quin, 295, 7.
i, b).
nisi forte, 306, 5.
nisi
St,
niUlus, decl., 66;
S7, 3! use, 92, i.
306,
nisi vera, 306, 5. ntior, constr., 218, 3.
nix, decl., 40, i, d).
num, 162, 2, b) ; 300, Number, 16; 94, 4.
Numerals,
of, 81.
78
f.
;
peculiarities
in use
No, in answers,
162, s, b.
-no, class of verbs, 117, 4.
numquis, decl., 91, 5. nuper, compared, 77,
-nus, suffix, 151, 2.
1.
noU, with inf., in prohibitions, 276, b. nolim, potential subjv., 280, 2, a. nollem, potential subjv., 280, 4. nolo, 130; with inf., 331, IV and a; 276,
with subjv., 296, 1,1*. 2, ; nomen, decl., 35 ; nomen est, constr., 190, I nomen, as part of Roman name, 373. Nominative, 17; 170; used for voc, 171,
'
S,
vowel,
(K,
2,
;
I
;
as element in diphthong
;
pron., 3, i ; alternating w. it in certain classes of words, 9, i ; 2 ; 4
2,
I
i;
nom.
sing,
lacking, 57, 6;
pred.
3-stems, 23 ; 24 ; in citS, 77, dud,.8o, 2; in egS, 84; 363,
2,
a
;
in
4,
a; in
nom., 168. Nones, 371, 2,
subjv., 280
;
mods, 363,
b).
s, b)
;
4,
a; in
compounds
of pro-,
non, in answers, 162,
with poten.
0,
with deliberative, 277. non dubito quin, with subjv., 298; non
dubito, w. inf ., 298, a;
b.
2, o.
363, 4, c ; in amd, leS, etc., 363, 4, b. pron., 3, 1 ; f or o«, 7, i, e ; by contraction, 7, 2 ; in abl. sing, of 2d decl., 23
non modo non
quia,
for
2,
nSn modo nSn, 343,
a)
;
nonne, 162,
286,
I, b.
300,
i, b),
;
N.
in nom. sing, of 3d decl., 35 ; in Greek nouns, 47, 8 ; in adverbs, 77, 2 ; in ambo, 80, 2, a; in personal endings, 96. ob, prep. w. ace, 141 ; verbs comjraunded
with
ind., 286, i, c
with subjv.,
non quin, with subjv., 286, i, b. non quod, with ind., 286, i, c with
;
subjv.,
286,
i, b.
nds
=
ego, 242, 3.
nostri, as objective gen., 242, 2.
nostrum, as gen. of whole, 242, 2; as possessive gen., 242, 2, u. Nouns, 12 £E. 353; derivation of, 147 f. in -is not always l!-stems, 38, i. of agency, force, 3S3, 4. used in plu. only, 56used in sing, only, SSused only in certain cases, 57.
;
w. governing dat., 187, III. Obesdng, verbs of, w. dat., 187, II. Object, direct, 172 f. two objects w. same verb, 177; 178; indirect, 187 f.; inf. as obj., 326; 328; 329; 331. Objective gen., 200. Obligation, verb in expression of, 304, 3, a ; see also Duty. Oblique cases, 71, 2.
;
obHviscor, constr., 206,
i, J; 2. octodecim (ior iindevigintl), 81, 2.
Sdi, 133.
oe, 2, I
;
pron., 3, 2.
servos, 21, 2, a; aulal, «, aevom, equos, etc., 24;
Old forms, famiUds,
2,
b;
indeclinable, 58.
mid,
ted, 84,
3
;
sed, 8$, 3.
with change of meaning in plural, 6 1
syntax, 166
appositives,
f. f.
oUe, archaic for Ule, 87.
predicate, agreement of, etc., 167
agreement
of,
etc.,
169
f.
um), 148, i. -Mm in 2d decl., -on, Greek nouns, 2d decl. Onomatopoeia, 375, 4.
-oUis {a,
-om, later
23.
in, 27.
Noun and
adj. forms of the verb, 95, a.
opera, operae, 61.
GENERAL INDEX.
The
expressing, 138, 1.
references are to sections
279
and paragraphs.
Operations of nature, impersonal verbs
opiniSne with comparatives, 217, 4. opis, 57, 6; opis, 61. oportet, 138, II ; w. subjv., 295, 6 ; 8
inf.,
pars, paries, 61.
parte, abl. of place, 228, i, b.
partem, adverbially used, 185, i. Participation, adjs. of, w. gen., 204,
;
i.
w.
327
:
;
330.
Participial stem, 97, III; formation, iig. Participles, in -dns and -ens, 70, 3 ; gen.
plu. of in -um, 70, 7 97,
1,
;
oporiwU, with pres. inf. 'ought to have,'
pres. act. partic,
with perf. inf., 270, 2, a. oppidum (Genavam ad oppidum),
270, 2
2, a.
,182,
s; loi; 103; los; 107; no; 113; fut. act. partic, 97, III as one of the
;
principal parts of the verb, p. 55, foot-
Optative subjv., 272; 279; substantive clauses developed from, 296. tpUmdtes, decl., 40, i, d). opUmus, comp., 72. opto, w. subst. cl. developed from optative, 296, I.
note; 100; loi; 103; 105; 107; no; 113; perf. pass, partic, 97, III; 102; 104; 106; 108, in; 113; gerundive,
see Gerundive ;
fut. act., peculiar for;
ophtmtis, spelling, 9, i.
opus
-or,
est,
w.
abl., 218, 2;
w. partic, 218,
-or for -os,
;
4 perf. pass., w. act. or neuter meaning, 114, 2 ; of deponents, 112, 6; syntax, 336 ff. Participles, fut. act., 119, 4; denoting
mation
of, 119,
2, c.
purpose, 337,
in,
4.
nouns
34;
36;
gender of nouns
in, 43, i
36; exceptions
perf. act.,
how
supplied, 356,
2.
in gender, 44, 2; as suffix, 147, 2.
perf. pass., 336, 3 ; as pres., 336, 5. pres. partic, 336, 2 ; with conative
force, 336, 2, a.
Oratio Obliqua, 313
f.
Order of words, 348
Ordinals, 78, i
orior,
;
f
perf.
pass.,
with active meaning,
79.
conjugation, 123, VIX.
2.
i, a).
oriundus, constr., 215,
dro,
114, 2; pred. use of partic, 337, 2; participles equivalent to subordinate clauses, 337, 2 ; to coordinate clauses,
with ace, 178,
337, S;
Orpheus, decl. 47,
ortus, constr., 215.
Ss, decl., 57, 7.
OS, decl.,
6.
noun,
337, 6
;
w. opus est, 218, 2, c; with equivalent to abstract noun,
Orthography, peculiarities, 9.
with habed, 337,
;
7.
with
video, audio, facio, etc., 337, 3.
Particles, 139 f
341
f
42.
-OS, later -tis
-ds,
in 2d decl., 23.
in, 27.
Partitive apposition,. 169, 5. Partitive gen., so called, 201.
later -or in
OS,
-osus,
3d decl., 36, i. Greek nouns, 2d decl. fomi of suffix, 151, 3.
38, 1.
z.
ovis, decl.,
Oxymoron, 375,
P.
p, pron., 3, 3
;
by
assimilation,
8,
4; by
Parts of speech, 10. parum, comparison, 77, iparm, gen. of value, 203, 3. parvus, comparison, 72. Passive, verbs in, with middle meaning, 175, 2. <'); 256; verbs governing dat. used in pass, only impersonally, 187, II, b; constr. of passive verbs of saying, etc., 332, and note; how supplied
partial assimilation, 8, 5.
when
pM>r,
missing, 356,
2,
i-
paemtel, 138, II; with gen., 209. palam, as prep. w. abl., 144, :«.
conj., 109,
c);
113; with
inf.,
Palatal mutes,
2, 4.
paluster, decl., 68, i.
331, ni. Patrial adjs., 70, s, c). Patronymics, 148, 6.
pauhifit, formation, 77, 3-
Parasitic vowels,
7, 3.
paratus, with infin., 333. Pardon, verbs signifying, w. dat.,
paidus, speUing,
187,
9, 2. i.
pauper, decl., 70,
n.
Paris, 109,
2, a).
pedester, decl., 68, i.
p^or, quantity
<rf
first syllable,
362, 5,
z8o
The
pelagiis,
GENERAL INDEX.
references are to sections
and paragraphs.
of, constr., 212;
gender
of, 26,
:;.
Plenty and Want, verbs
cf.
Penalty, abl.
of, 208, 2, b.
i, <J).
218, 8.
penates, dec!., 40,
plenus, w. gen., 218, 8, a.
penes, prep. w. ace, 141. Pentameter, dactylic, 369.
Pleonasm, 374,
plerdque, 6, 5.
pluit, 138, 1.
3.
Penult,
6, 2.
per, prep.
w. ace, 141
of,
;
with ace. of time
331, I. supplied in Latin,
inf.,
Pluperfect tense, formation, 100; syntax,
; 287, 2 ; 288, 3 ; with immeaning, 133, a. Plural, 16; in sth decl., 52, 4; of proper names, SS. 4i o) of abstract nouns, S, 4, c); nouns used in, only, 56; with change of meaning, 61 ; stylistic
and
space, 181, 2.
263
;
26s
Perceiving, verbs
w.
pejrfect
Perfect active ptc,
how
3S6, '. Perfect pass, partic, force of w. depo-
'>
nent verbs, 112, b; dat. of agency sometimes used w., 189, 2; opus, 218,
2,
1..
use, 3S3, I
;
2.
PluraUatantum, %6;
203, 4. plus, decl.,
81, 4, i).
Perfect stem, 97, II; formation, 118. in -avi, -evi, -iiii contracted, 116,
I.
pluris, gen. of value,
203, 3;
of price,
70 ;
70,
4;
=
plus quam,
historical perf., 262.
217, 3-
with force of
pres. perf.
pres.,
262;
133,
2;
gnomic perf., 262, i 237, I ; perf. subjv. as historical tense, 268, 6
and and 2
;
hist. perf. distinguished,
poema, decl., 47, 5. Polysyndeton, 341,
porticus, gender, 50.
port/us, decl., 49, 3.
4, b).
e.
por-, inseparable prep., 159, 3,
and
7,
b
perf. inf.
perf. prohibitive, 279,
280, I
and 2;
perf. concessive,
w. oportuit, 270, 2 a perf. potential, 278;
;
posco, constr., 178,
1,
a).
3.
sequence of
268,
2.
tenses
after
perf.
inf.,
of —— of words, 348; 351, 350;
clauses,
Position
Periodic structure, 351, s. Periphrastic conj., 115; 269, 3; in conditional sentences of the 3d type, 304, in indir. disc, 322 ; in passive, 3, b)
;
351. Possessive dat., 190; gen., 198; contrasted with dat. of poss., 3S9, i. Possessive pronouns, 86 ; 243 = objec;
tive gen.,
I,
243,
2;
position
of,
^43,
a.
337,
8, b, I.
Possibility, verbs of,
put in indie, in cond.
infin.,
fut. inf., 270, 3.
sentences, 304, 3, o.
sing,
Persons,
95, 4; subject, 356, 3.
2d
of indefinite
possum,
126;
with present
I,
'I
might,' 271,
304, 3. apost, prep.
o)
;
in cond. sentences,
Personal pronouns, 84; 242; as subject, omission of, 166, 2 ; as objective genitives, 242, 2.
endings, 96. persuades, with dat.,
subjv., 295, I.
187, II,
a;
with
II.
w. ace, 144, i ; in expressions of time, 3S7, i. Post-positive words, 343, i, c). postedquam, 287; separated, 287, 3; with imperf. ind., 287, 4; w. pluperf. ind.,
287, 3
;
Persuading, verbs
ph,
2, 3,
of,
w. dat., 187,
with subjv., 287,
a.
5.
c;
2,
4;
3, 3.
posterus, posterior, comp., 73. 2.
with gen., 209. Pity, verbs of, w. gen., 209, i and 2. Place to which, 182 ; whence, 229; place where, 228.
piget,
poslremus, use, 241,
postridie,
with gen., 201,
3, a.
posttdo, constr., 178, i, a.
placitus, force, 114, ^.
Potential subjv., 272; 280. potim, with gen., 212, 2; with abl., 218,
I
;
,
Pleasing, verbs of, w. dat., 187, II, a; w. ace, 187, n, a, N.
pllbes, heteroclite, 59, 2, d),
filebi,
in gerundive constr., 339, 4,
adj., 73, I.
potius,
gen., 52, 2.
compared, 77, i. potni, poteram, in apodosis of conditional
GENERAL INDEX.
The
sent, of
references are to sections
3, a)
;
281
r,
and paragraphs.
4
3d type,
1,.
304,
inf.
in indir.
Privation, verbs of, w. abl, 214,
disc, 322,
potui,
and
c.
with pres.
=
'could
have,'
c.
pro, prep.
w.
abl., 142.
270, 2.
poUterim, in dependent apodosis, 322,
potus, force, 114, 2.
procid, as prep. w. abl., 144, 2. prohibed, w. abl., 214, 2; w.
subjv.
prae,
prep. w. abl.,
142;
verbs comdat., 187, III
2.
pounded with governing
Praenomen, 373.
praesenSy 125.
clause, 29s, 3. Prohibitions, method of expressing, 276. Prohibitive subjv., 276.
short in praeacuitts, etc., 362,
Prolepsis, 374, 5.
Pronominal
sonal,
adjs., 233.
;
Pronouns, defined, 82
86
;
praesum, w. dat., 187, III. prdnsus, force, 114, 2.
preci, -em, -e, S7, S, «•
; classes, 83 per84; reflexive, 85; possessive, demonstrative, 87 ; intensive, 88
Predicate, 163.
gen., 198, 3; 203, sPredicate nouns, 167; 168; in ace, 177; predicate nouns or adjs. attracted to dat., 327, 2, a; to nom., 328, 2.
relative, 89 ; interrogative, 90 ; indefinite, 91; pronominal adjs., 92; per-
sonal, omission of, as subject, 166, 2;
syntax,
242
f.;
.
personal,
242
f.
-adjectives, 232, 2;
177, 2.
possess., 243 f ; reflex., 244 f . ; reciprocal, 245 f.; demonstrative, 246 f. relative, 250 f.; indef., 252 f.; position,
Prepositions,
of, in compounds, 8, 4 ; g, 2 ; with ace, 141 with abl., 142; as adverbs, 144; inseparable
assimilation
3SO, 5
;
355-
;
Pronunciation,
Roman,
i.
3.
prope, compared, 77,
prepositions, 159, 3, N. ; position, 350, 7 ; prepositional phrases as attributive
modifiers, 353, s ; anastrophe of, 144, 3 ; 14T, 2 ; 142, 3 ; usage with abl. of
Sep.,
Proper names, abbreviated, 373.
nouns, 12,
3r.
;
propior, compared, 73, i
with ace, 141,
214
f.
;
with
abl.
of
source,
co-
proprius, with dat., 204, 2,0; with gen.,
204, 2. propter, prep. w. ace, 141.
2IS-
Present tense, 259
native, 259, 2
;
;
gnomic, 259,
i
;
;
historical, 259, 3
with
Prosody, 360
f.
jam pridem,jam
diu, etc., 259, 4; with d/um, 'while,' 293, 1; in Repraesentdtio,
prosper, decl., 63,
1.
318; pres. subjv., in-jm, 127, 2; pres.
partic, see Participle.
prosum, conj., 125, N. Protasis, 301 ;• denoting repeated action, 302, 3 ; without si, 30s \ of indef. 2d
sing., 302, 2
;
stem, 97, 1; formation,' 117.
perf., 257, I
see Conditions.
and
of,
2.
Provisos, 310.
Preventing, verbs
w. subjv. clause,
proxime, -us, comp., 73,
i
;
77,
i
;
with
29s, 3Price, indefinite, special 203, 4; also 22s, i. , abl. of, 225.
pridie,
ace, 141,
3.
words in
gen.,
prUdens, decl., 70.
-pte, 86, 3.
pudel, with gen., 209; w.
3,
inf.,
327,
1.
with gen., 201,
a;
with
ace.,
puer, decl., 23.
pulcher, comp., 71, 3-
144, 2.
Primary
primus,
tenses, see Principal tenses.
'first
who,' 241,
list,
2.
princeps, decl., 31. Principal parts, 99;
tenses, 258 f prius,
p. 251.
puppis, decl., 38, I. Purpose, dat. of purpose, 191 ; with dat. and gerundive, 191, 3; yr. ad and ace, 192, 2; subjv. of purp., 282, i; w. quo, 282, I, a ; yr.utne, 281, i,b; with
in purpose clause, 282, i, c; neve (neu) in purpose clauses, 282, i, d; neque, 282, i, e; rel. clauses of pur-
compared, compared, prmsquam, with
prior,
73, 1. 77, i.
ind.,
non
291
;
with subjv.,
292; separated, 291.
pose, 282, 2
;
w. disnus, mdigtms,
idd-
282
The
GENERAL INDEX.
references are to sections
and paragraphs.
neas, 283, 3 ; independent of principal verb, 282, 4; inf., denoting purpose,
denoting purpose, 337. 4; gerund, w. ad, 338, 3; gerun326, N.
;
fut. partic,
with ind., 281, 3; in indir. disc, 323 and a nulla causa est quin, 295, 7. quinam, 90, 2, d.
;
Quintilis
(=
Julius), 371.
dive, 339, 2
;
supine, 340.
qulppe qui, in clauses of characteristic^
283, 3Quirites, decl., 40, i, d.
quis, indef., 91
Q.
-?»-, pron., 3, 3
;
both
letters consonants,
I
;
interr., 90 ; 90, 2, c ; 252, ; nescid quis, 253, 6 ; with ne, si, nisi,
74, ».
num,
i, b),
91, S-
guaero, w. indir. questions, 300, quteso, 137, 2.
N.
quis est qui, 283, 2. quis quibus, 89.
=
Quality, gen., 203; abl., 224. quam, in comparisons, 217, 2;
perl., 240,
. .
with su. . .
3 ; ante . quam, post quam, prius quam, see antequam,
.
.
quisnam, inflection, go, 2, d. quispiam, inflection, 91. quisguam, inflection, 91; usage,
4.
252,
.
postquam, priusquam;
2, a.
quam
qui, 283,
quisgue, inflection, 91 ; usage, 252, 5. quisquis, inflection, 91, 8.
quam quam
si,
307,
i.
with subjv., 284, 4. quamquam, with ind., 309, 2 ; with subjv., 309, 6; = 'and yet,' 309, 5. quamvis, with subjv., 309, i ; 6 ; denotut,
quims, inflection, gi. quo, in purpose clauses, 282, i, a. quoad, with ind., 293 ; with subjv., 293,
III, 2.
ing a fact, 309, 6. quandS, 286, 3, h. quantii as gen. of price, 203, 4; of value,
203, 3.
quod, in causal clauses, 286, i ; in substantive clauses, 299; 331, V, a; 'as
quod
regards the fact,' 299, 2.' audierim, 283, 5; guod
283, 5-
sciam,
Quantity,
5.
of syllables, 5, of vowels, 5,
B A
; ;
363 f 362 ;
in
Greek
quod {si), adverbial ace, 185, 2. quom, early form of cum, 9, i. quo minus, after verbs of hindering,
29s, 3.
words, 365.
quasi, 307, i.
guoniam, in causal clauses, 286,
6,
i.
quota, conj., log, 2, a). -que, accent of word preceding,
s ; 341, 1, *) queo, 137, 1.
ical, 162,
;
3
;
6,
guoque, post-positive, 347. -quus, decl. of nouns in, 24.
2.
»)
;
4. <;)
Questions, word, sentence, 162
3
;
f.
;
rhetorr,
R.
pron.,
3,
4;
double (alternative), 162, indirect, 300; questions in indir.
89 ;
interr.,
3
;
for
8, 1.
j
between voweh
('Rhotacism'),
disc, 3x5.
qui, rel.,
90 ; indef ., 91
2, b
;
;
for
rapid, conj., 109, 2, a), rastrum, plurals of, 60, 2.
ratus, 'thinking,' 336, 5.
quis in indir. questions, 90,
ne,
si,
with
nisi,
nam,
;
91,
s;
i.
ii purpose
Reciprocal pronouns,
2S3. 3.
85,
2;
245;
4,
cf.
clauses, 282, 2
abl., 90, 2, a.
quia, in causal clauses, 286,
Reduplication in perf ., 118,
pres., 117, 7.
a)
;
in
quicum, 89. Quicumque, decl., 91, 8. quidam, decl., 91 syntax, 252, 3. quidem, post-positive, 347, 1.
;
refert, constr.,
Reference, dat. of, 188. 210; 211, 4. Reflexive pronouns, 85 ; 244 ; 249, 3.
rego, conj., 105.
quUibet, decl., 91. quin, in result clauses, 284, 3; in substantive clauses, 295, 3 ; 298 ; qui
=
mm in clauses of characteristic,
283, 4
Regular verbs, 101-113. rH, 362, 1, b). reicid, quantity, 36i2, S-
GENERAL INDEX.
The
Relative adverbs, in
282, 2.
rel.
283
references are to sections
and paragraphs.
of monosyllables in, preceded
clauses of purp.,
-J,
decl.
by one
;
or
more consonants,
;
40, i b).
clauses, of purp., 382, 2
w. dignus,
i-stems, 36.
sacer, ded., 65
indignus, idSneus, 282, 3; of characteristic, 283 ; denoting cause or opposition, 283, 3
comparison, 73,
3.
troduced by guin, 283,
283, 5 ; in284, 3; conditional rel. clauses, 311; 312, i and 2 ; relative as subj. of inf., 314,
;
restrictive,
saepe, compared, 77, i. s^, S7> 7; siUis, 61.
sdlubris, decl., 68, 3.
salHtaris,
4;
comp., 73,
4.
salve, sahete, 137, 4.
4;
rel. clause standing first, 251, 4, a. Samni^, decl., 40, i, d). pronouns, inflection, 8g; use, 250 sane, in answers, 162, 5. = Eng. demonstrative, 251, 6 sapid, conj., 109, 2, a). ff. agreement, 250; not omitted as in satur, decl., 65, 2. Eng., 2SI, s; fondness for subordinate Sajdng, verbs of, w. inf. of ind. disc,
;
clauses, sss-
331, 1.
relinguilur ut, 297, 2. reUqui, use, 253, 5.
sdo, quod sciam, 283, 5. -sco-dass of verbs, 117, 6; 155.
6.
reliquum
est,
with subjv., 295,
of,
scribere
si,
ad aUquem, 358,
2.
remex, decl., 32.
use, 244.
Remembering, verbs
206.
cases used w.,
207.
se-,
compoxmds
of, 159, 3,
;
»
;
Second
of, const.,
2.
conj., 103
ded., 23
peculiarities
Reminding, verbs
reminiscor, constr., 206,
Removing, verbs
of,
w.
abl., 214, 2.
reposes, constr., 178, i, a).
second person indefinite, 280, 3; 356, 3; 302. 2Secondary tenses, see Historical tenses. secundum, prep. w. ace, 141.
25;
securis, decl., 38, i.
RepraesetUdlid, 3t8. reqmes, requiem, requietem, 59,
res, decl., 51.
2, c).
secus,
compared,
77, i.
i
;
secus (virile secus), 185,
sed, se, 85, 3.
sed-,
s8.
Resisting, verbs of, w. dat., 187, II.
secutus, 'following,' 336, 5.
Restrictive clauses, 283, 5. Result, ace. of, 173, B; 176; clauses of, 284; 297; in dependent apodosis,
322,
reverter,
compoimds
I,
of, 159, 3, e.
sed, 343,
o).
and a;
sequence of tense
in,
268, 6.
sedile, decl., 39. sementis, decl., 38, i.
semi-deponent, 114, 3. Rhetorical questions, 162, 3; 277, a; in
indir. disc, 315, 2.
8, i
Rhotadsm,
;
36,
j..
Rivers, gender of
names
;
of, is,
A,
1.
rogata, abl. of cause, 219, 2.
rogd, constr., 178, i, c)
Semi-deponent verbs, 114. Semivowels, 2, 8. sertex, decl., 42 ; compared, 73, 4. Sentences, classification, 160 f.; simple and compound, 164; sentence-structure, 3SI ; sentence questions, 162, 2.
senlentia, abl. of accordance, 220, 3.
178,
i, a).
Roman prommdation,
Root, 17, 3, footnote
-rs,
3.
Separation, dat. of, 188,
2,
d)
;
gen., 212,
i.
3;
abl., 214.
decl. of
nouns
in, 40, i, c).
Sequence of tenses, 267 ; 268.
sequester, decl., 68, i.
place from which, 229, i, h. rwri, abl., place in which, 228, i, c. •"US, 57, 7 ; ace, limit of motion, 182, i,
riire, abl.,
sequitur ut, 297,
h.
-i.
sequor, conj., 113.
Serving, verbs of, w. dat., 187, II.
servos, decl., 24.
S.
s,
sese, decl., 85.
pron.,
Tow<5ls,
3, 8,
3;
changed to r between i; JT, ss, from dt, tt. Is,
Sexlilis
(
=
Augustus), 371.
of,
Sharing, adjs.
w. gen., 204,
;
i.
8,^.
Short syllables,
5, JB, 2
vowels,
Si
A,
3.
284
The
GENERAL INDEX.
references are to sections
and paragraphs.
omitted, 314,
5;
Showing, verbs of, w. two aces., 177. in prosi, with indir. questions, 300, 3 tasis, 301 omitted, 305.
; ;
ject ace. of inf., 184;
clauses as subject, 294 ; 29s, 6 ; subj., 327 ; 330.
inf. as
signifer, decl., 23, n.
sUentio, abi. of
manner, 220,
;
2.
Silvester, decl., 68, 3.
with dat., 204, 3 3; comp., 71, 4. si mirms, use, 306, 2. Simple sentences, 164.
similis,
with gen., 204,
Subjective gen., 199. Subjunctive, tenses in, 94, 3. in independent sentences, 272; by tenses of, 266 f.; attraction, 324; method of expressing future time in, 269;
volitive
(hortatory,
jussive,
prohibitive,
^
;
deliberative,
concessive),
simul, as prep., w. abl., 144, i.
simul
ac,
w.
ind., 287, i
2. 2.
si non, usage, 306, i svn, usage, 306, 3.
and
sin Tmmis, 306, 2, u. Singular, second person indefitiite, 280,
3
;
356, 3
;
302, 2. 331, III.
optative (wishes), 279; poten280; in clauses of purpose, 282; of characteristic, 283; of result, 284; of cause, 286; temporal clauses with postquam, postedguam, 287, 5 ; temporal clauses with cum, 288-290; with antequam and priusquam, 292; with
273
f.
;
tial,
sino,
with
inf.,
dum, donee, quoad, 293,
stantive clauses,
tions,
2.
III, 2;
sub-
siUs, decl., 38, i.
Smelling, verbs of, constr., 176, 5. Soft consonants, 2, 3, b), footnote
-so,
300;
294 f. ; indir. quesin apodosis of first tyjM
verbs
in, 155, 2.
conditions, 302, 4 ; jussive subjunctive as protasis of condition, 30s, 2 ; with
velut,
socer, decl., 23, 2.
iamquam,
etc.,
socium, gen. plu., 25,
sol, decl., 57, 7.
6, c).
est,
oportet, etc.,
295, 6
307 ; with necesse and 8; with
Ucet, 309,
etsi,
soleo, semi-dep., 114, i.
4 ; with quamvis, quamquam, cum, 'although,' 390 f.
soKtus, used as present partic, 336, 5. solus, 66 ; solus est qui with subjv., 283,
•z.
sublatus, p. 99, footnote.
Sonant consonants,
Soracte, decl., 39, 2.
2, 3,
ft),
footnote
2.
Sounds, classification, of the letters, 3.
Source, abl., 215. Space, extent of, 181.
2.
subm- = summ-, g, 2. Subordinate clauses, 165. Substantive clauses, 294 f. ; developed from the volitive, 29s, 1-8 ; developed from the optative, 296 with non dabilo, 298 ; indir. questions, 300 without ut, 295, 8 ; of result, 297 ; introduced by
; ;
Sparing, verbs
of,
w. dat, 187, II.
quod, 299. use of adjs., 236-238.
suiter, prep.
Specification, abl. of, 226.
spli, quantity, 362, i, 6.
w. ace, 143,
i.
;
Suffixes, 17, 3, footnote i
sui,
147
f.
;
Spelling, see
Orthography.
8s
;
as objective gen., 244, 2
=
pos-
Spirants, 2, 7. Spondaic verses, 368, 2.
sessive gen., 244, 2.
sum, conj., 100; omitted
166, 3.
when
auxiliary,
Spondee, 368,
1.
sponte sua, abl. accordance, 220, 3. spontis, -e, defective, 57, 2, ft.
Statutes, fut. imperative used in, 281, 1,
ft.
summus, 'top
of,'
241, i.
2.
sunt qui, with subjv., 283,
suopte, suSpte, 86, 3. supellex, decl., 42, 2.
Stem,
,
17, 3.
verb, 97; 117. Structure of sentences, see Sentences. Style, hints on, 352 f.
su
=
sv, 3, 3.
sub, pfep.
with ace. and abl., 143 ; comw. dat., 187, III. Subject, 163; nom., i66; ace, 184; sub-
super, prep. w. ace, 143, i. Sui)erlative degree; of adjs., 71, i; 2; in -^imus, 91, 3; in -Umus, 71, 4; irregular superl., 72 ; 73 ; lacking, 73. 4 ; formed w. maxime, 74 ; of adverbs,
76, 2
;
pounds
of,
irregular, 77, i
;
force of, 240,
2.
superus, compared, 73, 2.
GENERAL INDEX.
The
oupine, 340.
supra, prep. w. ace,
references are to sections
285
and paragraphs.
141.
Tetrameter verses, 366, ii. Thematic verbs, 101-113.
vowels, 117, footnote.
-sura, suffix, 147, 3, a.
Surd consonants,
sus, decl., 41.
2, 3, a),
footnote
i.
Thesis, 366,
6.
suslull, p. gg, footnote.
Third conj., 105; gender in, 43 f
log
f.;
decl.,
28
f.;
suus, decl., 86, i
;
244 ; suus quisque, 244,
4,0. Syllaia anceps, 366, 10. Syllables, division, 4 ; quantity Synapheia, 367, 6.
Synaeresis, 367, i. Synchysis, 350, 11, d).
of, s,
B.
Threatening, verbs of, t87, II. -tim, adverbs in,, IS7, 2. Time, at which, 230; during which, 181; 231, I ; within which, 231. timed ne and ut, 2q6, 2.
-tinus, suffix, 154.
-Ho, suffix, 147, 3.
Syncope, 7, 4 ; 367, 8. Synecdochical ace, 180.
Synizesis, 367, i.
Tmesis, 367,
-to
7.
Syntax, 160
f.
as suffix of verbs, 155, 2. -tor, use of uoims in, 353, 4. totus, 66; preposition absent w., in ex-
Systole, 367, 3.
pression of place relations, 228,
i, b).
Towns, gender
of,
of
names of,
is, 2
;
names
; th, 2, 3, c 3, 3; changes. dropped, 8, 3. laedet, 138, II ; w. gen., 209. Takiiig away, verbs of, w. dat., 188, 2, d.
t,
pron., 3, 3
8, 2
;
denoting limit of motion, r82, i, a denoting place where, 228, i, a; place from which, 22g, ji, a; appositives of town names, i6g, 4; 22g, 2. trSditur, traditum est, w. inf., 332, N. trans, prep. w. ace, 141 ; constr. of verbs
talenltim, gen. plu., 25, 6, a),
(amen, 343,
1, /.
tametsi, 309, 2.
compounded with, i7g. Transitive verbs, 174. Trees, gender of names of, is,
ires, decl., 80, 3.
2.
tamquam, tamguam
lanton, 6, 4.
-tas,
st,
w. subjv.. 307.
decl. of
Tribrach, 370,
-tatis,
2.
;
149;
I, e).
gen.
nouns
in.
trihus, decl., 4g, 3
gender, 50.
11.
40,
Trimeter verses, 366,
of, constr.,
Tasting, verbs
ted
176, 5.
Teaching, verbs
of, constr., 178, i, b.
trim, use, 81, 4, b). triummr, gen. plu. of, 23, 6, J).
-trlx, suffix, 147, I.
=
te,
84, 3.
Temporal
simvl
clauses,
ac,
w. postguam, ut, ubi, 287; w. cum, 288; 289; w.
;
Trochee, 366,
-trvm,
suffioc,
2.
147, 4.
of,
antequam and priusquam, 291 with dum, donee, quoad, 2g3.
292
Trusting, verbs
tii,
w. dat., 187,
II.
decl., 84.
Tendency, dat.
lener,
temporis {id temporis), 185, of, igi.
2.
-tudo, suffix, i4g.
tul,
as objective gen., 242, decl, 57,
7.
2.
ded., 64. of inf., 270; of Tenses, g4, 3; 257 ff. inf. in indir. disc, 317; of participles,
;
-tura, suffix, 147, 3. a).
tus,
-tus, suffix, 147,
3
;
iSi) 4.
2.
336; of subjv., 266 sequence of, 266268; in indir. disc, 317 ; 318. Tenues (consonants), 2, 3, a), footnote i.
;
tussis, decl, 38.
tute,
mtemet, tutimet, 84,
accusatives, 177;
datives, 191, 2.
knus, position, 142, 3. Terminations, 17, 3.
terni,
Two Two
178.
how
used, 81, 4, b.
i, c.
U.
», instead of i in
-ternus, 154terra marigue, 228,
krrester, 68, 3.
some words,
;
9, i
;
ir-.
stead of a,
9, i
g, 4-
286
The
«,
GENERAL INDEX.
references are to sections
and paragraphs.
becomes
»,
567, 4.
iSf-stems, 48.
utinam, with optative subjv., 279, i and 2. in gerundive utor, with abl., 218, i;
constr., 339, 4.
utjiote qui,
a-slems, 41.
-fi,
dat. sing., 4th decl., 49, 2.
i
;
introducing clauses of char-
liber, decl., 70, i.
acteristic, 283, 3.
2
;
«W, with ind., 287,
3-
with gen., 201,
utrdque, 6, 5.
uirum
.
.
.
fl«,
162, 4; 300, 4.
-ubKS, dat., plu., 4th decl., 49, 3. iUUis, decl., 66.
ulterior,
compared, 73,
i.
ullimus, use, 241, 2. »//ro, prep. w. ace, 141.
-ulus,
»,
I,
i; pron., 3, 3;
u, 367, S-
developing from «,
diminutive ending,
I.
150,
2;
d)
;
(a,
V,
367, 4-
«m), 148,
-um,
becomes
I St decl.,
;
gen. plu.
in, 21, 2,
2d
valde,
vaia,
by syncope,
for vaUde, 7, 4.
decl., 25, 6
for -ium, 70, 7.
-«nf2»f , -«n(2i, in
116, 2.
gerund and genmdive,
;
Cmis,
decl.,
66
;
92, i
ilnus est qui, with
363, 2, b). Value, indefinite, in gen., 203, 3. vatmus, gender of, 26, x, J). Variations in spelling, 9.
vds, decl., S9, i.
subjv., 283, 2.
«W», ending
3-
of desiderative verbs, 15s,
vel,
^rus, ending of
;
fut. act. partic, loi 103 ff. -Mr»j fuisse in apodosis of conditional sentences contrary-to-fact, in indir. disc, 32T, 2; -urus fuerim in indir. questions serving as apodoses,
3; 342, I, b). 342, I, 6) ; with superl., 240, 3. veUm, potential subjv., 280, d, a.
-ve, 6,
vellem, potential subjv., 280, 4.
velut, vehit si,
w. subjv., 307,
i.
venter, decl., 40, i, d).
Verba sentievdi
indir.
et declarandi,
w.
inf. of
322,
-»J,
b.
disc,
331,
I;
passive use of
neuter nouns of 2d decl. in, 26, 2 these, 332. nom. in 3d decl., in -«j, 36 gender of Verbal adjs., 150, 1-4. nouns in -«m of 3d decl., 43, 3 excep- Verbs, 94 f depersoiml endings, 96 tions in gender, 46, 4. ponent, 112; archaic and poetic forms, -Us, nouns of 3d decl. in, 43, 2. 116, 4; irregular, 124; ddective, 133;
; ;
.
;
;
usque ad, w. ace, 141, i. with abl, 218, ^. ut, temporal, 287, i ut, uli, in pur2 pose clauses, 282; in result clauses, 284; in substantive clauses, 295 f. substantive clauses without, 295, 8; with verbs of fearing, 296, a. ut ni = ne, 282, i, h; 29s, r, 4, 5. ut non instead of ne, 282, i, c ; in clauses
ilsus est,
; ;
substantive omission of, 166, 3; transitive, 174; used absolutely, 174, o; passives used as middles, 175, 2, (Q ; of smelling and tasting, constr., 176, s; not used in passive, 177, 3, a; intransitives impersonal in passive, 187, II, b 256, 3
impersonal,
138;
with
;
clauses of result, 297, 2
;
compounded with
III;
preps., constr., 187,
of result, 284, 297. ut qui, introducing clauses of characteristic,
283, 3.
1.
derivation of, 15s inchoative, 155, i;
of judicial action, constr., 208; inceptive or f. ;
frequentative or
ut
si,
w. subjv., 307,
66; 92,
i.
intensive, 155, 2; desiderative, ISS, 3;
uter, decl.,
ater, decl., 40, i, d).
denominative, 2S4f2.
156;
agreement
of,
utercumque, decl., 92,
Verb stems, 97; formation
vereor, conj.,
uterHbet, decl., 92, 2. uterque, decl., 92, 2 ; use, 355, a.
of, 117 f. 113; with subst. clause in
2.
subjv., 296,
i, J).
uterms, decl., 92, 2. iitUiu.t est Eng. potential, 271,
=
Vergilius, gen. of, 25, i.
veritus,
with present force, 336,
5.
GENERAL INDEX.
The
'*'».
;
287
of
adjs.
in,
71,
references are to sections
and paragraphs.
in answers, 162, s. 343. ii s) Verse, 366, 3. Verse-structure, 366 f
Versification, 361.
versus,
-volus,
S-
comparison
2, I s,
;
Vowels,
sounds of the,
;
3, i
;
quan;
tity of,
A
contraction
7.
of, 7, 2
para-
prep. w. ace,
141
;
follows its
sitic, 7, 3.
case, 141, J.
Vowel changes,
vulgus,
verum, 343, i,b).
vescor,
gender
of, 26, 2. in, 24.
with
abl., 218, x.
-imm. -vus, decl. of nouns
vesper, decl., 23, j.
vesperi, locative, 232, z.
vestri,
vestrum,
as obj./gen., 242, 2. as gen. of whole, 242, 2
j, u. inf.,
W.
;
as
Want, verbs and
c; d.
adjs. of,
w.
abl., 214, t,
possessive gen., 242,
veto,
with
veius, decl.,
vi,
331, II. 70; compared, 73, 3.
vicis,
Way by which,
We,
Whole, gen.
Wills,
I, i.
abl. of, 218, 9.
editorial, 242, 3.
of,
220, J.
201.
in,
vicem,
used adverbially, 185, i;
34.
3.
use of fut. imperative
281,
vice, 57, s, 6.
victor, dec].,
video,
with pres. partic, 337,
34.
Winds, gender of names of, 15, 1. Wish, clauses with dimi, etc., expressing
a,
vigil, decl.,
310.
in,
vioknler, formation, 77, 4, a.
vir, decl.,
,
Wishes, subjunctive
tive subjunctive.
279;
see Opta-
23.
gen. plu. of nouns
6, b).
compounded Wishing, verbs
296, I
;
with, 2$;
virus,
virile secus, constr.,
185, ±.
gender
41.
of, 26, z.
of, with subst. clause, with obj. inf., 331, IV. Word-formation, 146 f Word-order, 348 f
vis, decl.,
Word
questions, 162, r.
used in plu. only, 56, 3. Vocative case, 17 ; 19, i ; of Greek proper names in -as, 47, 4; of adjs. in
viscera,
-ius, 63,
I
;
171
;
in -i for
-ie,
25, i
I, 2,
9;
=
cj
and
gs, 32.
position of, 350, 3.
-X, decl.
of monosyllables in, preceded
by
Voiced sounds, 2, 3, u. Voiced consonants, 2, 3,
Voiceless consonants,
b).
•
one or more cons., 40, i, b) ; gender oi nouns in -x of 3d decl., 43, 2 ; exceptions, 45, 4.
2, 3, a.
Voices, 94; 256; middle voice, 256, 1. Volitive subjunctive, 272 f.
Y.
y, I. I-
vohms,
void,
2,
volt,
si)elling, 9, i.
inf.,
130; with
331,
IV and
1, a.
a; 270,
Yes,
a
;
with subj v., 296,
how expressed, 162, $. 'You,' indefinite, 356, 3 ; 280, 3
Z.
;
303, 2
spelling, 9, i.
z, I,
aolku, spelling, 8, i.
volucer, decl., 68, i.
I
;
2,
9.
2, a).
voPmUate, 220, j.
Zeugma, 374,
This action might not be possible to undo. Are you sure you want to continue?